CONST WM_USER			=		0x400		/* The WM_USER constant is used by applications to help define private messages for use by private window classes, usually of the form WM_USER+X, where X is an integer value. */
CONST CBEN_FIRST 		=		-800
CONST CCM_FIRST			=		0x2000
CONST ABE_BOTTOM		=		3		/* Bottom edge. */
CONST ABE_LEFT			=		0		/* Left edge. */
CONST ABE_RIGHT			=		2		/* Right edge. */
CONST ABE_TOP			=		1		/* Top edge. */
CONST ABM_ACTIVATE		=		0x00000006		/* Notifies the system that an appbar has been activated. An appbar should call this message in response to the WM_ACTIVATE message. */
CONST ABM_GETAUTOHIDEBAR	=		0x00000007		/* Retrieves the handle to the autohide appbar associated with an edge of the screen. */
CONST ABM_GETSTATE		=		0x00000004		/* Retrieves the autohide and always-on-top states of the Windows taskbar. */
CONST ABM_GETTASKBARPOS		=		0x00000005		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle of the Windows taskbar. */
CONST ABM_NEW			=		0x00000000		/* Registers a new appbar and specifies the message identifier that the system should use to send it notification messages. An appbar should send this message before sending any other appbar messages. */
CONST ABM_QUERYPOS		=		0x00000002		/* Requests a size and screen position for an appbar. When the request is made, the message proposes a screen edge and a bounding rectangle for the appbar. */
CONST ABM_REMOVE		=		0x00000001		/* Unregisters an appbar by removing it from the system's internal list. The system no longer sends notification messages to the appbar or prevents other applications from using the screen area occupied by the appbar. */
CONST ABM_SETAUTOHIDEBAR	=		0x00000008		/* Registers or unregisters an autohide appbar for an edge of the screen. */
CONST ABM_SETPOS		=		0x00000003		/* Sets the size and screen position of an appbar. The message specifies a screen edge and the bounding rectangle for the appbar. */
CONST ABM_SETSTATE		=		0x0000000a		/* Sets the autohide and always-on-top states of the Microsoft Windows taskbar. */
CONST ABM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED	=		0x00000009		/* Notifies the system when an appbar's position has changed. An appbar should call this message in response to the WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message. */
CONST ABN_FULLSCREENAPP		=		0x0000002		/* Notifies an appbar when a full-screen application is opening or closing. This notification is sent in the form of an application-defined message that is set by the ABM_NEW message. */
CONST ABN_POSCHANGED		=		0x0000001		/* Notifies an appbar when an event has occurred that may affect the appbar's size and position. */
CONST ABN_STATECHANGE		=		0x0000000		/* Notifies an appbar that the taskbar's autohide or always-on-top state has changed—that is, the user has selected or cleared the "Always on top" or "Auto hide" check box on the taskbar's property sheet. */
CONST ABN_WINDOWARRANGE		=		0x0000003		/* Notifies an appbar that the user has selected the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, or Tile Vertically command from the taskbar's shortcut menu. */
CONST ABS_ALWAYSONTOP		=		0x0000002		/* Always-on-top on, autohide off */
CONST ABS_AUTOHIDE		=		0x0000001		/* Autohide on, always-on-top off */
CONST ACM_OPEN			=		(WM_USER+100)		/* Opens an AVI clip and displays its first frame in an animation control. */
CONST ACM_PLAY			=		(WM_USER+101)		/* Plays an AVI clip in an animation control. The control plays the clip in the background while the thread continues executing. */
CONST ACM_STOP			=		(WM_USER+102)		/* Stops playing an AVI clip in an animation control. */
CONST ACN_START			=		1		/* Notifies an animation control's parent window that the associated AVI clip has started playing. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST ACN_STOP			=		2		/* Notifies an animation control's parent window that the associated AVI clip has stopped playing. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST ACS_AUTOPLAY		=		0x4		/* Starts playing the animation as soon as the AVI clip is opened. */
CONST ACS_CENTER		=		0x1		/* Centers the animation in the animation control's window. */
CONST ACS_TIMER			=		0x8		/* By default, the control creates a thread to play the AVI clip. If you set this flag, the control plays the clip without creating a thread; internally the control uses a Win32 timer to synchronize playback. */
CONST ACS_TRANSPARENT		=		0x2		/* Allows you to match an animation's background color to that of the underlying window, creating a "transparent" background. The control will send a WM_CTLCOLORSTATIC message to its parent. */
CONST ANSI_CHARSET		=		0
CONST ANSI_FIXED_FONT		=		11		/*  */
CONST ANSI_VAR_FONT		=		12
CONST ARABIC_CHARSET		=		178
CONST ASPECTX			=		40		/* Returns the relative width of a device pixel used for line drawing. */
CONST ASPECTXY			=		44		/* Returns the diagonal width of the device pixel used for line drawing. */
CONST ASPECTY			=		42		/* Returns the relative height of a device pixel used for line drawing. */
CONST AW_ACTIVATE		=		0x20000		/* Activates the window. Do not use this value with AW_HIDE. */
CONST AW_BLEND			=		0x80000		/* Uses a fade effect. This flag can be used only if hwnd is a top-level window. */
CONST AW_CENTER			=		0x10		/* Makes the window appear to collapse inward if AW_HIDE is used or expand outward if the AW_HIDE is not used. The various direction flags have no effect. */
CONST AW_HIDE			=		0x10000		/* Hides the window. By default, the window is shown. */
CONST AW_HOR_NEGATIVE		=		0x2		/* Animates the window from right to left. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation. It is ignored when used with AW_CENTER or AW_BLEND. */
CONST AW_HOR_POSITIVE		=		0x1		/* Animates the window from left to right. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation. It is ignored when used with AW_CENTER or AW_BLEND. */
CONST AW_SLIDE			=		0x40000		/* Uses slide animation. By default, roll animation is used. This flag is ignored when used with AW_CENTER. */
CONST AW_VER_NEGATIVE		=		0x8		/* Animates the window from bottom to top. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation. It is ignored when used with AW_CENTER or AW_BLEND. */
CONST AW_VER_POSITIVE		=		0x4		/* Animates the window from top to bottom. This flag can be used with roll or slide animation. It is ignored when used with AW_CENTER or AW_BLEND. */
CONST BALTIC_CHARSET		=		186
CONST BCM_FIRST 		=		0x1600
CONST BCM_GETIDEALSIZE 		=		(BCM_FIRST+0x1)		/* The BCM_GETIDEALSIZE message retrieves the size of the button that best fits its text and image, if an image list is present.  */
CONST BCM_GETIMAGELIST 		=		(BCM_FIRST+0x3)		/* The BCM_GETIMAGELIST message retrieves the BUTTON_IMAGELIST structure that describes the image list assigned to a button control. */
CONST BCM_GETTEXTMARGIN 	=		(BCM_FIRST+0x5)		/* The BCM_GETTEXTMARGIN message retrieves the margins used to draw text in a button control. */
CONST BCM_SETIMAGELIST 		=		(BCM_FIRST+0x2)		/* The BCM_SETIMAGELIST message assigns an image list to a button control.  */
CONST BCM_SETTEXTMARGIN 	=		(BCM_FIRST+0x4)		/* The BCM_SETTEXTMARGIN message sets the margins for drawing text in a button control. */
CONST BDR_INNER			=		0xC
CONST BDR_OUTER			=		0x3
CONST BDR_RAISED		=		0x5
CONST BDR_RAISEDINNER		=		0x4		/* The DrawEdge function draws one or more edges of rectangle. Raised inner edge. */
CONST BDR_RAISEDOUTER		=		0x1		/* The DrawEdge function draws one or more edges of rectangle. Raised outer edge. */
CONST BDR_SUNKEN		=		0xA		/*  */
CONST BDR_SUNKENINNER		=		0x8		/* The DrawEdge function draws one or more edges of rectangle. Sunken inner edge. */
CONST BDR_SUNKENOUTER		=		0x2		/* The DrawEdge function draws one or more edges of rectangle. Sunken outer edge. */
CONST BF_ADJUST			=		0x2000		/* If this flag is passed, shrink the rectangle pointed to by the qrc parameter to exclude the edges that were drawn.  */
CONST BF_BOTTOM			=		0x8		/* Bottom of border rectangle. */
CONST BF_DIAGONAL		=		0x10		/* Diagonal border. */
CONST BF_FLAT			=		0x4000		/* Flat border. */
CONST BF_LEFT			=		0x1		/* Left side of border rectangle. */
CONST BF_MIDDLE			=		0x800		/* Interior of rectangle to be filled. */
CONST BF_MONO			=		0x8000		/* One-dimensional border. */
CONST BF_RIGHT			=		0x4		/* Right side of border rectangle. */
CONST BF_TOP			=		0x2		/* Top of border rectangle. */
CONST BF_SOFT			=		0x1000		/* Soft buttons instead of tiles. */
CONST BF_TOPLEFT		=		(BF_TOP|BF_LEFT)		/* Top and left side of border rectangle. */
CONST BF_TOPRIGHT		=		(BF_TOP|BF_RIGHT)		/* Top and right side of border rectangle. */
CONST BF_BOTTOMLEFT		=		(BF_BOTTOM|BF_LEFT)		/* Bottom and left side of border rectangle. */
CONST BF_BOTTOMRIGHT		=		(BF_BOTTOM|BF_RIGHT)		/* Bottom and right side of border rectangle. */
CONST BF_RECT			=		(BF_LEFT|BF_TOP|BF_RIGHT|BF_BOTTOM)		/* Entire border rectangle. */
CONST BF_DIAGONAL_ENDBOTTOMLEFT	=		(BF_DIAGONAL|BF_BOTTOM|BF_LEFT)		/* Diagonal border. The end point is the bottom-left corner of the rectangle; the origin is top-right corner. */
CONST BF_DIAGONAL_ENDBOTTOMRIGHT=		(BF_DIAGONAL|BF_BOTTOM|BF_RIGHT)		/* Diagonal border. The end point is the bottom-right corner of the rectangle; the origin is top-left corner. */
CONST BF_DIAGONAL_ENDTOPLEFT	=		(BF_DIAGONAL|BF_TOP|BF_LEFT)		/* Diagonal border. The end point is the top-left corner of the rectangle; the origin is bottom-right corner. */
CONST BF_DIAGONAL_ENDTOPRIGHT	=		(BF_DIAGONAL|BF_TOP|BF_RIGHT)		/* Diagonal border. The end point is the top-right corner of the rectangle; the origin is bottom-left corner. */
CONST BITSPIXEL			=		12		/* Returns the number of adjacent color bits for each pixel. */
CONST BLACK_BRUSH		=		4		/* Black brush. */
CONST BLACK_PEN			=		7		/* Black pen. */
CONST BLACKNESS			=		0x00000042
CONST BLTALIGNMENT		=		119
CONST BM_CLICK			=		0x00F5		/* An application sends a BM_CLICK message to simulate the user clicking a button. This message causes the button to receive the WM_LBUTTONDOWN and WM_LBUTTONUP messages, and the button's parent window to receive a BN_CLICKED notification message. */
CONST BM_GETCHECK		=		0x00F0		/* An application sends a BM_GETCHECK message to retrieve the check state of a radio button or check box. */
CONST BM_GETIMAGE		=		0x00F6		/* An application sends a BM_GETIMAGE message to retrieve a handle to the image (icon or bitmap) associated with the button. */
CONST BM_GETSTATE		=		0x00F2		/* An application sends a BM_GETSTATE message to determine the state of a button or check box. */
CONST BM_SETCHECK		=		0x00F1		/* An application sends a BM_SETCHECK message to set the check state of a radio button or check box. */
CONST BM_SETIMAGE		=		0x00F7		/* An application sends a BM_SETIMAGE message to associate a new image (icon or bitmap) with the button. */
CONST BM_SETSTATE		=		0x00F3		/* An application sends a BM_SETSTATE message to change the highlight state of a button. The highlight state indicates whether the button is highlighted as if the user had pushed it. */
CONST BM_SETSTYLE		=		0x00F4		/* An application sends a BM_SETSTYLE message to change the style of a button. */
CONST BN_CLICKED		=		0		/* The BN_CLICKED notification code is sent when the user clicks a button.  */
CONST BN_DBLCLK			=		5		/* The BN_DBLCLK notification code is sent when the user double-clicks a button. This notification is sent automatically for BS_USERBUTTON, BS_RADIOBUTTON, and BS_OWNERDRAW buttons. Other button types send BN_DBLCLK only if they have the BS_NOTIFY styl */
CONST BN_DISABLE		=		4		/* The BN_DISABLE notification code is sent when a button is disabled. */
CONST BN_DOUBLECLICKED		=		5		/* The BN_DOUBLECLICKED notification code is sent when the user double-clicks a button. This notification is sent automatically for BS_USERBUTTON, BS_RADIOBUTTON, and BS_OWNERDRAW buttons. */
CONST BN_HILITE			=		2		/* The BN_HILITE notification code is sent when the user selects a button. */
CONST BN_KILLFOCUS		=		7		/* The BN_KILLFOCUS notification code is sent when a button loses the keyboard focus. The button must have the BS_NOTIFY style to send this notification message. */
CONST BN_PAINT			=		1		/* The BN_PAINT notification code is sent when a button should be painted. */
CONST BN_PUSHED			=		(BN_HILITE)		/* The BN_PUSHED notification code is sent when the push state of a button is set to pushed. */
CONST BN_SETFOCUS		=		6		/* The BN_SETFOCUS notification code is sent when a button receives the keyboard focus. The button must have the BS_NOTIFY style to send this notification message. */
CONST BN_UNHILITE		=		3		/* The BN_UNHILITE notification code is sent when the highlight should be removed from a button. */
CONST BN_UNPUSHED		=		(BN_UNHILITE)		/* The BN_UNPUSHED notification code is sent when the push state of a button is set to unpushed. */
CONST BS_3STATE			=		0x00000005		/* Creates a button that is the same as a check box, except that the box can be grayed as well as checked or cleared. Use the grayed state to show that the state of the check box is not determined. */
CONST BS_AUTO3STATE		=		0x00000006		/* Creates a button that is the same as a three-state check box, except that the box changes its state when the user selects it. The state cycles through checked, grayed, and cleared. */
CONST BS_AUTOCHECKBOX		=		0x00000003		/* Creates a button that is the same as a check box, except that the check state automatically toggles between checked and cleared each time the user selects the check box. */
CONST BS_AUTORADIOBUTTON	=		0x00000009		/* Creates a button that is the same as a radio button, except that when the user selects it, The system automatically sets the button's check state to checked and automatically sets the check state for all other buttons in the same group to cleared. */
CONST BS_BITMAP			=		0x00000080		/* Specifies that the button displays a bitmap. */
CONST BS_BOTTOM			=		0x00000800		/* Places text at the bottom of the button rectangle */
CONST BS_CENTER			=		0x00000300		/* Centers text horizontally in the button rectangle. */
CONST BS_CHECKBOX		=		0x00000002		/* Creates a small, empty check box with text. By default, the text is displayed to the right of the check box. To display the text to the left of the check box, combine this flag with the BS_LEFTTEXT style (or with the equivalent BS_RIGHTBUTTON style) */
CONST BS_DEFPUSHBUTTON		=		0x00000001		/* Creates a push button that behaves like a BS_PUSHBUTTON style button, but also has a heavy black border. If the button is in a dialog box, the user can select the button by pressing the ENTER key, even when the button does not have the input focus. */
CONST BS_FLAT			=		0x00008000		/* Specifies that the button is two-dimensional; it does not use the default shading to create a 3-D image. */
CONST BS_GROUPBOX		=		0x00000007		/* Creates a rectangle in which other controls can be grouped. Any text associated with this style is displayed in the rectangle's upper left corner. */
CONST BS_ICON			=		0x00000040		/* Specifies that the button displays an icon. */
CONST BS_LEFT			=		0x00000100		/* Left-justifies the text in the button rectangle. However, if the button is a check box or radio button that does not have the BS_RIGHTBUTTON style, the text is left justified on the right side of the check box or radio button. */
CONST BS_LEFTTEXT		=		0x00000020		/* Places text on the left side of the radio button or check box when combined with a radio button or check box style. Same as the BS_RIGHTBUTTON style. */
CONST BS_MULTILINE		=		0x00002000		/* Wraps the button text to multiple lines if the text string is too long to fit on a single line in the button rectangle. */
CONST BS_NOTIFY			=		0x00004000		/* Enables a button to send BN_KILLFOCUS and BN_SETFOCUS notification messages to its parent window. */
CONST BS_OWNERDRAW		=		0x0000000B		/* Creates an owner-drawn button. The owner window receives a WM_DRAWITEM message when a visual aspect of the button has changed. Do not combine the BS_OWNERDRAW style with any other button styles. */
CONST BS_PUSHBOX		=		0x0000000A		/* The PUSHBOX resource-definition statement creates a push-box control, which is identical to a PUSHBUTTON, except that it does not display a button face or frame; only the text appears. */
CONST BS_PUSHBUTTON		=		0x00000000		/* Creates a push button that posts a WM_COMMAND message to the owner window when the user selects the button. */
CONST BS_PUSHLIKE		=		0x00001000		/* Makes a button (such as a check box, three-state check box, or radio button) look and act like a push button. The button looks raised when it isn't pushed or checked, and sunken when it is pushed or checked. */
CONST BS_RADIOBUTTON		=		0x00000004		/* Creates a small circle with text. By default, the text is displayed to the right of the circle. */
CONST BS_RIGHT			=		0x00000200		/* Right-justifies text in the button rectangle. However, if the button is a check box or radio button that does not have the BS_RIGHTBUTTON style, the text is right justified on the right side of the check box or radio button. */
CONST BS_RIGHTBUTTON		=		(BS_LEFTTEXT)		/* Positions a radio button's circle or a check box's square on the right side of the button rectangle. Same as the BS_LEFTTEXT style. */
CONST BS_TEXT			=		0x00000000		/* Specifies that the button displays text. */
CONST BS_TOP			=		0x00000400		/* Places text at the top of the button rectangle. */
CONST BS_USERBUTTON		=		0x00000008		/* Obsolete, but provided for compatibility with 16-bit versions of Windows. Applications should use BS_OWNERDRAW instead. */
CONST BS_VCENTER		=		0x00000C00		/* Places text in the middle (vertically) of the button rectangle. */
CONST BST_CHECKED		=		0x0001		/* Indicates the button is checked. */
CONST BST_FOCUS			=		0x0008		/* Specifies the focus state. A nonzero value indicates that the button has the keyboard focus. */
CONST BST_INDETERMINATE		=		0x0002		/* Indicates the button is grayed because the state of the button is indeterminate. This value applies only if the button has the BS_3STATE or BS_AUTO3STATE style. */
CONST BST_PUSHED		=		0x0004		/* Specifies the highlight state. A nonzero value indicates that the button is highlighted. A button is automatically highlighted when the user positions the cursor over it and presses and holds the left mouse button. */
CONST BST_UNCHECKED		=		0x0000		/* Indicates the button is cleared. Same as a return value of zero. */
CONST CALLBACK_FUNCTION		=		0x00030000
CONST CAPTUREBLT		=		0x40000000
CONST CB_ADDSTRING		=		0x143		/* An application sends a CB_ADDSTRING message to add a string to the list box of a combo box. If the combo box does not have the CBS_SORT style, the string is added to the end of the list. */
CONST CB_BYTEARRAY		=		0		/* (sizeof(BYTEARRAY)) */
CONST CB_DELETESTRING		=		0x144		/* An application sends a CB_DELETESTRING message to delete a string in the list box of a combo box. */
CONST CB_DIR			=		0x145		/* An application sends a CB_DIR message to a combo box to add names to the list displayed by the combo box. The message adds the names of directories and files that match a specified string and set of file attributes. */
CONST CB_ERR			=		-1
CONST CB_ERRSPACE		=		-2
CONST CB_FINDSTRING		=		0x14C		/* An application sends a CB_FINDSTRING message to search the list box of a combo box for an item beginning with the characters in a specified string. */
CONST CB_FINDSTRINGEXACT	=		0x158		/* An application sends a CB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message to find the first list box string in a combo box that matches the string specified in the lParam parameter. */
CONST CB_GETCOMBOBOXINFO	=		0x164		/* An application sends the CB_GETCOMBOBOXINFO message to retrieve information about the specified combo box. */
CONST CB_GETCOUNT		=		0x146		/* An application sends a CB_GETCOUNT message to retrieve the number of items in the list box of a combo box. */
CONST CB_GETCURSEL		=		0x147		/* An application sends a CB_GETCURSEL message to retrieve the index of the currently selected item, if any, in the list box of a combo box. */
CONST CB_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT	=		0x152		/* An application sends a CB_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT message to retrieve the screen coordinates of a combo box in its dropped-down state. */
CONST CB_GETDROPPEDSTATE	=		0x157		/* An application sends a CB_GETDROPPEDSTATE message to determine whether the list box of a combo box is dropped down. */
CONST CB_GETDROPPEDWIDTH	=		0x15f		/* An application sends the CB_GETDROPPEDWIDTH message to retrieve the minimum allowable width, in pixels, of the list box of a combo box with the CBS_DROPDOWN or CBS_DROPDOWNLIST style. */
CONST CB_GETEDITSEL		=		0x140		/* An application sends a CB_GETEDITSEL message to get the starting and ending character positions of the current selection in the edit control of a combo box. */
CONST CB_GETEXTENDEDUI		=		0x156		/* An application sends a CB_GETEXTENDEDUI message to determine whether a combo box has the default user interface or the extended user interface. */
CONST CB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT	=		0x15d		/* An application sends the CB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT message to retrieve from a combo box the width, in pixels, by which the list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width). This is applicable only if the list box has a horizontal scroll bar */
CONST CB_GETITEMDATA		=		0x150		/* An application sends a CB_GETITEMDATA message to a combo box to retrieve the application-supplied value associated with the specified item in the combo box. */
CONST CB_GETITEMHEIGHT		=		0x154		/* An application sends a CB_GETITEMHEIGHT message to determine the height of list items or the selection field in a combo box. */
CONST CB_GETLBTEXT		=		0x148		/* An application sends a CB_GETLBTEXT message to retrieve a string from the list of a combo box. */
CONST CB_GETLBTEXTLEN		=		0x149		/* An application sends a CB_GETLBTEXTLEN message to retrieve the length, in characters, of a string in the list of a combo box. */
CONST CB_GETLOCALE		=		0x15A		/* An application sends a CB_GETLOCALE message to retrieve the current locale of the combo box.  */
CONST CB_GETTOPINDEX		=		0x15b		/* An application sends the CB_GETTOPINDEX message to retrieve the zero-based index of the first visible item in the list box portion of a combo box. */
CONST CB_INITSTORAGE		=		0x161		/* An application sends the CB_INITSTORAGE message before adding a large number of items to the list box portion of a combo box. This message allocates memory for storing list box items. */
CONST CB_INSERTSTRING		=		0x14A		/* An application sends a CB_INSERTSTRING message to insert a string into the list box of a combo box. Unlike the CB_ADDSTRING message, the CB_INSERTSTRING message does not cause a list with the CBS_SORT style to be sorted. */
CONST CB_LIMITTEXT		=		0x141		/* An application sends a CB_LIMITTEXT message to limit the length of the text the user may type into the edit control of a combo box. */
CONST CB_MAX_CAB_PATH		=		256
CONST CB_MAX_CABINET_NAME	=		256
CONST CB_MAX_CHUNK		=		32768
CONST CB_MAX_DISK		=		0x7FFFFFFF
CONST CB_MAX_DISK_NAME		=		256
CONST CB_MAX_FILENAME		=		256
CONST CB_MSGMAX			=		0x15B
CONST CB_MULTIPLEADDSTRING	=		0x163
CONST CB_OID_1			=		9
CONST CB_OID_2			=		10
CONST CB_OID_3			=		11
CONST CB_OID_4			=		12
CONST CB_OID_MAC_BINARY		=		(CB_OID_1)
CONST CB_OID_MIMETAG		=		(CB_OID_1)
CONST CB_OID_OLE		=		(CB_OID_1)
CONST CB_OID_OLE1		=		(CB_OID_2)
CONST CB_OID_OLE1_STORAGE	=		(CB_OID_3)
CONST CB_OID_OLE2		=		(CB_OID_2)
CONST CB_OID_OLE2_STORAGE	=		(CB_OID_3)
CONST CB_OID_TNEF		=		(CB_OID_1)
CONST CB_OKAY			=		0
CONST CB_RESETCONTENT		=		0x14B		/* An application sends a CB_RESETCONTENT message to remove all items from the list box and edit control of a combo box. */
CONST CB_SELECTSTRING		=		0x14D		/* An application sends a CB_SELECTSTRING message to search the list of a combo box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, it is selected and copied to the edit control. */
CONST CB_SETCURSEL		=		0x14E		/* An application sends a CB_SETCURSEL message to select a string in the list of a combo box. If necessary, the list scrolls the string into view. */
CONST CB_SETDROPPEDWIDTH	=		0x160		/* An application sends the CB_SETDROPPEDWIDTH message to set the maximum allowable width, in pixels, of the list box of a combo box with the CBS_DROPDOWN or CBS_DROPDOWNLIST style. */
CONST CB_SETEDITSEL		=		0x142		/* An application sends a CB_SETEDITSEL message to select characters in the edit control of a combo box. */
CONST CB_SETEXTENDEDUI		=		0x155		/* An application sends a CB_SETEXTENDEDUI message to select either the default user interface or the extended user interface for a combo box that has the CBS_DROPDOWN or CBS_DROPDOWNLIST style. */
CONST CB_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT	=		0x15e		/* An application sends the CB_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT message to set the width, in pixels, by which a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width). */
CONST CB_SETITEMDATA		=		0x151		/* An application sends a CB_SETITEMDATA message to set the value associated with the specified item in a combo box. */
CONST CB_SETITEMHEIGHT		=		0x153		/* An application sends a CB_SETITEMHEIGHT message to set the height of list items or the selection field in a combo box. */
CONST CB_SETLOCALE		=		0x159		/* An application sends a CB_SETLOCALE message to set the current locale of the combo box. If the combo box has the CBS_SORT style and strings are added using CB_ADDSTRING, the locale of a combo box affects how list items are sorted. */
CONST CB_SETTOPINDEX		=		0x15c		/* An application sends the CB_SETTOPINDEX message to ensure that a particular item is visible in the list box of a combo box. */
CONST CB_SHOWDROPDOWN		=		0x14F		/* An application sends a CB_SHOWDROPDOWN message to show or hide the list box of a combo box that has the CBS_DROPDOWN or CBS_DROPDOWNLIST style. */
CONST CB_STATSTRUCT		=		0		/* (sizeof(STATSTRUCT)) */
CONST CBEM_DELETEITEM		=		(CB_DELETESTRING)		/* Removes an item from a ComboBoxEx control. */
CONST CBEM_GETCOMBOCONTROL	=		(WM_USER+6)		/* Retrieves the handle to the child combo box control. */
CONST CBEM_GETEDITCONTROL	=		(WM_USER+7)		/* Retrieves the handle to the edit control portion of a ComboBoxEx control. A ComboBoxEx control uses an edit box when it is set to the CBS_DROPDOWN style. */
CONST CBEM_GETEXTENDEDSTYLE	=		(WM_USER+9)		/* Retrieves the extended styles that are in use for a ComboBoxEx control. */
CONST CBEM_GETIMAGELIST		=		(WM_USER+3)		/* Retrieves the handle to an image list assigned to a ComboBoxEx control. */
CONST CBEM_GETITEM		=		(WM_USER+4)		/* Retrieves item information for a given ComboBoxEx item. */
CONST CBEM_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_FIRST+6)		/* Retrieves the UNICODE character format flag for the control. */
CONST CBEM_HASEDITCHANGED	=		(WM_USER+10)		/* Determines whether or not the user has changed the text of a ComboBoxEx edit control. */
CONST CBEM_INSERTITEM		=		(WM_USER+1)		/* Inserts a new item in a ComboBoxEx control. */
CONST CBEM_SETEXTENDEDSTYLE	=		(WM_USER+14)		/* Sets extended styles within a ComboBoxEx control. */
CONST CBEM_SETIMAGELIST		=		(WM_USER+2)		/* Sets an image list for a ComboBoxEx control. */
CONST CBEM_SETITEM		=		(WM_USER+5)		/* Sets the attributes for an item in a ComboBoxEx control. */
CONST CBEM_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_FIRST+5)		/* Sets the UNICODE character format flag for the control. This message enables you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST CBEM_SETWINDOWTHEME	=		(CCM_FIRST+0xB)		/* Sets the visual style of a comboboxex control. */
CONST CBEN_BEGINEDIT 		=		(CBEN_FIRST-4)		/* Sent when the user activates the drop-down list or clicks in the control's edit box. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST CBEN_DELETEITEM 		=		(CBEN_FIRST-2)		/* Sent when an item has been deleted. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST CBEN_DRAGBEGIN 		=		(CBEN_FIRST-8)		/* Sent when the user begins dragging the image of the item displayed in the edit portion of the control. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST CBEN_ENDEDIT 		=		(CBEN_FIRST-5)		/* Sent when the user has concluded an operation within the edit box or has selected an item from the control's drop-down list. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST CBEN_GETDISPINFO 		=		(CBEN_FIRST-0)		/* Sent to retrieve display information about a callback item. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST CBEN_INSERTITEM 		=		(CBEN_FIRST-1)		/* Sent when a new item has been inserted in the control. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST CBEN_LAST 		=		-830
CONST CBES_EX_CASESENSITIVE 	=		0x10		/* BSTR searches in the list will be case sensitive. This includes searches as a result of text being typed in the edit box and the CB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message. */
CONST CBES_EX_NOEDITIMAGE 	=		0x1		/* The edit box and the dropdown list will not display item images. */
CONST CBES_EX_NOEDITIMAGEINDENT	=		0x2		/* The edit box and the dropdown list will not display item images. */
CONST CBES_EX_NOSIZELIMIT 	=		0x8		/* Allows the ComboBoxEx control to be vertically sized smaller than its contained combo box control. If the ComboBoxEx is sized smaller than the combo box, the combo box will be clipped. */
CONST CBES_EX_PATHWORDBREAKPROC =		0x4		/* Microsoft Windows NT only. The edit box will use the slash (/), backslash (\), and period (.) characters as word delimiters. This makes keyboard shortcuts for word-by-word cursor movement () effective in path names and URLs. */
CONST CBN_CLOSEUP		=		8		/* The CBN_CLOSEUP notification message is sent when the list box of a combo box has been closed. The parent window of the combo box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST CBN_DBLCLK		=		2		/* The CBN_DBLCLK notification message is sent when the user double-clicks a string in the list box of a combo box. The parent window of the combo box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST CBN_DROPDOWN		=		7		/* The CBN_DROPDOWN notification message is sent when the list box of a combo box is about to be made visible. The parent window of the combo box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST CBN_EDITCHANGE		=		5		/* The CBN_EDITCHANGE notification message is sent after the user has taken an action that may have altered the text in the edit control portion of a combo box. */
CONST CBN_EDITUPDATE		=		6		/* The CBN_EDITUPDATE notification message is sent when the edit control portion of a combo box is about to display altered text. This notification message is sent after the control has formatted the text, but before it displays the text. */
CONST CBN_ERRSPACE		=		-1		/* The CBN_ERRSPACE notification message is sent when a combo box cannot allocate enough memory to meet a specific request. */
CONST CBN_KILLFOCUS		=		4		/* The CBN_KILLFOCUS notification message is sent when a combo box loses the keyboard focus. The parent window of the combo box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST CBN_SELCHANGE		=		1		/* The CBN_SELCHANGE notification message is sent when the user changes the current selection in the list box of a combo box. The user can change the selection by clicking in the list box or by using the arrow keys. */
CONST CBN_SELENDCANCEL		=		10		/* The CBN_SELENDCANCEL notification message is sent when the user selects an item, but then selects another control or closes the dialog box. It indicates the user's initial selection is to be ignored. */
CONST CBN_SELENDOK		=		9		/* The CBN_SELENDOK notification message is sent when the user selects a list item, or selects an item and then closes the list. It indicates that the user's selection is to be processed. */
CONST CBN_SETFOCUS		=		3		/* The CBN_SETFOCUS notification message is sent when a combo box receives the keyboard focus. The parent window of the combo box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST CBS_AUTOHSCROLL		=		0x0040		/* Automatically scrolls the text in an edit control to the right when the user types a character at the end of the line. If this style is not set, only text that fits within the rectangular boundary is allowed. */
CONST CBS_DISABLENOSCROLL	=		0x0800		/* Shows a disabled vertical scroll bar in the list box when the box does not contain enough items to scroll. Without this style, the scroll bar is hidden when the list box does not contain enough items. */
CONST CBS_DROPDOWN		=		0x0002		/* Similar to CBS_SIMPLE, except that the list box is not displayed unless the user selects an icon next to the edit control. */
CONST CBS_DROPDOWNLIST		=		0x0003		/* Similar to CBS_DROPDOWN, except that the edit control is replaced by a static text item that displays the current selection in the list box. */
CONST CBS_HASSTRINGS		=		0x0200		/* Specifies that an owner-drawn combo box contains items consisting of strings. The combo box maintains the memory and address for the strings so the application can use the CB_GETLBTEXT message to retrieve the text for a particular item. */
CONST CBS_LOWERCASE		=		0x4000		/* Converts to lowercase all text in both the selection field and the list. */
CONST CBS_NOINTEGRALHEIGHT	=		0x0400		/* Specifies that the size of the combo box is exactly the size specified by the application when it created the combo box. Normally, the system sizes a combo box so that it does not display partial items. */
CONST CBS_OEMCONVERT		=		0x0080		/* Converts text entered in the combo box edit control from the Windows character set to the OEM character set and then back to the Windows character set. */
CONST CBS_OWNERDRAWFIXED	=		0x0010		/* Specifies that the owner of the list box is responsible for drawing its contents and that the items in the list box are all the same height.  */
CONST CBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE	=		0x0020		/* Specifies that the owner of the list box is responsible for drawing its contents and that the items in the list box are variable in height. */
CONST CBS_SIMPLE		=		0x0001		/* Displays the list box at all times. The current selection in the list box is displayed in the edit control. */
CONST CBS_SORT			=		0x0100		/* Automatically sorts strings added to the list box. */
CONST CBS_UPPERCASE		=		0x2000		/* Converts to uppercase all text in both the selection field and the list. */
CONST CC_CHORD			=		4		/* Device can draw chord arcs. */
CONST CC_CIRCLES		=		1		/* Device can draw circles. */
CONST CC_ELLIPSES		=		8		/* Device can draw ellipses. */
CONST CC_INTERIORS		=		128		/* Device can draw interiors. */
CONST CC_NONE			=		0		/* Device does not support curves. */
CONST CC_PIE			=		2		/* Device can draw pie wedges. */
CONST CC_ROUNDRECT		=		256		/* Device can draw rounded rectangles. */
CONST CC_STYLED			=		32		/* Device can draw styled borders. */
CONST CC_WIDE			=		16		/* Device can draw wide borders. */
CONST CC_WIDESTYLED		=		64		/* Device can draw borders that are wide and styled. */
CONST CCM_DPISCALE		=		(CCM_FIRST+0xc)		/* Enables automatic high DPI scaling in Tree-View controls, List-View controls, ComboBoxEx controls, Header controls, Buttons, Toolbar controls, and Image Lists. */
CONST CCM_GETCOLORSCHEME	=		(CCM_FIRST+3)
CONST CCM_GETDROPTARGET		=		(CCM_FIRST+4)
CONST CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_FIRST+6)		/* The CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT message retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST CCM_GETVERSION		=		(CCM_FIRST+0x8)		/* Returns the version number for a control set by the most recent CCM_SETVERSION message. */
CONST CCM_LAST			=		(CCM_FIRST+0x200)
CONST CCM_SETBKCOLOR		=		(CCM_FIRST+1)
CONST CCM_SETCOLORSCHEME	=		(CCM_FIRST+2)
CONST CCM_SETNOTIFYWINDOW	=		(CCM_FIRST+0x9)
CONST CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_FIRST+5)		/* The CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT message sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. This message enables you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST CCM_SETVERSION		=		(CCM_FIRST+0x7)		/* This message is used to inform the control that you are expecting a behavior associated with a particular version. */
CONST CCM_SETWINDOWTHEME	=		(CCM_FIRST+0xB)		/* Sets the visual style of a control. */
CONST CCS_ADJUSTABLE		=		0x20		/* Enables a toolbar's built-in customization features, which enable the user to drag a button to a new position or to remove a button by dragging it off the toolbar. */
CONST CCS_BOTTOM		=		0x3		/* Causes the control to position itself at the bottom of the parent window's client area and sets the width to be the same as the parent window's width. Status windows have this style by default. */
CONST CCS_NODIVIDER		=		0x40		/* Prevents a two-pixel highlight from being drawn at the top of the control. */
CONST CCS_NOMOVEY		=		0x2		/* Causes the control to resize and move itself horizontally, but not vertically, in response to a WM_SIZE message. If CCS_NORESIZE is used, this style does not apply. Header windows have this style by default. */
CONST CCS_NOPARENTALIGN		=		0x8		/* Prevents the control from automatically moving to the top or bottom of the parent window. Instead, the control keeps its position within the parent window despite changes to the size of the parent. */
CONST CCS_NORESIZE		=		0x4		/* Prevents the control from using the default width and height when setting its initial size or a new size. Instead, the control uses the width and height specified in the request for creation or sizing. */
CONST CCS_TOP			=		0x1		/* Causes the control to position itself at the top of the parent window's client area and sets the width to be the same as the parent window's width. Toolbars have this style by default. */
CONST CCS_VERT			=		0x80		/* Version 4.70. Causes the control to be displayed vertically. */
CONST CCS_LEFT			=		(CCS_VERT|CCS_TOP)		/* Version 4.70. Causes the control to be displayed vertically on the left side of the parent window. */
CONST CCS_NOMOVEX		=		(CCS_VERT|CCS_NOMOVEY)		/* Causes the control to resize and move itself horizontally, but not vertically, in response to a WM_SIZE message. If CCS_NORESIZE is used, this style does not apply. Header windows have this style by default. */
CONST CCS_RIGHT			=		(CCS_VERT|CCS_BOTTOM)		/* Version 4.70. Causes the control to be displayed vertically on the right side of the parent window. */
CONST CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET	=		136
CONST CLASS_E_NOAGGREGATION	=		0x80040110
CONST CLIPCAPS			=		36		/* Returns the flag that indicates the clipping capabilities of the device. If the device can clip to a rectangle, it is 1. Otherwise, it is 0. */
CONST CLR_DEFAULT		=		0xFF000000
CONST CLR_HILIGHT		=		(CLR_DEFAULT)
CONST CLR_INVALID		=		0xFFFF
CONST CLR_NONE			=		0xFFFFFFFF
CONST CLSCTX_INPROC_HANDLER	=		2
CONST CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER	=		0x1
CONST CLSCTX_LOCAL_SERVER	=		4
CONST CLSCTX_REMOTE_SERVER	=		16
CONST CLSCTX_LOCAL		=		(CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER|CLSCTX_INPROC_HANDLER|CLSCTX_LOCAL_SERVER)
CONST CLSCTX_SERVER		=		(CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER|CLSCTX_LOCAL_SERVER)
CONST CLSCTX_ALL		=		(CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER|CLSCTX_INPROC_HANDLER|CLSCTX_LOCAL_SERVER)
CONST CLSCTX_INPROC		=		(CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER|CLSCTX_INPROC_HANDLER)
CONST COINIT_APARTMENTTHREADED	=		0x2
CONST COINIT_MULTITHREADED	=		0
CONST COLOR_3DDKSHADOW		=		21		/* Dark shadow for three-dimensional display elements. */
CONST COLOR_3DFACE		=		15		/* Face color for three-dimensional display elements and for dialog box backgrounds. */
CONST COLOR_3DHIGHLIGHT		=		20		/* Highlight color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing the light source.) */
CONST COLOR_3DHILIGHT		=		20		/* Highlight color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing the light source.) */
CONST COLOR_3DLIGHT		=		22		/* Light color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing the light source.) */
CONST COLOR_3DSHADOW		=		16		/* Shadow color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing away from the light source). */
CONST COLOR_ACTIVEBORDER	=		10		/* Active window border. */
CONST COLOR_ACTIVECAPTION	=		2		/* Active window title bar. Specifies the left side color in the color gradient of an active window's title bar if the gradient effect is enabled. */
CONST COLOR_APPWORKSPACE	=		12		/* Background color of multiple document interface (MDI) applications. */
CONST COLOR_BACKGROUND		=		1		/* Desktop. */
CONST COLOR_BTNFACE		=		15		/* Face color for three-dimensional display elements and for dialog box backgrounds. */
CONST COLOR_BTNHIGHLIGHT	=		20		/* Highlight color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing the light source.) */
CONST COLOR_BTNHILIGHT		=		20		/* Highlight color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing the light source.) */
CONST COLOR_BTNSHADOW		=		16		/* Shadow color for three-dimensional display elements (for edges facing away from the light source). */
CONST COLOR_BTNTEXT		=		18		/* Text on push buttons. */
CONST COLOR_CAPTIONTEXT		=		9		/* Text in caption, size box, and scroll bar arrow box. */
CONST COLOR_DESKTOP		=		(COLOR_BACKGROUND)		/* Desktop. */
CONST COLOR_GRADIENTACTIVECAPTION	=	27		/* Right side color in the color gradient of an active window's title bar. COLOR_ACTIVECAPTION specifies the left side color. Use SPI_GETGRADIENTCAPTIONS with the SystemParametersInfo function to determine whether the gradient effect is enabled. */
CONST COLOR_GRADIENTINACTIVECAPTION	=	28		/* Right side color in the color gradient of an inactive window's title bar. COLOR_INACTIVECAPTION specifies the left side color. */
CONST COLOR_GRAYTEXT		=		17		/* Grayed (disabled) text. This color is set to 0 if the current display driver does not support a solid gray color. */
CONST COLOR_HIGHLIGHT		=		13		/* Item(s) selected in a control. */
CONST COLOR_HIGHLIGHTTEXT	=		14		/* Text of item(s) selected in a control. */
CONST COLOR_HOTLIGHT		=		26		/* Color for a hot-tracked item. Single clicking a hot-tracked item executes the item. */
CONST COLOR_INACTIVEBORDER	=		11		/* Inactive window border. */
CONST COLOR_INACTIVECAPTION	=		3		/* Inactive window caption. Specifies the left side color in the color gradient of an inactive window's title bar if the gradient effect is enabled. */
CONST COLOR_INACTIVECAPTIONTEXT	=		19		/* Color of text in an inactive caption. */
CONST COLOR_INFOBK		=		24		/* Background color for tooltip controls. */
CONST COLOR_INFOTEXT		=		23		/* Text color for tooltip controls. */
CONST COLOR_MENU		=		4		/* Menu background. */
CONST COLOR_MENUBAR		=		30		/* The background color for the menu bar when menus appear as flat menus (see SystemParametersInfo). However, COLOR_MENU continues to specify the background color of the menu popup. */
CONST COLOR_MENUHILIGHT		=		29		/* The color used to highlight menu items when the menu appears as a flat menu (see SystemParametersInfo). The highlighted menu item is outlined with COLOR_HIGHLIGHT. */
CONST COLOR_MENUTEXT		=		7		/* Text in menus. */
CONST COLOR_SCROLLBAR		=		0		/* Scroll bar gray area. */
CONST COLOR_WINDOW		=		5		/* Window background. */
CONST COLOR_WINDOWFRAME		=		6		/* Window frame. */
CONST COLOR_WINDOWTEXT		=		8		/* Text in windows. */
CONST COLORRES			=		108
CONST CP_ACP			=		0
CONST CP_NONE			=		0
CONST CP_RECTANGLE		=		1
CONST CP_REGION			=		2
CONST CPL_DBLCLK		=		5		/* Sent to the CPlApplet function of a Control Panel application when the user double-clicks the icon of a dialog box supported by the application. */
CONST CPL_DYNAMIC_RES		=		0
CONST CPL_EXIT			=		7		/* Sent once to the CPlApplet function of a Control Panel application before the dynamic-link library (DLL) containing the Control Panel application is released. */
CONST CPL_GETCOUNT		=		2		/* Sent to the CPlApplet function of a Control Panel application to retrieve the number of dialog boxes supported by the application. */
CONST CPL_INIT			=		1		/* Sent to the CPlApplet function of a Control Panel application to prompt it to perform global initialization, especially memory allocation. */
CONST CPL_INQUIRE		=		3		/* Sent to the CPlApplet function of a Control Panel application to request information about a dialog box that the application supports. */
CONST CPL_NEWINQUIRE		=		8		/* Sent to the CPlApplet function of a Control Panel application to request information about a dialog box that the application supports. */
CONST CPL_SELECT		=		4		/* This message was used by versions of Microsoft Windows earlier than Windows 95 and Microsoft Windows NT 4.0. */
CONST CPL_SETUP			=		200
CONST CPL_STARTWPARMS		=		9		/* Sent to notify CPlApplet that the user has chosen the icon associated with a given dialog box. CPlApplet should display the corresponding dialog box and carry out any user-specified tasks. */
CONST CPL_STOP			=		6		/* Sent to the CPlApplet function of a Control Panel application when the controlling application of the Control Panel closes. The controlling application sends the message once for each dialog box that the application supports. */
CONST CREATE_ALWAYS		=		2
CONST CREATE_NEW		=		1
CONST CS_BYTEALIGNCLIENT	=		0x1000		/* Aligns the window's client area on a byte boundary (in the x direction). This style affects the width of the window and its horizontal placement on the display. */
CONST CS_BYTEALIGNWINDOW	=		0x2000		/* Aligns the window on a byte boundary (in the x direction). This style affects the width of the window and its horizontal placement on the display. */
CONST CS_CLASSDC		=		0x0040		/* Allocates one device context to be shared by all windows in the class. Because window classes are process specific, it is possible for multiple threads of an application to create a window of the same class. */
CONST CS_DBLCLKS		=		0x0008		/* Sends a double-click message to the window procedure when the user double-clicks the mouse while the cursor is within a window belonging to the class. */
CONST CS_DROPSHADOW		=		0x00020000		/* Windows XP: Enables the drop shadow effect on a window. The effect is turned on and off through SPI_SETDROPSHADOW. Typically, this is enabled for small, short-lived windows such as menus to emphasize their Z order relationship to other windows. */
CONST CS_GLOBALCLASS		=		0x4000		/* Specifies that the window class is an application global class. For more information, see Application Global Classes. */
CONST CS_HREDRAW		=		0x0002		/* Redraws the entire window if a movement or size adjustment changes the width of the client area. */
CONST CS_NOCLOSE		=		0x0200		/* Disables Close on the window menu. */
CONST CS_OWNDC			=		0x0020		/* Allocates a unique device context for each window in the class. */
CONST CS_PARENTDC		=		0x0080		/* Sets the clipping rectangle of the child window to that of the parent window so that the child can draw on the parent. A window with the CS_PARENTDC style bit receives a regular device context from the system's cache of device contexts. */
CONST CS_SAVEBITS		=		0x0800		/* Saves, as a bitmap, the portion of the screen image obscured by a window of this class. When the window is removed, the system uses the saved bitmap to restore the screen image, including other windows that were obscured. */
CONST CS_VREDRAW		=		0x0001		/* Redraws the entire window if a movement or size adjustment changes the height of the client area. */
CONST CSIDL_ADMINTOOLS		=		0x30		/* Version 5.0. The file system directory that is used to store administrative tools for an individual user. The Microsoft Management Console (MMC) will save customized consoles to this directory, and it will roam with the user. */
CONST CSIDL_ALTSTARTUP		=		0x1d		/* The file system directory that corresponds to the user's nonlocalized Startup program group. */
CONST CSIDL_APPDATA		=		0x1a		/* Version 4.71. The file system directory that serves as a common repository for application-specific data. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Application Data.  */
CONST CSIDL_BITBUCKET		=		0xa		/* The virtual folder containing the objects in the user's Recycle Bin. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_ADMINTOOLS	=		0x2f		/* Version 5.0. The file system directory containing administrative tools for all users of the computer. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_ALTSTARTUP	=		0x1e		/* The file system directory that corresponds to the nonlocalized Startup program group for all users. Valid only for Microsoft Windows NT systems. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA	=		0x23		/* Version 5.0. The file system directory containing application data for all users. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_DESKTOPDIRECTORY	=	0x19		/* The file system directory that contains files and folders that appear on the desktop for all users. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Desktop. Valid only for Windows NT systems. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_DOCUMENTS	=		0x2E		/* The file system directory that contains documents that are common to all users. A typical paths is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents. Valid for Windows NT systems and Microsoft Windows 95 and Windows 98 systems with Shfolder.dll installe */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_FAVORITES	=		0x1F		/* The file system directory that serves as a common repository for favorite items common to all users. Valid only for Windows NT systems. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_PROGRAMS	=		0x17		/* The file system directory that contains the directories for the common program groups that appear on the Start menu for all users. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs. Valid only for Windows NT systems. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_STARTMENU	=		0x16		/* The file system directory that contains the programs and folders that appear on the Start menu for all users. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu. Valid only for Windows NT systems. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_STARTUP	=		0x18		/* The file system directory that contains the programs that appear in the Startup folder for all users. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs\Startup. Valid only for Windows NT systems. */
CONST CSIDL_COMMON_TEMPLATES	=		0x2d		/* The file system directory that contains the templates that are available to all users. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Templates. Valid only for Windows NT systems. */
CONST CSIDL_CONNECTIONS		=		0x31
CONST CSIDL_CONTROLS		=		0x3		/* The virtual folder containing icons for the Control Panel applications. */
CONST CSIDL_COOKIES		=		0x21		/* The file system directory that serves as a common repository for Internet cookies. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Cookies. */
CONST CSIDL_DESKTOP		=		0x0		/* The virtual folder representing the Windows desktop, the root of the namespace. */
CONST CSIDL_DESKTOPDIRECTORY	=		0x10		/* The file system directory used to physically store file objects on the desktop (not to be confused with the desktop folder itself). A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Desktop. */
CONST CSIDL_DRIVES		=		0x11		/* The virtual folder representing My Computer, containing everything on the local computer: storage devices, printers, and Control Panel. The folder may also contain mapped network drives. */
CONST CSIDL_FAVORITES		=		0x6		/* The file system directory that serves as a common repository for the user's favorite items. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Favorites. */
CONST CSIDL_FLAG_CREATE		=		0x8000
CONST CSIDL_FLAG_DONT_VERIFY	=		0x4000
CONST CSIDL_FLAG_MASK		=		0xFF00
CONST CSIDL_FONTS		=		0x14		/* A virtual folder containing fonts. A typical path is C:\Windows\Fonts. */
CONST CSIDL_HISTORY		=		0x22		/* The file system directory that serves as a common repository for Internet history items. */
CONST CSIDL_INTERNET		=		0x1		/* A virtual folder representing the Internet. */
CONST CSIDL_INTERNET_CACHE	=		0x20		/* Version 4.72. The file system directory that serves as a common repository for temporary Internet files. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local Settings\Temporary Internet Files. */
CONST CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA	=		0x1c		/* Version 5.0. The file system directory that serves as a data repository for local (nonroaming) applications. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local Settings\Application Data. */
CONST CSIDL_MYPICTURES		=		0x27		/* Version 5.0. The file system directory that serves as a common repository for image files. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\My Documents\My Pictures. */
CONST CSIDL_NETHOOD		=		0x13		/* A file system directory containing the link objects that may exist in the My Network Places virtual folder. It is not the same as CSIDL_NETWORK, which represents the network namespace root. */
CONST CSIDL_NETWORK		=		0x12		/* A virtual folder representing Network Neighborhood, the root of the network namespace hierarchy. */
CONST CSIDL_PERSONAL		=		0x5		/* Version 6.0. The virtual folder representing the My Documents desktop item. This is equivalent to CSIDL_MYDOCUMENTS.  */
CONST CSIDL_PRINTERS		=		0x4		/* The virtual folder containing installed printers. */
CONST CSIDL_PRINTHOOD		=		0x1b		/* The file system directory that contains the link objects that can exist in the Printers virtual folder. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\PrintHood. */
CONST CSIDL_PROFILE		=		0x28		/* The user's profile folder. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username. Applications should not create files or folders at this level; they should put their data under the locations referred to by CSIDL_APPDATA or CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA. */
CONST CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES	=		0x26		/* Version 5.0. The Program Files folder. A typical path is C:\Program Files. */
CONST CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES_COMMON	=	0x2b		/* Version 5.0. A folder for components that are shared across applications. A typical path is C:\Program Files\Common. Valid only for Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XP systems. Not valid for Windows Millennium Edition  */
CONST CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES_COMMONX86	=	0x2c
CONST CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86	=		0x2a
CONST CSIDL_PROGRAMS		=		0x2		/* The file system directory that contains the user's program groups (which are themselves file system directories). A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Start Menu\Programs.  */
CONST CSIDL_RECENT		=		0x8		/* The file system directory that contains shortcuts to the user's most recently used documents. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\My Recent Documents. To create a shortcut in this folder, use SHAddToRecentDocs. */
CONST CSIDL_SENDTO		=		0x9		/* The file system directory that contains Send To menu items. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\SendTo. */
CONST CSIDL_STARTMENU		=		0xb		/* The file system directory containing Start menu items. A typical path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Start Menu. */
CONST CSIDL_STARTUP		=		0x7		/* The file system directory that corresponds to the user's Startup program group. The system starts these programs whenever any user logs onto Windows NT or starts Windows 95. */
CONST CSIDL_FLAG_PFTI_TRACKTARGET	=	(CSIDL_FLAG_DONT_VERIFY)
CONST CURVECAPS			=		28
CONST CWP_ALL			=		0x0000
CONST CWP_SKIPDISABLED		=		0x0002
CONST CWP_SKIPINVISIBLE		=		0x0001
CONST CWP_SKIPTRANSPARENT	=		0x0004
CONST CW_USEDEFAULT		=		0x80000000		/* CW_USEDEFAULT is valid only for overlapped windows; if it is specified for a pop-up or child window, the x and y parameters are set to zero. */
CONST DC_BRUSH			=		18		/* Windows 2000/XP: Solid color brush. The default color is white. The color can be changed by using the SetDCBrushColor function. */
CONST DC_PEN			=		19		/* Windows 2000/XP: Solid pen color. The default color is white. The color can be changed by using the SetDCPenColor function. */
CONST DDL_ARCHIVE		=		0x20		/* Includes archived files. */
CONST DDL_DIRECTORY		=		0x10		/* Includes subdirectories. Subdirectory names are enclosed in square brackets ([ ]). */
CONST DDL_DRIVES		=		0x4000		/* All mapped drives are added to the list. Drives are listed in the form [-x-], where x is the drive letter. */
CONST DDL_EXCLUSIVE		=		0x8000		/* Includes only files with the specified attributes. By default, read-write files are listed even if DDL_READWRITE is not specified. */
CONST DDL_HIDDEN		=		0x2		/* Includes hidden files. */
CONST DDL_POSTMSGS		=		0x2000
CONST DDL_READONLY		=		0x1		/* Includes read-only files. */
CONST DDL_READWRITE		=		0x0		/* Includes read-write files with no additional attributes. This is the default setting. */
CONST DDL_SYSTEM		=		0x4		/* Includes system files. */
CONST DDOC_ALLOWMAPI		=		4
CONST DDOC_BADFILE		=		-2
CONST DDOC_BIN_AUTO		=		7
CONST DDOC_BIN_CASSETTE		=		14
CONST DDOC_BIN_ENVELOPE		=		5
CONST DDOC_BIN_ENVMANUAL	=		6
CONST DDOC_BIN_FIRST		=		1
CONST DDOC_BIN_LARGECAPACITY	=		11
CONST DDOC_BIN_LARGEFMT		=		10
CONST DDOC_BIN_LAST		=		(DDOC_BIN_CASSETTE)
CONST DDOC_BIN_LOWER		=		2
CONST DDOC_BIN_MANUAL		=		4
CONST DDOC_BIN_MIDDLE		=		3
CONST DDOC_BIN_ONLYONE		=		1
CONST DDOC_BIN_SMALLFMT		=		9
CONST DDOC_BIN_TRACTOR		=		8
CONST DDOC_BIN_UPPER		=		1
CONST DDOC_BTN_CANCEL		=		18
CONST DDOC_BTN_EMAIL		=		24
CONST DDOC_BTN_EXIT		=		3
CONST DDOC_BTN_FIRST		=		4
CONST DDOC_BTN_JUMP		=		8
CONST DDOC_BTN_LAST		=		7
CONST DDOC_BTN_NEXT		=		6
CONST DDOC_BTN_OK		=		19
CONST DDOC_BTN_PREV		=		5
CONST DDOC_BTN_PRINT		=		9
CONST DDOC_CENTER		=		1
CONST DDOC_CM			=		1
CONST DDOC_DECIMAL		=		3
CONST DDOC_DLG_JUMP_TEXT	=		17
CONST DDOC_DLG_JUMP_TITLE	=		16
CONST DDOC_DLG_PW_CANCEL	=		23
CONST DDOC_DLG_PW_INVALID	=		22
CONST DDOC_DLG_PW_TEXT		=		21
CONST DDOC_DLG_PW_TITLE		=		20
CONST DDOC_END_CLOSE		=		2
CONST DDOC_END_DELETE		=		4
CONST DDOC_END_PRINT		=		1
CONST DDOC_END_VIEW		=		0
CONST DDOC_ENV_10		=		20		/* Envelope#1041/8x91/2 */
CONST DDOC_ENV_11		=		21		/* Envelope#1141/2x103/8 */
CONST DDOC_ENV_12		=		22		/* Envelope#124\\276x11 */
CONST DDOC_ENV_14		=		23		/* Envelope#145x111/2 */
CONST DDOC_ENV_9		=		19		/* Envelope#937/8x87/8 */
CONST DDOC_ENV_B4		=		33		/* EnvelopeB4250x353mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_B5		=		34		/* EnvelopeB5176x250mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_B6		=		35		/* EnvelopeB6176x125mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_C3		=		29		/* EnvelopeC3324x458mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_C4		=		30		/* EnvelopeC4229x324mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_C5		=		28		/* EnvelopeC5162x229mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_C6		=		31		/* EnvelopeC6114x162mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_C65		=		32		/* EnvelopeC65114x229mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_DL		=		27		/* EnvelopeDL110x220mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_ITALY		=		36		/* Envelope110x230mm */
CONST DDOC_ENV_MONARCH		=		37		/* EnvelopeMonarch3.875x7.5in */
CONST DDOC_ENV_PERSONAL		=		38		/* 63/4Envelope35/8x61/2in */
CONST DDOC_ERR_OPEN_INPUT	=		-3
CONST DDOC_ERROR_OPEN_OUTPUT	=		-2
CONST DDOC_ERROR_OPEN_STUB	=		-1
CONST DDOC_FANFOLD_LGL_GERMAN	=		41		/* GermanLegalFanfold81/2x13in */
CONST DDOC_FANFOLD_STD_GERMAN	=		40		/* GermanStdFanfold81/2x12in */
CONST DDOC_FANFOLD_US		=		39		/* USStdFanfold147/8x11in */
CONST DDOC_FILEEXISTS		=		-3
CONST DDOC_FONTBOLD		=		1
CONST DDOC_FONTITALIC		=		2
CONST DDOC_FONTNORMAL		=		0
CONST DDOC_FONTSTRIKEOUT	=		8
CONST DDOC_FONTUNDERLINE	=		4
CONST DDOC_INCH			=		0
CONST DDOC_INIT_INTS		=		0		/* Initializationflag */
CONST DDOC_INPUT_NOT_FOUND	=		-5
CONST DDOC_INT_DOCINDEX		=		13		/* INTDocumentindex */
CONST DDOC_INT_OF		=		15		/* of */
CONST DDOC_INT_PAGE		=		14		/* Page */
CONST DDOC_INT_ZOOM		=		10		/* Zoomlabelcaption */
CONST DDOC_INT_ZOOMFIT		=		11		/* ZoomFitINTindropdown */
CONST DDOC_INT_ZOOMWIDTH	=		12		/* ZoomWidthindropdown */
CONST DDOC_LANDSCAPE		=		1
CONST DDOC_LEFT			=		0
CONST DDOC_MAIL_COL_INVALID	=		8
CONST DDOC_MAIL_FNF		=		1
CONST DDOC_MAIL_HEIGHT_INVALID	=		4
CONST DDOC_MAIL_LABHEIGHT_INVALID	=	6
CONST DDOC_MAIL_LABWIDTH_INVALID	=	7
CONST DDOC_MAIL_LINES_INVALID	=		10
CONST DDOC_MAIL_LNF		=		2
CONST DDOC_MAIL_NOH		=		3
CONST DDOC_MAIL_ROW_INVALID	=		9
CONST DDOC_MAIL_SUCCESS		=		0
CONST DDOC_MAIL_WIDTH_INVALID	=		5
CONST DDOC_MENU_DOC		=		2		/* DocumentMenu */
CONST DDOC_MENU_FILE		=		1		/* FileMenu */
CONST DDOC_NOHANDLES		=		-1
CONST DDOC_OUTPUT_EXISTS	=		-4
CONST DDOC_PAPER_10x14		=		16		/* 10x14in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_11X17		=		17		/* 11x17in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_A3		=		8		/* A3297x420mm */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_A4		=		9		/* A4210x297mm */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_A4SMALL	=		10		/* A4Small210x297mm */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_A5		=		11		/* A5148x210mm */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_B4		=		12		/* B4250x354 */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_B5		=		13		/* B5182x257mm */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_EXECUTIVE	=		7		/* Executive"71/2x10in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_FOLIO		=		14		/* Folio81/2x13in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_LEDGER		=		4		/* Ledger17x11in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_LEGAL		=		5		/* Legal81/2x14in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_LETTER		=		1		/* Letter81/2x11in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_LETTERSMALL	=		2		/* LetterSmall81/2x11in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_NOTE		=		18		/* Note81/2x11in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_QUARTO		=		15		/* Quarto215x275mm */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_STATEMENT	=		6		/* Statement51/2x81/2in */
CONST DDOC_PAPER_TABLOID	=		3		/* Tabloid11x17in */
CONST DDOC_PORTRAIT		=		0
CONST DDOC_RIGHT		=		2
CONST DDOC_SUCCESS		=		0
CONST DDOC_ZOOM100		=		512
CONST DDOC_ZOOM125		=		1024
CONST DDOC_ZOOM75		=		256
CONST DDOC_ZOOMFIT		=		128
CONST DDOC_ZOOMWIDTH		=		64
CONST DEFAULT_CHARSET		=		1
CONST DEFAULT_GUI_FONT		=		17		/* Default font for user interface objects such as menus and dialog boxes. This is MS Sans Serif. Compare this with SYSTEM_FONT. */
CONST DEFAULT_PALETTE		=		15		/* Default palette. This palette consists of the static colors in the system palette. */
CONST DESKTOPHORZRES		=		118
CONST DESKTOPVERTRES		=		117
CONST DEVICE_DEFAULT_FONT	=		14		/* Windows NT/2000/XP: Device-dependent font. */
CONST DEVICE_FONTTYPE		=		0x002
CONST DFC_BUTTON		=		4		/* Standard button */
CONST DFC_CAPTION		=		1		/* Title bar */
CONST DFC_MENU			=		2		/* Menu bar */
CONST DFC_POPUPMENU		=		5		/* Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Popup menu item. */
CONST DFC_SCROLL		=		3		/* Scroll bar */
CONST DFCS_ADJUSTRECT		=		0x2000		/* Bounding rectangle is adjusted to exclude the surrounding edge of the push button. */
CONST DFCS_BUTTON3STATE		=		0x0008		/* Three-state button */
CONST DFCS_BUTTONCHECK		=		0x0000		/* Check box  */
CONST DFCS_BUTTONPUSH		=		0x0010		/* Push button */
CONST DFCS_BUTTONRADIO		=		0x0004		/* Radio button */
CONST DFCS_BUTTONRADIOIMAGE	=		0x0001		/* Image for radio button (nonsquare needs image) */
CONST DFCS_BUTTONRADIOMASK	=		0x0002		/* Mask for radio button (nonsquare needs mask) */
CONST DFCS_CAPTIONCLOSE		=		0x0000		/* Close button */
CONST DFCS_CAPTIONHELP		=		0x0004		/* Help button */
CONST DFCS_CAPTIONMAX		=		0x0002		/* Maximize button */
CONST DFCS_CAPTIONMIN		=		0x0001		/* Minimize button */
CONST DFCS_CAPTIONRESTORE	=		0x0003		/* Restore button */
CONST DFCS_CHECKED		=		0x0400		/* Button is checked. */
CONST DFCS_FLAT			=		0x4000		/* Button has a flat border. */
CONST DFCS_HOT			=		0x1000		/* Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Button is hot-tracked. */
CONST DFCS_INACTIVE		=		0x0100		/* Button is inactive (grayed). */
CONST DFCS_MENUARROW		=		0x0000		/* Submenu arrow */
CONST DFCS_MENUARROWRIGHT	=		0x0004		/* Submenu arrow pointing left. This is used for the right-to-left cascading menus used with right-to-left languages such as Arabic or Hebrew.  */
CONST DFCS_MENUBULLET		=		0x0002		/* Bullet */
CONST DFCS_MENUCHECK		=		0x0001		/* Check mark */
CONST DFCS_MONO			=		0x8000		/* Button has a monochrome border. */
CONST DFCS_PUSHED		=		0x0200		/* Button is pushed. */
CONST DFCS_SCROLLCOMBOBOX	=		0x0005		/* Combo box scroll bar */
CONST DFCS_SCROLLDOWN		=		0x0001		/* Down arrow of scroll bar */
CONST DFCS_SCROLLLEFT		=		0x0002		/* Left arrow of scroll bar */
CONST DFCS_SCROLLRIGHT		=		0x0003		/* Right arrow of scroll bar */
CONST DFCS_SCROLLSIZEGRIP	=		0x0008		/* Size grip in bottom-right corner of window */
CONST DFCS_SCROLLSIZEGRIPRIGHT	=		0x0010		/* Size grip in bottom-left corner of window. This is used with right-to-left languages such as Arabic or Hebrew.  */
CONST DFCS_SCROLLUP		=		0x0000		/* Up arrow of scroll bar */
CONST DFCS_TRANSPARENT		=		0x0800		/* Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: The background remains untouched. */
CONST DIK_DOWN			=		0xD0		/* DownArrowonarrowkeypad */
CONST DIK_LEFT			=		0xCB		/* LeftArrowonarrowkeypad */
CONST DIK_RIGHT			=		0xCD		/* RightArrowonarrowkeypad */
CONST DIK_UP			=		0xC8		/* UpArrowonarrowkeypad */
CONST DKGRAY_BRUSH		=		3		/* Dark gray brush. */
CONST DL_BEGINDRAG 		=		(WM_USER+133)		/* Notifies the drag list box's parent window that the user has clicked the left mouse button on an item. A drag list box sends DL_BEGINDRAG in the form of a drag list message. */
CONST DL_CANCELDRAG 		=		(WM_USER+136)		/* Signals that the user has canceled a drag operation by clicking the right mouse button or pressing the ESC key. A drag list box sends DL_CANCELDRAG to its parent window in the form of a drag list message. */
CONST DL_COPYCURSOR 		=		2
CONST DL_CURSORSET 		=		0
CONST DL_DRAGGING 		=		(WM_USER+134)		/* Signals that the user has moved the mouse while dragging an item. DL_DRAGGING is also sent periodically during dragging even if the mouse is not moved. A drag list box sends this notification to its parent window in the form of a drag list message. */
CONST DL_DROPPED 		=		(WM_USER+135)		/* Signals that the user has completed a drag operation by releasing the left mouse button. A drag list box sends DL_DROPPED to its parent window in the form of a drag list message.  */
CONST DL_MOVECURSOR 		=		3
CONST DL_STOPCURSOR 		=		1
CONST DLGC_BUTTON		=		0x2000
CONST DLGC_DEFPUSHBUTTON	=		0x0010
CONST DLGC_HASSETSEL		=		0x0008
CONST DLGC_RADIOBUTTON		=		0x0040
CONST DLGC_STATIC		=		0x0100
CONST DLGC_UNDEFPUSHBUTTON	=		0x0020
CONST DLGC_WANTALLKEYS		=		0x0004
CONST DLGC_WANTARROWS		=		0x0001
CONST DLGC_WANTCHARS		=		0x0080
CONST DLGC_WANTMESSAGE		=		0x0004
CONST DLGC_WANTTAB		=		0x0002
CONST DOWNARROW			=		0xD0
CONST DRIVE_CDROM		=		5
CONST DRIVE_FIXED		=		3
CONST DRIVE_NO_ROOT_DIR		=		1
CONST DRIVE_RAMDISK		=		6
CONST DRIVE_REMOTE		=		4
CONST DRIVE_REMOVABLE		=		2
CONST DRIVE_UNKNOWN		=		0
CONST DRIVERVERSION		=		0		/* Returns the device driver version. */
CONST DS_3DLOOK			=		0x4		/* Gives the dialog box a nonbold font, and draws three-dimensional borders around control windows in the dialog box. The DS_3DLOOK style is required only by applications compiled for Windows NT 3.51. */
CONST DS_ABSALIGN		=		0x1		/* Indicates that the coordinates of the dialog box are screen coordinates. If this style is not specified, the coordinates are client coordinates. */
CONST DS_CENTER			=		0x800		/* Centers the dialog box in the working area of the monitor that contains the owner window. If no owner window is specified, the dialog box is centered in the working area of a monitor determined by the system. */
CONST DS_CENTERMOUSE		=		0x1000		/* Centers the dialog box on the mouse cursor. */
CONST DS_CONTEXTHELP		=		0x2000		/* Includes a question mark in the title bar of the dialog box. When the user clicks the question mark, the cursor changes to a question mark with a pointer. If the user then clicks a control in the dialog box, the control receives a WM_HELP message. */
CONST DS_CONTROL		=		0x00		/* Creates a dialog box that works well as a child window of another dialog box, much like a page in a property sheet. This style allows the user to tab among the control windows of a child dialog box, use its accelerator keys, and so on. */
CONST DS_FIXEDSYS		=		0x8		/* Causes the dialog box to use the SYSTEM_FIXED_FONT instead of the default SYSTEM_FONT. This is a monospace font compatible with the System font in 16-bit versions of Windows earlier than 3.0. */
CONST DS_LOCALEDIT		=		0x20		/* Applies to 16-bit applications only. This style directs edit controls in the dialog box to allocate memory from the application's data segment. Otherwise, edit controls allocate storage from a global memory object. */
CONST DS_MODALFRAME		=		0x80		/* Creates a dialog box with a modal dialog-box frame that can be combined with a title bar and window menu by specifying the WS_CAPTION and WS_SYSMENU styles. */
CONST DS_NOFAILCREATE		=		0x10		/* Windows 95/98/Me: Creates the dialog box even if errors occurs for example, if a child window cannot be created or if the system cannot create a special data segment for an edit control. */
CONST DS_NOIDLEMSG		=		0x100		/* Suppresses WM_ENTERIDLE messages that the system would otherwise send to the owner of the dialog box while the dialog box is displayed. */
CONST DS_SETFONT		=		0x40		/* Indicates that the header of the dialog box template (either standard or extended) contains additional data specifying the font to use for text in the client area and controls of the dialog box. */
CONST DS_SETFOREGROUND		=		0x200		/* Causes the system to use the SetForegroundWindow function to bring the dialog box to the foreground.  */
CONST DS_SHELLFONT		=		(DS_SETFONT|DS_FIXEDSYS)		/* Indicates that the dialog box should use the system font. The typeface member of the extended dialog box template must be set to MS Shell Dlg. Otherwise, this style has no effect. */
CONST DS_SYSMODAL		=		0x2		/* This style is obsolete and is included for compatibility with 16-bit versions of Windows. If you specify this style, the system creates the dialog box with the WS_EX_TOPMOST style. */
CONST DSTINVERT			=		0x00550009
CONST DT_BOTTOM			=		0x8		/* Justifies the text to the bottom of the rectangle. This value is used only with the DT_SINGLELINE value. */
CONST DT_CENTER			=		0x1		/* Centers text horizontally in the rectangle. */
CONST DT_CHARSTREAM		=		4		/* Character stream */
CONST DT_DISPFILE		=		6		/* Display file */
CONST DT_METAFILE		=		5		/* Metafile */
CONST DT_PLOTTER		=		0		/* Vector plotter */
CONST DT_RASCAMERA		=		3		/* Raster camera */
CONST DT_RASDISPLAY		=		1		/* Raster display */
CONST DT_RASPRINTER		=		2		/* Raster printer */
CONST DT_SINGLELINE		=		0x20		/* Displays text on a single line only. Carriage returns and line feeds do not break the line. */
CONST DT_WORDBREAK		=		0x10		/* Breaks words. Lines are automatically broken between words if a word would extend past the edge of the rectangle specified by the lpRect parameter. A carriage return-line feed sequence also breaks the line. */
CONST DT_ACCEPT_DBCS		=		0x20
CONST DT_AGENT			=		0x3		/* An automated agent, such as Quote-Of-The-Day or a weather chart display. */
CONST DT_CALCRECT		=		0x400		/* Determines the width and height of the rectangle. If there are multiple lines of text, DrawText uses the width of the rectangle pointed to by the lpRect parameter and extends the base of the rectangle to bound the last line of text. */
CONST DT_DISTLIST		=		0x1		/* A distribution list. */
CONST DT_EDITABLE		=		0x2
CONST DT_EDITCONTROL		=		0x2000		/* Duplicates the text-displaying characteristics of a multiline edit control. Specifically, the average character width is calculated in the same manner as for an edit control, and the function does not display a partially visible last line. */
CONST DT_END_ELLIPSIS		=		0x8000		/* For displayed text, if the end of a string does not fit in the rectangle, it is truncated and ellipses are added. If a word that is not at the end of the string goes beyond the limits of the rectangle, it is truncated without ellipses. */
CONST DT_EXPANDTABS		=		0x40		/* Expands tab characters. The default number of characters per tab is eight. The DT_WORD_ELLIPSIS, DT_PATH_ELLIPSIS, and DT_END_ELLIPSIS values cannot be used with the DT_EXPANDTABS value. */
CONST DT_EXTERNALLEADING	=		0x200		/* Includes the font external leading in line height. Normally, external leading is not included in the height of a line of text. */
CONST DT_FOLDER			=		0x1000000		/* Display default folder icon adjacent to folder. */
CONST DT_FOLDER_LINK		=		0x2000000		/* Display default folder link icon adjacent to folder rather than the default folder icon. */
CONST DT_FOLDER_SPECIAL		=		0x4000000		/* Display icon for a folder with an application-specific distinction, such as a special type of public folder. */
CONST DT_FORUM			=		0x2		/* A forum, such as a bulletin board service or a public or shared folder. */
CONST DT_GLOBAL			=		0x20000		/* A global address book. */
CONST DT_HIDEPREFIX		=		0x100000		/* Windows 2000/XP: Ignores the ampersand (&) prefix character in the text. The letter that follows will not be underlined, but other mnemonic-prefix characters are still processed. */
CONST DT_INTERNAL		=		0x1000		/* Uses the system font to calculate text metrics. */
CONST DT_LEFT			=		0x0		/* Aligns text to the left. */
CONST DT_LOCAL			=		0x30000		/* A local address book that you share with a small workgroup. */
CONST DT_MAILUSER		=		0x0		/* A typical messaging user.  */
CONST DT_MODIFIABLE		=		0x10000		/* Modifiable; the container should be denoted as modifiable in the user interface. */
CONST DT_MODIFYSTRING		=		0x10000		/* Modifies the specified string to match the displayed text. This value has no effect unless DT_END_ELLIPSIS or DT_PATH_ELLIPSIS is specified. */
CONST DT_MULTILINE		=		0x1
CONST DT_NOCLIP			=		0x100		/* Draws without clipping. DrawText is somewhat faster when DT_NOCLIP is used. */
CONST DT_NOFULLWIDTHCHARBREAK	=		0x80000		/* Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Prevents a line break at a DBCS (double-wide character string), so that the line breaking rule is equivalent to SBCS strings. */
CONST DT_NOPREFIX		=		0x800		/* Turns off processing of prefix characters. Normally, DrawText interprets the mnemonic-prefix character & as a directive to underscore the character that follows */
CONST DT_NOT_SPECIFIC		=		0x50000		/* Does not match any of the other settings. */
CONST DT_ORGANIZATION		=		0x4		/* A special alias defined for a large group, such as helpdesk, accounting, or blood-drive coordinator. */
CONST DT_PASSWORD_EDIT		=		0x10
CONST DT_PATH_ELLIPSIS		=		0x4000		/* For displayed text, replaces characters in the middle of the string with ellipses so that the result fits in the specified rectangle. */
CONST DT_PREFIXONLY		=		0x200000		/* Windows 2000/XP: Draws only an underline at the position of the character following the ampersand (&) prefix character. Does not draw any other characters in the string. */
CONST DT_PRIVATE_DISTLIST	=		0x5		/* A private, personally administered distribution list. */
CONST DT_REMOTE_MAILUSER	=		0x6		/* A recipient known to be from a foreign or remote messaging system. */
CONST DT_REQUIRED		=		0x4
CONST DT_RIGHT			=		0x2		/* Aligns text to the right. */
CONST DT_RTLREADING		=		0x20000		/* Layout in right-to-left reading order for bi-directional text when the font selected into the hdc is a Hebrew or Arabic font. The default reading order for all text is left-to-right. */
CONST DT_SET_IMMEDIATE		=		0x8
CONST DT_SET_SELECTION		=		0x40
CONST DT_TABSTOP		=		0x80		/* Sets tab stops. Bits 158 (high-order byte of the low-order word) of the uFormat parameter specify the number of characters for each tab. The default number of characters per tab is eight. */
CONST DT_TOP			=		0x0		/* Justifies the text to the top of the rectangle. */
CONST DT_VCENTER		=		0x4		/* Centers text vertically. This value is used only with the DT_SINGLELINE value. */
CONST DT_WAN			=		0x40000		/* A wide area network address book. */
CONST DT_WORD_ELLIPSIS		=		0x40000		/* Truncates any word that does not fit in the rectangle and adds ellipses.  */
CONST DTM_FIRST 		=		0x1000
CONST DTM_GETMCCOLOR 		=		(DTM_FIRST+7)		/* Retrieves the color for a given portion of the month calendar within a date and time picker (DTP) control. */
CONST DTM_GETMCFONT 		=		(DTM_FIRST+10)		/* Retrieves the font that the date and time picker (DTP) control's child month calendar control is currently using. */
CONST DTM_GETMONTHCAL 		=		(DTM_FIRST+8)		/* Retrieves the handle to a date and time picker's (DTP) child month calendar control. */
CONST DTM_GETRANGE 		=		(DTM_FIRST+3)		/* Retrieves the current minimum and maximum allowable system times for a date and time picker (DTP) control.  */
CONST DTM_GETSYSTEMTIME 	=		(DTM_FIRST+1)		/* Retrieves the currently selected time from a date and time picker (DTP) control and places it in a specified SYSTEMTIME structure. */
CONST DTM_SETFORMAT 		=		(DTM_FIRST+5)		/* Sets the display of a date and time picker (DTP) control based on a given format string. */
CONST DTM_SETMCCOLOR 		=		(DTM_FIRST+6)		/* Sets the color for a given portion of the month calendar within a date and time picker (DTP) control. */
CONST DTM_SETMCFONT 		=		(DTM_FIRST+9)		/* Sets the font to be used by the date and time picker (DTP) control's child month calendar control. */
CONST DTM_SETRANGE 		=		(DTM_FIRST+4)		/* Sets the minimum and maximum allowable system times for a date and time picker (DTP) control. */
CONST DTM_SETSYSTEMTIME 	=		(DTM_FIRST+2)		/* Sets the time in a date and time picker (DTP) control. */
CONST DTN_FIRST 		=		-760
CONST DTN_CLOSEUP 		=		(DTN_FIRST+7)		/* Sent by a date and time picker (DTP) control when the user closes the drop-down month calendar. The month calendar is closed when the user chooses a date from the month calendar or clicks the drop-down arrow while the calendar is open. */
CONST DTN_DATETIMECHANGE 	=		(DTN_FIRST+1)		/* Sent by a date and time picker (DTP) control whenever a change occurs. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST DTN_DROPDOWN 		=		(DTN_FIRST+6)		/* Sent by a date and time picker (DTP) control when the user activates the drop-down month calendar. */
CONST DTN_FORMAT 		=		(DTN_FIRST+4)		/* Sent by a date and time picker (DTP) control to request text to be displayed in a callback field. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST DTN_FORMATQUERY 		=		(DTN_FIRST+5)		/* Sent by a date and time picker (DTP) control to retrieve the maximum allowable size of the string that will be displayed in a callback field. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST DTN_LAST 			=		-799
CONST DTN_USERSTRING 		=		(DTN_FIRST+2)		/* Sent by a date and time picker (DTP) control when a user finishes editing a string in the control. This notification message is only sent by DTP controls that are set to the DTS_APPCANPARSE style. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY mess */
CONST DTN_WMKEYDOWN 		=		(DTN_FIRST+3)		/* Sent by a date and time picker (DTP) control when the user types in a callback field. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST DTS_APPCANPARSE 		=		0x10		/* Allows the owner to parse user input and take necessary action. It enables users to edit within the client area of the control when they press the F2 key. The control sends DTN_USERSTRING notification messages when users are finished. */
CONST DTS_LONGDATEFORMAT 	=		0x4		/* Displays the date in long format. The default format string for this style is defined by LOCALE_SLONGDATEFORMAT, which produces output like "Friday, April 19, 1996". */
CONST DTS_RIGHTALIGN 		=		0x20		/* The drop-down month calendar will be right-aligned with the control instead of left-aligned, which is the default. */
CONST DTS_SHORTDATECENTURYFORMAT=		0xC		/* Version 5.80. Similar to the DTS_SHORTDATEFORMAT style, except the year is a four-digit field. The default format string for this style is based on LOCALE_SSHORTDATE. The output looks like: "4/19/1996". */
CONST DTS_SHORTDATEFORMAT 	=		0x0		/* Displays the date in short format. The default format string for this style is defined by LOCALE_SSHORTDATE, which produces output like "4/19/96". */
CONST DTS_SHOWNONE 		=		0x2		/* It is possible to have no date currently selected in the control. With this style, the control displays a check box that users can check once they have entered or selected a date. */
CONST DTS_TIMEFORMAT 		=		0x9		/* Displays the time. The default format string for this style is defined by LOCALE_STIMEFORMAT, which produces output like "5:31:42 PM". */
CONST DTS_UPDOWN 		=		0x1		/* Places an up-down control to the right of the DTP control to modify date-time values. This style can be used in place of the drop-down month calendar, which is the default style. */
CONST DWL_DLGPROC		=		4		/* Retrieves the address of the dialog box procedure, or a handle representing the address of the dialog box procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the dialog box procedure. */
CONST DWL_MSGRESULT		=		0		/* Retrieves the return value of a message processed in the dialog box procedure. */
CONST DWL_USER			=		8		/* Retrieves extra information private to the application, such as handles or pointers. */
CONST DWLP_MSGRESULT		=		0		/* Retrieves the return value of a message processed in the dialog box procedure. */
CONST E_NOINTERFACE		=		0x80004002
CONST EASTEUROPE_CHARSET	=		238
CONST EC_RIGHTMARGIN		=		0x2		/* Sets the right margin. */
CONST ECM_FIRST			=		0x1500
CONST EDGE_BUMP			=		(BDR_RAISEDOUTER|BDR_SUNKENINNER)
CONST EDGE_ETCHED		=		(BDR_SUNKENOUTER|BDR_RAISEDINNER)
CONST EDGE_RAISED		=		(BDR_RAISEDOUTER|BDR_RAISEDINNER)		/* Combination of BDR_RAISEDOUTER and BDR_RAISEDINNER. */
CONST EDGE_SUNKEN		=		(BDR_SUNKENOUTER|BDR_SUNKENINNER)		/* Combination of BDR_SUNKENOUTER and BDR_SUNKENINNER. */
CONST EM_AUTOURLDETECT		=		(WM_USER+91)		/* An EM_AUTOURLDETECT message enables or disables automatic detection of URLs by a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_CANPASTE		=		(WM_USER+50)		/* The EM_CANPASTE message determines whether a rich edit control can paste a specified clipboard format. */
CONST EM_CANREDO		=		(WM_USER+85)		/* The EM_CANREDO message determines whether there are any actions in the control redo queue. */
CONST EM_CANUNDO		=		0xC6		/* The EM_CANUNDO message determines whether there are any actions in an edit control's undo queue. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_CHARFROMPOS		=		0xD7		/* The EM_CHARFROMPOS message retrieves information about the character closest to a specified point in the client area of an edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_CONVPOSITION		=		(WM_USER+108)
CONST EM_DISPLAYBAND		=		(WM_USER+51)		/* The EM_DISPLAYBAND message displays a portion of the contents of a rich edit control, as previously formatted for a device using the EM_FORMATRANGE message. */
CONST EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER	=		0xCD		/* The EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER message resets the undo flag of an edit control. The undo flag is set whenever an operation within the edit control can be undone. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_EXGETSEL		=		(WM_USER+52)		/* The EM_EXGETSEL message retrieves the starting and ending character positions of the selection in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_EXLIMITTEXT		=		(WM_USER+53)		/* The EM_EXLIMITTEXT message sets an upper limit to the amount of text the user can type or paste into a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_EXLINEFROMCHAR		=		(WM_USER+54)		/* The EM_EXLINEFROMCHAR message determines which line contains the specified character in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_EXSETSEL		=		(WM_USER+55)		/* The EM_EXSETSEL message selects a range of characters and/or Component Object Model (COM) objects in a Microsoft Rich Edit control. */
CONST EM_FINDTEXT		=		(WM_USER+56)		/* The EM_FINDTEXT message finds text within a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_FINDTEXTEX		=		(WM_USER+79)		/* The EM_FINDTEXTEX message finds text within a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_FINDWORDBREAK		=		(WM_USER+76)		/* The EM_FINDWORDBREAK message finds the next word break before or after the specified character position or retrieves information about the character at that position. */
CONST EM_FMTLINES		=		0xC8		/* The EM_FMTLINES message sets a flag that determines whether a multiline edit control includes soft line-break characters. */
CONST EM_FORMATRANGE		=		(WM_USER+57)		/* The EM_FORMATRANGE message formats a range of text in a rich edit control for a specific device. */
CONST EM_GETAUTOURLDETECT	=		(WM_USER+92)		/* The EM_GETAUTOURLDETECT message indicates whether the auto URL detection is turned on in the rich edit control.  */
CONST EM_GETBIDIOPTIONS		=		(WM_USER+201)		/* The EM_GETBIDIOPTIONS message indicates the current state of the bidirectional options in the rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETCHARFORMAT		=		(WM_USER+58)		/* The EM_GETCHARFORMAT message determines the current character formatting in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETEDITSTYLE		=		(WM_USER+205)		/* The EM_GETEDITSTYLE message retrieves the current edit style flags. */
CONST EM_GETEVENTMASK		=		(WM_USER+59)		/* The EM_GETEVENTMASK message retrieves the event mask for a rich edit control. The event mask specifies which notification messages the control sends to its parent window. */
CONST EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE	=		0xCE		/* The EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE message retrieves the zero-based index of the uppermost visible line in a multiline edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETHANDLE		=		0xBD		/* The EM_GETHANDLE message retrieves a handle of the memory currently allocated for a multiline edit control's text. */
CONST EM_GETIMECOLOR		=		(WM_USER+105)		/* The EM_GETIMECOLOR message retrieves the Input Method Editor (IME) composition color. This message is available only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EM_GETIMECOMPMODE		=		(WM_USER+122)		/* An application sends an EM_GETIMECOMPMODE message to get the current IME mode for a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETIMEMODEBIAS		=		(WM_USER+127)		/* An application sends an EM_GETIMEMODEBIAS message to get the Input Method Editor (IME) mode bias for a Microsoft Rich Edit control. */
CONST EM_GETIMEOPTIONS		=		(WM_USER+107)		/* The EM_GETIMEOPTIONS message retrieves the current Input Method Editor (IME) options. This message is available only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EM_GETIMESTATUS		=		0xD9		/* The EM_GETIMESTATUS message retrieves a set of status flags that indicate how the edit control interacts with the Input Method Editor (IME).  */
CONST EM_GETLANGOPTIONS		=		(WM_USER+121)		/* An application sends an EM_GETLANGOPTIONS message to get a rich edit control's option settings for Input Method Editor (IME) and Asian language support */
CONST EM_GETLIMITTEXT		=		(WM_USER+37)		/* The EM_GETLIMITTEXT message retrieves the current text limit for an edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETLINE		=		0xC4		/* The EM_GETLINE message copies a line of text from an edit control and places it in a specified buffer. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETLINECOUNT		=		0xBA		/* The EM_GETLINECOUNT message retrieves the number of lines in a multiline edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETMARGINS		=		0xD4		/* An application sends the EM_GETMARGINS message to retrieve the widths of the left and right margins for an edit control. */
CONST EM_GETMODIFY		=		0xB8		/* The EM_GETMODIFY message retrieves the state of an edit control's modification flag. The flag indicates whether the contents of the edit control have been modified. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETOLEINTERFACE	=		(WM_USER+60)		/* The EM_GETOLEINTERFACE message retrieves an IRichEditOle object that a client can use to access a rich edit control's Component Object Model (COM) functionality. */
CONST EM_GETOPTIONS		=		(WM_USER+78)		/* The EM_GETOPTIONS message retrieves rich edit control options. */
CONST EM_GETPARAFORMAT		=		(WM_USER+61)		/* The EM_GETPARAFORMAT message retrieves the paragraph formatting of the current selection in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR	=		0xD2		/* The EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR message retrieves the password character that an edit control displays when the user enters text. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETPUNCTUATION		=		(WM_USER+101)		/* The EM_GETPUNCTUATION message gets the current punctuation characters for the rich edit control. This message is available only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EM_GETRECT		=		0xB2		/* The EM_GETRECT message retrieves the formatting rectangle of an edit control. The formatting rectangle is the limiting rectangle into which the control draws the text. The limiting rectangle is independent of the size of the edit-control window. */
CONST EM_GETREDONAME		=		(WM_USER+87)		/* An application sends an EM_GETREDONAME message to a rich edit control to retrieve the type of the next action, if any, in the control's redo queue. */
CONST EM_GETSCROLLPOS		=		(WM_USER+221)		/* An application sends an EM_GETSCROLLPOS message to obtain the current scroll position of the edit control. */
CONST EM_GETSEL			=		0xB0		/* The EM_GETSEL message retrieves the starting and ending character positions of the current selection in an edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETSELTEXT		=		(WM_USER+62)		/* The EM_GETSELTEXT message retrieves the currently selected text in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETTEXTEX		=		(WM_USER+94)		/* The EM_GETTEXTEX message allows you to get all of the text from the rich edit control in any particular code base you want. */
CONST EM_GETTEXTLENGTHEX	=		(WM_USER+95)		/* The EM_GETTEXTLENGTHEX message calculates text length in various ways. It is usually called before creating a buffer to receive the text from the control. */
CONST EM_GETTEXTMODE		=		(WM_USER+90)		/* An application sends an EM_GETTEXTMODE message to get the current text mode and undo level of a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETTEXTRANGE		=		(WM_USER+75)		/* The EM_GETTEXTRANGE message retrieves a specified range of characters from a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETTHUMB		=		0xBE		/* The EM_GETTHUMB message retrieves the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the vertical scroll bar of a multiline edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETTYPOGRAPHYOPTIONS	=		(WM_USER+203)		/* The EM_GETTYPOGRAPHYOPTIONS message returns the current state of the typography options of a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETUNDONAME		=		(WM_USER+86)		/* Microsoft Rich Edit 2.0 and later: An application sends an EM_GETUNDONAME message to a rich edit control to retrieve the type of the next undo action, if any. */
CONST EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC	=		0xD1		/* The EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC message retrieves the address of the current Wordwrap function. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_GETWORDBREAKPROCEX	=		(WM_USER+80)		/* The EM_GETWORDBREAKPROCEX message retrieves the address of the currently registered extended word-break procedure. */
CONST EM_GETWORDWRAPMODE	=		(WM_USER+103)		/* The EM_GETWORDWRAPMODE message gets the current word wrap and word-break options for the rich edit control. This message is available only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EM_GETZOOM		=		(WM_USER+224)		/* The EM_GETZOOM message gets the current zoom ratio, which is always between 1/64 and 64.  */
CONST EM_HIDESELECTION		=		(WM_USER+63)		/* The EM_HIDESELECTION message hides or shows the selection in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_LIMITTEXT		=		0xC5		/* The EM_LIMITTEXT message sets the text limit of an edit control. The text limit is the maximum amount of text, in TCHARs, that the user can type into the edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_LINEFROMCHAR		=		0xC9		/* The EM_LINEFROMCHAR message retrieves the index of the line that contains the specified character index in a multiline edit control. A character index is the zero-based index of the character from the beginning of the edit control. */
CONST EM_LINEINDEX		=		0xBB		/* The EM_LINEINDEX message retrieves the character index of the first character of a specified line in a multiline edit control. A character index is the zero-based index of the character from the beginning of the edit control. */
CONST EM_LINELENGTH		=		0xC1		/* The EM_LINELENGTH message retrieves the length, in characters, of a line in an edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_LINESCROLL		=		0xB6		/* The EM_LINESCROLL message scrolls the text in a multiline edit control. */
CONST EM_OUTLINE		=		(WM_USER+220)
CONST EM_PASTESPECIAL		=		(WM_USER+64)		/* The EM_PASTESPECIAL message pastes a specific clipboard format in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_POSFROMCHAR		=		(WM_USER+38)		/* The EM_POSFROMCHAR message retrieves the client area coordinates of a specified character in an edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_RECONVERSION		=		(WM_USER+125)		/* The EM_RECONVERSION message invokes the Input Method Editor (IME) reconversion dialog box. */
CONST EM_REDO			=		(WM_USER+84)		/* Send an EM_REDO message to a rich edit control to redo the next action in the control's redo queue. */
CONST EM_REPLACESEL		=		0xC2		/* The EM_REPLACESEL message replaces the current selection in an edit control with the specified text. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_REQUESTRESIZE		=		(WM_USER+65)		/* The EM_REQUESTRESIZE message forces a rich edit control to send an EN_REQUESTRESIZE notification message to its parent window. */
CONST EM_SCROLL			=		0xB5		/* The EM_SCROLL message scrolls the text vertically in a multiline edit control. This message is equivalent to sending a WM_VSCROLL message to the edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SCROLLCARET		=		0xB7		/* The EM_SCROLLCARET message scrolls the caret into view in an edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SELECTIONTYPE		=		(WM_USER+66)		/* The EM_SELECTIONTYPE message determines the selection type for a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETBIDIOPTIONS		=		(WM_USER+200)		/* The EM_SETBIDIOPTIONS message sets the current state of the bidirectional options in the rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETBKGNDCOLOR		=		(WM_USER+67)		/* The EM_SETBKGNDCOLOR message sets the background color for a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETCHARFORMAT		=		(WM_USER+68)		/* The EM_SETCHARFORMAT message sets character formatting in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETCUEBANNER		=		(ECM_FIRST+1)		/* The EM_SETCUEBANNER message sets the textual cue, or tip, that is displayed by the edit control to prompt the user for information. For more discussion of this, see the Remarks section. */
CONST EM_SETEDITSTYLE		=		(WM_USER+204)		/* The EM_SETEDITSTYLE message sets the current edit style flags. */
CONST EM_SETEVENTMASK		=		(WM_USER+69)		/* The EM_SETEVENTMASK message sets the event mask for a rich edit control. The event mask specifies which notification messages the control sends to its parent window. */
CONST EM_SETFONTSIZE		=		(WM_USER+223)		/* The EM_SETFONTSIZE message sets the font size for the selected text. */
CONST EM_SETHANDLE		=		0xBC		/* The EM_SETHANDLE message sets the handle of the memory that will be used by a multiline edit control. */
CONST EM_SETIMECOLOR		=		(WM_USER+104)		/* The EM_SETIMECOLOR message sets the Input Method Editor (IME) composition color. This message is available only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EM_SETIMEMODEBIAS		=		(WM_USER+126)		/* An application sends an EM_SETIMEMODEBIAS message to set the Input Method Editor (IME) mode bias for a Microsoft Rich Edit control. */
CONST EM_SETIMEOPTIONS		=		(WM_USER+106)		/* The EM_SETIMEOPTIONS message sets the Input Method Editor (IME) options. This message is available only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EM_SETIMESTATUS		=		0xD8		/* The EM_SETIMESTATUS message sets the status flags that determine how an edit control interacts with the Input Method Editor (IME). */
CONST EM_SETLANGOPTIONS		=		(WM_USER+120)		/* An application sends an EM_SETLANGOPTIONS message to set options for Input Method Editor (IME) and Asian language support in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETLIMITTEXT		=		EM_LIMITTEXT		/* The EM_SETLIMITTEXT message sets the text limit of an edit control. The text limit is the maximum amount of text, in TCHARs, that the user can type into the edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETMARGINS		=		0xD3		/* The EM_SETMARGINS message sets the widths of the left and right margins for an edit control. The message redraws the control to reflect the new margins. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETMODIFY		=		0xB9		/* The EM_SETMODIFY message sets or clears the modification flag for an edit control. The modification flag indicates whether the text within the edit control has been modified. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control */
CONST EM_SETOLECALLBACK		=		(WM_USER+70)		/* The EM_SETOLECALLBACK message gives a rich edit control an IRichEditOleCallback object that the control uses to get OLE-related resources and information from the client. */
CONST EM_SETOPTIONS		=		(WM_USER+77)		/* The EM_SETOPTIONS message sets the options for a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETPALETTE		=		(WM_USER+93)		/* An application sends an EM_SETPALETTE message to change the palette that rich edit uses for its display window. */
CONST EM_SETPARAFORMAT		=		(WM_USER+71)		/* The EM_SETPARAFORMAT message sets the paragraph formatting for the current selection in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR	=		0xCC		/* The EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR message sets or removes the password character for an edit control. When a password character is set, that character is displayed in place of the characters typed by the user. */
CONST EM_SETPUNCTUATION		=		(WM_USER+100)		/* The EM_SETPUNCTUATION message sets the punctuation characters for a rich edit control. This message is available only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EM_SETREADONLY		=		0xCF		/* The EM_SETREADONLY message sets or removes the read-only style (ES_READONLY) of an edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETRECT		=		0xB3		/* The EM_SETRECT message sets the formatting rectangle of a multiline edit control. The formatting rectangle is the limiting rectangle into which the control draws the text. The limiting rectangle is independent of the size of the edit control window. */
CONST EM_SETRECTNP		=		0xB4		/* The EM_SETRECTNP message sets the formatting rectangle of a multiline edit control. The EM_SETRECTNP message is identical to the EM_SETRECT message, except that EM_SETRECTNP does not redraw the edit control window. */
CONST EM_SETSCROLLPOS		=		(WM_USER+222)		/* An application sends an EM_SETSCROLLPOS message to tell the rich edit control to scroll to a particular point. */
CONST EM_SETSEL			=		0xB1		/* The EM_SETSEL message selects a range of characters in an edit control. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETTABSTOPS		=		0xCB		/* The EM_SETTABSTOPS message sets the tab stops in a multiline edit control. When text is copied to the control, any tab character in the text causes space to be generated up to the next tab stop. */
CONST EM_SETTARGETDEVICE	=		(WM_USER+72)		/* The EM_SETTARGETDEVICE message sets the target device and line width used for WYSIWYG formatting in a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETTEXTEX		=		(WM_USER+97)		/* The EM_SETTEXTEX message combines the functionality of WM_SETTEXT and EM_REPLACESEL and adds the ability to set text using a code page and to use either Rich Text Format (RTF) rich text or plain text. */
CONST EM_SETTEXTMODE		=		(WM_USER+89)		/* An application sends an EM_SETTEXTMODE message to set the text mode or undo level of a rich edit control. The message fails if the control contains any text. */
CONST EM_SETTYPOGRAPHYOPTIONS	=		(WM_USER+202)		/* The EM_SETTYPOGRAPHYOPTIONS message sets the current state of the typography options of a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETUNDOLIMIT		=		(WM_USER+82)		/* An application sends an EM_SETUNDOLIMIT message to a rich edit control to set the maximum number of actions that can stored in the undo queue. */
CONST EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC	=		0xD0		/* The EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC message replaces an edit control's default Wordwrap function with an application-defined Wordwrap function. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EM_SETWORDBREAKPROCEX	=		(WM_USER+81)		/* The EM_SETWORDBREAKPROCEX message sets the extended word-break procedure. */
CONST EM_SETWORDWRAPMODE	=		(WM_USER+102)		/* The EM_SETWORDWRAPMODE message sets the word-wrapping and word-breaking options for the rich edit control. This message is available only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EM_SETZOOM		=		(WM_USER+225)		/* The EM_SETZOOM message sets the zoom ratio anywhere between 1/64 and 64. */
CONST EM_SHOWSCROLLBAR		=		(WM_USER+96)		/* The EM_SHOWSCROLLBAR message shows or hides one of the scroll bars in the Text Host window. */
CONST EM_STOPGROUPTYPING	=		(WM_USER+88)		/* An application sends an EM_STOPGROUPTYPING message to a rich edit control to stop the control from collecting additional typing actions into the current undo action. The control stores the next typing action, if any, into a new action in the undo qu */
CONST EM_STREAMIN		=		(WM_USER+73)		/* The EM_STREAMIN message replaces the contents of a rich edit control with a stream of data provided by an application defined–EditStreamCallback callback function. */
CONST EM_STREAMOUT		=		(WM_USER+74)		/* The EM_STREAMOUT message causes a rich edit control to pass its contents to an application–defined EditStreamCallback callback function. The callback function can then write the stream of data to a file or any other location that it chooses. */
CONST EM_UNDO			=		0xC7		/* The EM_UNDO message undoes the last edit control operation in the control's undo queue. You can send this message to either an edit control or a rich edit control. */
CONST EN_ALIGN_LTR_EC		=		0x700		/* The EN_ALIGN_LTR_EC notification message is sent when the user has changed the edit control direction to left-to-right. The parent window of the edit control receives this notification message through a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST EN_ALIGN_RTL_EC		=		0x701		/* The EN_ALIGN_RTL_EC notification message is sent when the user has changed the edit control direction to right-to-left. The parent window of the edit control receives this notification message through a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST EN_ALIGNLTR		=		0x710		/* The EN_ALIGNLTR notification message notifies a rich edit control's parent window that the paragraph direction has changed to left-to-right. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST EN_ALIGNRTL		=		0x711		/* The EN_ALIGNRTL notification message notifies a rich edit control's parent window that the paragraph direction changed to right-to-left. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST EN_CHANGE			=		0x300		/* The EN_CHANGE notification message is sent when the user has taken an action that may have altered text in an edit control. Unlike the EN_UPDATE notification message, this notification message is sent after the system updates the screen. */
CONST EN_CORRECTTEXT		=		0x705		/* The EN_CORRECTTEXT message notifies a rich edit control parent window that a SYV_CORRECT gesture occurred, giving the parent window a chance to cancel correcting the text. */
CONST EN_DRAGDROPDONE		=		0x70c		/* The EN_DRAGDROPDONE notification message notifies a rich edit control's parent window that the drag-and-drop operation has completed. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST EN_DROPFILES		=		0x703		/* The EN_DROPFILES message notifies a rich edit control parent window that the user is attempting to drop files into the control. */
CONST EN_ERRSPACE		=		0x500		/* The EN_ERRSPACE notification message is sent when an edit control cannot allocate enough memory to meet a specific request. The parent window of the edit control receives this notification message through a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST EN_HSCROLL		=		0x601		/* The EN_HSCROLL notification message is sent when the user clicks an edit control's horizontal scroll bar. The parent window of the edit control receives this notification message through a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST EN_IMECHANGE		=		0x707		/* The EN_IMECHANGE message notifies a rich edit control's parent that the IME conversion status has changed. This message is available only for Asian-language versions of the operating system. */
CONST EN_KILLFOCUS		=		0x200		/* The EN_KILLFOCUS notification message is sent when an edit control loses the keyboard focus. The parent window of the edit control receives this notification message through a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST EN_LINK			=		0x70b		/* A rich edit control sends EN_LINK messages when it receives various messages, for example, when the user clicks the mouse or when the mouse pointer is over text that has the CFE_LINK effect. */
CONST EN_MAXTEXT		=		0x501		/* The EN_MAXTEXT notification message is sent when the current text insertion has exceeded the specified number of characters for the edit control. The text insertion has been truncated. */
CONST EN_MSGFILTER		=		0x700		/* The EN_MSGFILTER message notifies a rich edit control's parent window of a keyboard or mouse event in the control. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST EN_OBJECTPOSITIONS	=		0x70a		/* The EN_OBJECTPOSITIONS notification message notifies a rich edit control's parent window when the control reads in objects. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST EN_OLEOPFAILED		=		0x709		/* The EN_OLEOPFAILED message notifies a rich edit control's parent window that a user action on a Component Object Model (COM) object has failed. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST EN_PARAGRAPHEXPANDED	=		0x70d
CONST EN_PROTECTED		=		0x704		/* The EN_PROTECTED message notifies a rich edit control's parent window that the user is taking an action that would change a protected range of text. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST EN_REQUESTRESIZE		=		0x701		/* The EN_REQUESTRESIZE message notifies a rich edit control's parent window that the control's contents are either smaller or larger than the control's window size. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message */
CONST EN_SAVECLIPBOARD		=		0x708		/* The EN_SAVECLIPBOARD message notifies the rich edit control's parent window that the control is closing and the clipboard contains information. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST EN_SELCHANGE		=		0x702		/* The EN_SELCHANGE message notifies a rich edit control's parent window that the current selection has changed. A rich edit control sends this notification message in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST EN_SETFOCUS		=		0x100		/* The EN_SETFOCUS notification message is sent when an edit control receives the keyboard focus. The parent window of the edit control receives this notification message through a WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST EN_STOPNOUNDO		=		0x706		/* The EN_STOPNOUNDO message notifies a rich edit control's parent window that an action occurred for which the control cannot allocate enough memory to maintain the undo state.  */
CONST EN_UPDATE			=		0x400		/* The EN_UPDATE notification message is sent when an edit control is about to redraw itself. This notification message is sent after the control has formatted the text, but before it displays the text. */
CONST EN_VSCROLL		=		0x602		/* The EN_VSCROLL notification message is sent when the user clicks an edit control's vertical scroll bar or when the user scrolls the mouse wheel over the edit control.  */
CONST ENM_DROPFILES		=		0x100000
CONST ENM_MOUSEEVENTS		=		0x20000
CONST ERROR_SUCCESS		=		0
CONST ES_AUTOHSCROLL		=		0x0080		/* Automatically scrolls text to the right by 10 characters when the user types a character at the end of the line. When the user presses the ENTER key, the control scrolls all text back to position zero. */
CONST ES_AUTOVSCROLL		=		0x0040		/* Automatically scrolls text up one page when the user presses the ENTER key on the last line. */
CONST ES_CENTER			=		0x0001		/* Centers text in a single-line or multiline edit control. */
CONST ES_LEFT			=		0x0000		/* Left aligns text. */
CONST ES_LOWERCASE		=		0x0010		/* Converts all characters to lowercase as they are typed into the edit control. */
CONST ES_MULTILINE		=		0x0004		/* Designates a multiline edit control. The default is single-line edit control. */
CONST ES_NOHIDESEL		=		0x0100		/* Negates the default behavior for an edit control. The default behavior hides the selection when the control loses the input focus and inverts the selection when the control receives the input focus. */
CONST ES_NUMBER			=		0x2000		/* Allows only digits to be entered into the edit control. */
CONST ES_OEMCONVERT		=		0x0400		/* Converts text entered in the edit control. The text is converted from the Windows character set to the OEM character set and then back to the Windows character set. */
CONST ES_PASSWORD		=		0x0020		/* Displays an asterisk (*) for each character typed into the edit control. This style is valid only for single-line edit controls. */
CONST ES_READONLY		=		0x0800		/* Prevents the user from typing or editing text in the edit control. */
CONST ES_RIGHT			=		0x0002		/* Right aligns text in a single-line or multiline edit control. */
CONST ES_UPPERCASE		=		0x0008		/* Converts all characters to uppercase as they are typed into the edit control. */
CONST ES_WANTRETURN		=		0x1000		/* Specifies that a carriage return be inserted when the user presses the ENTER key while entering text into a multiline edit control in a dialog box. */
CONST ESC			=		0x1B
CONST ETO_CLIPPED		=		0x4		/* The text will be clipped to the rectangle. */
CONST ETO_GLYPH_INDEX		=		0x10		/* Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 and later: The lpString array refers to an array returned from GetCharacterPlacement and should be parsed directly by GDI as no further language-specific processing is required. */
CONST ETO_GRAYED		=		0x1
CONST ETO_IGNORELANGUAGE	=		0x1000		/* Windows NT 4.0 and later: Reserved for system use. If an application sets this flag, it loses international scripting support and in some cases it may display no text at all. */
CONST ETO_NUMERICSLATIN		=		0x800		/* Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 and later: To display numbers, use European digits. */
CONST ETO_NUMERICSLOCAL		=		0x400		/* Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 and later: To display numbers, use digits appropriate to the locale. */
CONST ETO_OPAQUE		=		0x2		/* The current background color should be used to fill the rectangle. */
CONST ETO_PDY			=		0x2000		/* Windows 2000/XP: When this is set, the array pointed to by lpDx contains pairs of values. */
CONST ETO_RTLREADING		=		0x80		/* Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 and later for Middle East language edition of Windows: If this value is specified and a Hebrew or Arabic font is selected into the device context, the string is output using right-to-left reading order. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_ARCHIVE	=		0x20		/* The file or directory is an archive file. Applications use this attribute to mark files for backup or removal. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_COMPRESSED	=		0x800		/* The file or directory is compressed. For a file, this means that all of the data in the file is compressed. For a directory, this means that compression is the default for newly created files and subdirectories. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_DIRECTORY	=		0x10		/* The handle identifies a directory. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_HIDDEN	=		0x2		/* The file or directory is hidden. It is not included in an ordinary directory listing. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL	=		0x80		/* The file has no other attributes. This attribute is valid only if used alone. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_READONLY	=		0x1		/* The file or directory is read-only. Applications can read the file but cannot write to it or delete it. In the case of a directory, applications cannot delete it. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_SYSTEM	=		0x4		/* The file or directory is part of the operating system or is used exclusively by the operating system. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_TEMPORARY	=		0x100		/* The file is being used for temporary storage. File systems avoid writing data back to mass storage if sufficient cache memory is available, because often the application deletes the temporary file shortly after the handle is closed. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_DEVICE	=		0x40		/* Reserved; do not use. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_ENCRYPTED	=		0x4000		/* The file or directory is encrypted. For a file, this means that all data in the file is encrypted. For a directory, this means that encryption is the default for newly created files and subdirectories. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NOT_CONTENT_INDEXED=	0x2000		/* The file will not be indexed by the content indexing service. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_OFFLINE	=		0x1000		/* The file data is not immediately available. This attribute indicates that the file data has been physically moved to offline storage. This attribute is used by Remote Storage, the hierarchical storage management software. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_REPARSE_POINT	=	0x400		/* The file or directory has an associated reparse point. */
CONST FILE_ATTRIBUTE_SPARSE_FILE	=	0x200		/* The file is a sparse file. */
CONST FILE_BEGIN		=		0		/* The starting point is zero or the beginning of the file. */
CONST FILE_CURRENT		=		0x1		/* The starting point is the current value of the file pointer. */
CONST FILE_END			=		0x2		/* The starting point is the current end-of-file position. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_BACKUP_SEMANTICS	=	0x02000000		/* Indicates that the file is being opened or created for a backup or restore operation. The system ensures that the calling process overrides file security checks, provided it has the SE_BACKUP_NAME and SE_RESTORE_NAME privileges. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_DELETE_ON_CLOSE	=		0x04000000		/* Indicates that the operating system is to delete the file immediately after all of its handles have been closed, not just the specified handle but also any other open or duplicated handles. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_FIRST_PIPE_INSTANCE	=	0x00080000		/* If you attempt to create multiple instances of a pipe with this flag, creation of the first instance succeeds, but creation of the next instance fails with ERROR_ACCESS_DENIED. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_NO_BUFFERING	=		0x20000000		/* Instructs the system to open the file with no intermediate buffering or caching. When combined with FILE_FLAG_OVERLAPPED, the flag gives maximum asynchronous performance, because the I/O does not rely on the synchronous operations of the memory mana */
CONST FILE_FLAG_OPEN_NO_RECALL	=		0x00100000		/* Indicates that the file data is requested, but it should continue to reside in remote storage. It should not be transported back to local storage. This flag is intended for use by remote storage systems. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_OPEN_REPARSE_POINT	=	0x00200000		/* Specifying this flag inhibits the reparse behavior of NTFS reparse points. When the file is opened, a file handle is returned, whether the filter that controls the reparse point is operational or not. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_OVERLAPPED	=		0x40000000		/* Instructs the system to initialize the object, so that operations that take a significant amount of time to process return ERROR_IO_PENDING. When the operation is finished, the specified event is set to the signaled state. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_POSIX_SEMANTICS	=		0x01000000		/* Indicates that the file is to be accessed according to POSIX rules. This includes allowing multiple files with names, differing only in case, for file systems that support such naming. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_RANDOM_ACCESS	=		0x10000000		/* Indicates that the file is accessed randomly. The system can use this as a hint to optimize file caching. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_SEQUENTIAL_SCAN	=		0x08000000		/* Indicates that the file is to be accessed sequentially from beginning to end. The system can use this as a hint to optimize file caching. */
CONST FILE_FLAG_WRITE_THROUGH	=		0x80000000		/* Instructs the system to write through any intermediate cache and go directly to disk. The system can still cache write operations, but cannot lazily flush them. */
CONST FILE_SHARE_DELETE		=		0x00000004		/* Enables subsequent open operations on the object to request delete access. Otherwise, other processes cannot open the object if they request delete access. */
CONST FILE_SHARE_READ		=		0x00000001		/* Enables subsequent open operations on the object to request read access. Otherwise, other processes cannot open the object if they request read access. */
CONST FILE_SHARE_WRITE		=		0x00000002		/* Enables subsequent open operations on the object to request write access. Otherwise, other processes cannot open the object if they request write access. */
CONST FLASHW_CAPTION		=		0x1		/* Flash the window caption. */
CONST FLASHW_STOP		=		0		/* Stop flashing. The system restores the window to its original state. */
CONST FLASHW_TIMER		=		0x4		/* Flash continuously, until the FLASHW_STOP flag is set. */
CONST FLASHW_TIMERNOFG		=		0xC		/* Flash continuously until the window comes to the foreground. */
CONST FLASHW_TRAY		=		0x2		/* Flash the taskbar button. */
CONST FLASHW_ALL		=		(FLASHW_CAPTION|FLASHW_TRAY)		/* Flash both the window caption and taskbar button. This is equivalent to setting the FLASHW_CAPTION | FLASHW_TRAY flags. */
CONST FM_BLANK_ICON		=		-1
CONST FM_CMESSAGES		=		0x1		/* Returns a value in pcMessages. */
CONST FM_DEFAULT_HEIGHT		=		0
CONST FM_DEFAULT_SELHEIGHT	=		-1
CONST FM_FULL_SELHEIGHT		=		0
CONST FM_GETDRIVEINFO		=		(WM_USER+0x201)		/* Sent by a File Manager extension to retrieve drive information from the active File Manager window. */
CONST FM_GETFILESEL		=		(WM_USER+0x204)		/* Sent by a File Manager extension to retrieve information about a selected file from the active File Manager window (either the directory window or the Search Results window). */
CONST FM_GETFILESELLFN		=		(WM_USER+0x205)		/* Sent by a File Manager extension to retrieve information about a selected file from the active File Manager window (either the directory window or the Search Results window). The selected file can have a long file name. */
CONST FM_GETFOCUS		=		(WM_USER+0x200)		/* Sent by a File Manager extension to retrieve the type of File Manager window that has the input focus. */
CONST FM_GETSELCOUNT		=		(WM_USER+0x202)		/* Sent by a File Manager extension to retrieve a count of the selected files in the active File Manager window (either the directory window or the Search Results window).  */
CONST FM_GETSELCOUNTLFN		=		(WM_USER+0x203)		/* Sent by a File Manager extension to retrieve the number of selected files in the active File Manager window (either the directory window or the Search Results window). The count includes files that have long file names. */
CONST FM_LONGEST_WAIT		=		0x2		/* Returns a value in pftLongestWait. */
CONST FM_REFRESH_WINDOWS	=		(WM_USER+0x206)		/* Sent by a File Manager extension to cause File Manager to repaint either its active window or all of its windows. */
CONST FM_RELOAD_EXTENSIONS	=		(WM_USER+0x207)		/* Sent by a File Manager extension (or another application) to cause File Manager to reload all extension dynamic-link libraries (DLLs) listed in the [AddOns] section of the Winfile.ini file. */
CONST FM_SEPARATOR		=		(LPCSTR)1
CONST FM_TOTAL_WAIT		=		0x4		/* Returns a value in pftTotalWait. */
CONST FMEVENT_HELPMENUITEM	=		107		/* Sent to a File Manager extension dynamic-link library (DLL) procedure when the user presses F1 on a menu or toolbar command item. The extension should call WinHelp, with that function's hwnd parameter set to the value of the extension's hwnd paramet */
CONST FMEVENT_HELPSTRING	=		106		/* Sent to a File Manager extension dynamic-link library (DLL) procedure when File Manager wants a Help string for a menu or toolbar command item. */
CONST FMEVENT_INITMENU		=		102		/* Sent to an extension dynamic-link library (DLL) when the user selects the menu for the extension from the File Manager menu bar. The extension can use this notification to initialize menu items. */
CONST FMEVENT_LOAD		=		100		/* Sent to an extension dynamic-link library (DLL) when File Manager is loading the DLL. */
CONST FMEVENT_SELCHANGE		=		104		/* Sent to an extension dynamic-link library (DLL) when the user selects a file name in the File Manager directory window or Search Results window. */
CONST FMEVENT_TOOLBARLOAD	=		105		/* Sent to an extension dynamic-link library (DLL) when File Manager is loading its toolbar. This message allows an extension DLL to add a button to the File Manager toolbar. */
CONST FMEVENT_UNLOAD		=		101		/* Sent to an extension dynamic-link library (DLL) when File Manager is unloading the DLL. */
CONST FMEVENT_USER_REFRESH	=		103		/* Sent to an extension dynamic-link library (DLL) when the user chooses the Refresh command from the View menu in File Manager. The extension can use this notification to update its menu. */
CONST FORM_BUILTIN		=		0x1		/* If this bit-flag is set, the form is part of the spooler. Form definitions with this flag set do not appear in the registry. */
CONST FORM_PRINTER		=		0x2		/* If this bit flag is set, the form is associated with a certain printer, and its definition appears in the registry. */
CONST FORM_USER			=		0		/* If this bit flag is set, the form has been defined by the user. Forms with this flag set are defined in the registry. */
CONST FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM=		0x1000		/* The function should search the system message-table resource(s) for the requested message. */
CONST GA_PARENT			=		0x1		/* Retrieves the parent window. This does not include the owner, as it does with the GetParent function. */
CONST GA_ROOT			=		0x2		/* Retrieves the root window by walking the chain of parent windows. */
CONST GA_ROOTOWNER		=		0x3		/* Retrieves the owned root window by walking the chain of parent and owner windows returned by GetParent. */
CONST GB2312_CHARSET		=		134
CONST GCL_CBCLSEXTRA		=		-20		/* Sets the size, in bytes, of the extra memory associated with the class. Setting this value does not change the number of extra bytes already allocated. */
CONST GCL_CBWNDEXTRA		=		-18		/* Sets the size, in bytes, of the extra window memory associated with each window in the class. Setting this value does not change the number of extra bytes already allocated. */
CONST GCL_CONVERSION		=		0x1
CONST GCL_HBRBACKGROUND		=		-10		/* Replaces a handle to the background brush associated with the class. */
CONST GCL_HCURSOR		=		-12		/* Replaces a handle to the cursor associated with the class. */
CONST GCL_HICON			=		-14		/* Replaces a handle to the icon associated with the class. */
CONST GCL_HICONSM		=		-34		/* Replace a handle to the small icon associated with the class. */
CONST GCL_HMODULE		=		-16		/* Replaces a handle to the module that registered the class. */
CONST GCL_MENUNAME		=		-8		/* Replaces the address of the menu name string. The string identifies the menu resource associated with the class. */
CONST GCL_REVERSE_LENGTH	=		0x3
CONST GCL_REVERSECONVERSION	=		0x2
CONST GCL_STYLE			=		-26		/* Replaces the window-class style bits. */
CONST GCL_WNDPROC		=		-24		/* Replaces the address of the window procedure associated with the class. */
CONST GENERIC_READ		=		0x80000000
CONST GENERIC_WRITE		=		0x40000000
CONST GRAY_BRUSH		=		0x2		/* Gray brush. */
CONST GREEK_CHARSET		=		161
CONST GTL_CLOSE			=		0x4		/* Computes an approximate (close) answer. It is obtained quickly and can be used to set the buffer size. This flag cannot be used with the GTL_PRECISE flag. E_INVALIDARG will be returned if both are used. */
CONST GTL_DEFAULT		=		0		/* Returns the number of characters. This is the default. */
CONST GTL_NUMBYTES		=		16		/* Returns the number of bytes. This flag cannot be used with the GTL_NUMCHARS flag. E_INVALIDARG will be returned if both are used. */
CONST GTL_NUMCHARS		=		0x8		/* Returns the number of characters. This flag cannot be used with the GTL_NUMBYTES flag. E_INVALIDARG will be returned if both are used. */
CONST GTL_PRECISE		=		0x2		/* Computes a precise answer. This approach could necessitate a conversion and thereby take longer. This flag cannot be used with the GTL_CLOSE flag. E_INVALIDARG will be returned if both are used. */
CONST GTL_USECRLF		=		0x1		/* Computes the answer by using CR/LFs at the end of paragraphs. */
CONST GWL_EXSTYLE		=		-20		/* Retrieves the extended window styles. For more information, see CreateWindowEx */
CONST GWL_HINSTANCE		=		-6		/* Retrieves a handle to the application instance. */
CONST GWL_HWNDPARENT		=		-8		/* Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if any. */
CONST GWL_ID			=		-12		/* Retrieves the identifier of the window. */
CONST GWL_STYLE			=		-16		/* Retrieves the window styles. */
CONST GWL_USERDATA		=		-21		/* Retrieves the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero. */
CONST GWL_WNDPROC		=		-4		/* Retrieves the address of the window procedure, or a handle representing the address of the window procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the window procedure. */
CONST GWLP_HINSTANCE		=		-6		/* Retrieves a handle to the application instance. */
CONST GWLP_HWNDPARENT		=		-8		/* Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if there is one. */
CONST GWLP_ID			=		-12		/* Retrieves the identifier of the window. */
CONST GWLP_USERDATA		=		-21		/* Retrieves the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero. */
CONST GWLP_WNDPROC		=		-4		/* Retrieves the pointer to the window procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the window procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the window procedure. */
CONST HANGEUL_CHARSET		=		129
CONST HANGUL_CHARSET		=		129
CONST HDF_BITMAP		=		0x2000		/* The item displays a bitmap. */
CONST HDF_BITMAP_ON_RIGHT	=		0x1000		/* Version 4.70. The bitmap appears to the right of text. */
CONST HDF_CENTER		=		0x2		/* The item's contents are centered. */
CONST HDF_IMAGE			=		0x800		/* Version 4.70. Display an image from an image list. Specify the image list by sending an HDM_SETIMAGELIST message. Specify the index of the image in the iImage member of this structure. */
CONST HDF_JUSTIFYMASK		=		0x3		/* Isolate the bits corresponding to the three justification flags listed in the preceding table. */
CONST HDF_LEFT			=		0		/* The item's contents are left-aligned. */
CONST HDF_OWNERDRAW		=		0x8000		/* The header control's owner draws the item. */
CONST HDF_RIGHT			=		0x1		/* The item's contents are right-aligned. */
CONST HDF_RTLREADING		=		0x4		/* Typically, windows display text left-to-right (LTR). Windows can be mirrored to display languages such as Hebrew or Arabic that read right-to-left (RTL). Usually, header text is read in the same direction as the text in its parent window. */
CONST HDF_SORTDOWN		=		0x200		/* Version 6.00. Draws a down-arrow on this item. This is typically used to indicate that information in the current window is sorted on this column in descending order. This flag cannot be combined with HDF_IMAGE or HDF_BITMAP. */
CONST HDF_SORTUP		=		0x400		/* Version 6.00. Draws an up-arrow on this item. This is typically used to indicate that information in the current window is sorted on this column in ascending order. This flag cannot be combined with HDF_IMAGE or HDF_BITMAP. */
CONST HDF_STRING		=		0x4000		/* The item displays a string. */
CONST HDFT_HASNOVALUE		=		0x8000		/* Ignore pvFilter. */
CONST HDFT_ISNUMBER		=		0x1		/* Numerical data. */
CONST HDFT_ISSTRING		=		0x0		/* String data. */
CONST HDI_BITMAP		=		0x10		/* The hbm member is valid. */
CONST HDI_DI_SETITEM		=		0x40
CONST HDI_FILTER		=		0x100		/* Version 5.80. The type and pvFilter members are valid. This is used to filter out the values specified in the type member. */
CONST HDI_FORMAT		=		0x4		/* The fmt member is valid. */
CONST HDI_HEIGHT		=		0x1		/* The same as HDI_WIDTH. */
CONST HDI_HIDDEN		=		0x1
CONST HDI_IMAGE			=		0x20		/* Version 4.70. The iImage member is valid and specifies the image to be displayed with the item. */
CONST HDI_LPARAM		=		0x8		/* The lParam member is valid. */
CONST HDI_ORDER			=		0x80		/* Version 4.70. The iOrder member is valid and specifies the item's order value. */
CONST HDI_TEXT			=		0x2		/* The pszText and cchTextMax members are valid. */
CONST HDI_WIDTH			=		0x1		/* The cxy member is valid and specifies the item's width. */
CONST HDM_FIRST			=		0x1200
CONST HDM_CLEARFILTER		=		(HDM_FIRST+24)		/* Clears the filter for a given header control. */
CONST HDM_CREATEDRAGIMAGE	=		(HDM_FIRST+16)		/* Creates a semi-transparent version of an item's image for use as a dragging image. */
CONST HDM_DELETEITEM		=		(HDM_FIRST+2)		/* Deletes an item from a header control. */
CONST HDM_EDITFILTER		=		(HDM_FIRST+23)		/* Starts editing the specified filter. */
CONST HDM_GETBITMAPMARGIN	=		(HDM_FIRST+21)		/* Retrieves the width of the bitmap margin for a header control. You can send this message explicitly or use the Header_GetBitmapMargin macro. */
CONST HDM_GETIMAGELIST		=		(HDM_FIRST+9)		/* Retrieves the handle to the image list that has been set for an existing header control. */
CONST HDM_GETITEM		=		(HDM_FIRST+3)		/* Retrieves information about an item in a header control. */
CONST HDM_GETITEMCOUNT		=		(HDM_FIRST+0)		/* Retrieves a count of the items in a header control. */
CONST HDM_GETITEMRECT		=		(HDM_FIRST+7)		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle for a given item in a header control. */
CONST HDM_GETORDERARRAY		=		(HDM_FIRST+17)		/* Retrieves the current left-to-right order of items in a header control. */
CONST HDM_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST HDM_HITTEST		=		(HDM_FIRST+6)		/* Tests a point to determine which header item, if any, is at the specified point. */
CONST HDM_INSERTITEM		=		(HDM_FIRST+1)		/* Inserts a new item into a header control. */
CONST HDM_LAYOUT		=		(HDM_FIRST+5)		/* Retrieves the correct size and position of a header control within the parent window. */
CONST HDM_ORDERTOINDEX		=		(HDM_FIRST+15)		/* Retrieves an index value for an item based on its order in the header control. */
CONST HDM_SETBITMAPMARGIN	=		(HDM_FIRST+20)		/* Sets the width of the margin, specified in pixels, of a bitmap in an existing header control. */
CONST HDM_SETFILTERCHANGETIMEOUT=		(HDM_FIRST+22)		/* Sets the timeout interval between the time a change takes place in the filter attributes and the posting of an HDN_FILTERCHANGE notification. */
CONST HDM_SETHOTDIVIDER		=		(HDM_FIRST+19)		/* Changes the color of a divider between header items to indicate the destination of an external drag-and-drop operation. */
CONST HDM_SETIMAGELIST		=		(HDM_FIRST+8)		/* Assigns an image list to an existing header control. */
CONST HDM_SETITEM		=		(HDM_FIRST+4)		/* Sets the attributes of the specified item in a header control. */
CONST HDM_SETORDERARRAY		=		(HDM_FIRST+18)		/* Sets the left-to-right order of header items. */
CONST HDM_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the UNICODE character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST HDN_BEGINDRAG		=		(HDN_FIRST-10)		/* Sent by a header control when a drag operation has begun on one of its items. This notification message is sent only by header controls that are set to the HDS_DRAGDROP style. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST HDN_BEGINTRACK		=		(HDN_FIRST-6)		/* Notifies a header control's parent window that the user has begun dragging a divider in the control (that is, the user has pressed the left mouse button while the mouse cursor is on a divider in the header control).  */
CONST HDN_DIVIDERDBLCLICK	=		(HDN_FIRST-5)		/* Notifies a header control's parent window that the user double-clicked the divider area of the control. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST HDN_ENDDRAG		=		(HDN_FIRST-11)		/* Sent by a header control when a drag operation has ended on one of its items. This notification is sent as a WM_NOTIFY message. Only header controls that are set to the HDS_DRAGDROP style send this notification. */
CONST HDN_ENDTRACK		=		(HDN_FIRST-7)		/* Notifies a header control's parent window that the user has finished dragging a divider. This notification message sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST HDN_FILTERBTNCLICK	=		(HDN_FIRST-13)		/* Notifies the header control's parent window when the filter button is clicked or in response to an HDM_SETITEM message. */
CONST HDN_FILTERCHANGE		=		(HDN_FIRST-12)		/* Notifies the header control's parent window that the attributes of a header control filter are being changed or edited. */
CONST HDN_FIRST			=		-300
CONST HDN_GETDISPINFO		=		(HDN_FIRST-9)		/* Sent to the owner of a header control when the control needs information about a callback header item. This notification is sent as a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST HDN_ITEMCHANGED		=		(HDN_FIRST-1)		/* Notifies a header control's parent window that the attributes of a header item have changed. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST HDN_ITEMCHANGING		=		(HDN_FIRST-0)		/* Notifies a header control's parent window that the attributes of a header item are about to change. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST HDN_ITEMCLICK		=		(HDN_FIRST-2)		/* Notifies a header control's parent window that the user clicked the control. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST HDN_ITEMDBLCLICK		=		(HDN_FIRST-3)		/* Notifies a header control's parent window that the user double-clicked the control. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. Only header controls that are set to the HDS_BUTTONS style send this notification. */
CONST HDN_LAST			=		-399
CONST HDN_TRACK			=		(HDN_FIRST-8)		/* Notifies a header control's parent window that the user is dragging a divider in the header control. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message.  */
CONST HDS_BUTTONS		=		0x2		/* Each item in the control looks and behaves like a push button. This style is useful if an application carries out a task when the user clicks an item in the header control. */
CONST HDS_DRAGDROP		=		0x40		/* Version 4.70. Allows drag-and-drop reordering of header items.  */
CONST HDS_FILTERBAR		=		0x100		/* Version 5.80. Include a filter bar as part of the standard header control. This bar allows users to conveniently apply a filter to the display. Calls to HDM_LAYOUT will yield a new size for the control and cause the list view to update. */
CONST HDS_FLAT			=		0x200		/* Version 6.0. Causes the header control to be drawn flat when Microsoft Windows XP is running in classic mode. */
CONST HDS_FULLDRAG		=		0x80		/* Version 4.70. Causes the header control to display column contents even while the user resizes a column.  */
CONST HDS_HIDDEN		=		0x8		/* Indicates a header control that is intended to be hidden. This style does not hide the control. Instead, when you send the HDM_LAYOUT message to a header control with the HDS_HIDDEN style, the control returns zero in the cy member of the WINDOWPOS s */
CONST HDS_HORZ			=		0x0		/* Creates a header control with a horizontal orientation. */
CONST HDS_HOTTRACK		=		0x4		/* Version 4.70. Enables hot tracking. */
CONST HEBREW_CHARSET		=		177
CONST HIST_ADDTOFAVORITES	=		0x3		/* Add to favorites. */
CONST HIST_BACK			=		0		/* Move back. */
CONST HIST_FAVORITES		=		0x2		/* Open favorites folder. */
CONST HIST_FORWARD		=		0x1		/* Move forward. */
CONST HIST_NO_OF_BUCKETS	=		24
CONST HIST_VIEWTREE		=		0x4		/* View tree. */
CONST HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT		=		0x80000000		/* Registry entries subordinate to this key define types (or classes) of documents and the properties associated with those types. Shell and COM applications use the information stored under this key. For more information, see HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT Key */
CONST HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG	=		0x80000005		/* Contains information about the current hardware profile of the local computer system. The information under HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG describes only the differences between the current hardware configuration and the standard configuration. */
CONST HKEY_CURRENT_USER		=		0x80000001		/* Registry entries subordinate to this key define the preferences of the current user. These preferences include the settings of environment variables, data about program groups, colors, printers, network connections, and application preferences. */
CONST HKEY_DYN_DATA		=		0x80000006		/* Windows Me/98/95:  Registry entries subordinate to this key allow you to collect performance data. */
CONST HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE	=		0x80000002		/* Registry entries subordinate to this key define the physical state of the computer, including data about the bus type, system memory, and installed hardware and software. */
CONST HKEY_PERFORMANCE_DATA	=		0x80000004		/* Registry entries subordinate to this key allow you to access performance data. The data is not actually stored in the registry; the registry functions cause the system to collect the data from its source. Windows Me/98/95:  This key is not supported */
CONST HKEY_PERFORMANCE_NLSTEXT	=		0x80000060		/* Registry entries subordinate to this key reference the text strings that describe counters in the local language of the area in which the computer system is running. Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me/98/95:  This key is not supported. */
CONST HKEY_PERFORMANCE_TEXT	=		0x80000050		/* Registry entries subordinate to this key reference the text strings that describe counters in US English. Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me/98/95:  This key is not supported. */
CONST HKEY_USERS		=		0x80000003		/* Registry entries subordinate to this key define the default user configuration for new users on the local computer and the user configuration for the current user. */
CONST HOLLOW_BRUSH		=		0x5		/* Hollow brush (equivalent to NULL_BRUSH). */
CONST HORZRES			=		0x8		/* Returns the width, in pixels, of the screen. */
CONST HORZSIZE			=		0x4		/* Returns the width, in millimeters, of the physical screen. */
CONST HOTKEYF_ALT		=		0x04
CONST HOTKEYF_CONTROL		=		0x02
CONST HOTKEYF_EXT		=		0x08
CONST HOTKEYF_SHIFT		=		0x01
Const HOVER_DEFAULT		=		0xFFFFFFFF 
CONST HTBORDER			=		18
CONST HTBOTTOM			=		15
CONST HTBOTTOMLEFT		=		16
CONST HTBOTTOMRIGHT		=		17
CONST HTCAPTION			=		0x2
CONST HTCLIENT			=		0x1
CONST HTCLOSE			=		20
CONST HTERROR			=		-2
CONST HTGROWBOX			=		0x4
CONST HTHELP			=		21
CONST HTHSCROLL			=		0x6
CONST HTLEFT			=		10
CONST HTMAXBUTTON		=		0x9
CONST HTMENU			=		0x5
CONST HTMINBUTTON		=		0x8
CONST HTNOWHERE			=		0
CONST HTOBJECT			=		19
CONST HTREDUCE			=		(HTMINBUTTON)
CONST HTRIGHT			=		11
CONST HTSIZE			=		(HTGROWBOX)
CONST HTSIZEFIRST		=		(HTLEFT)
CONST HTSIZELAST		=		(HTBOTTOMRIGHT)
CONST HTSYSMENU			=		0x3
CONST HTTOP			=		12
CONST HTTOPLEFT			=		13
CONST HTTOPRIGHT		=		14
CONST HWND_BOTTOM		=		0x1
CONST HWND_BROADCAST		=		0xFFFF
CONST HWND_DESKTOP		=		0
CONST HWND_MESSAGE		=		-3
CONST HWND_NOTOPMOST		=		-2
CONST HWND_TOP			=		0
CONST HWND_TOPMOST		=		-1
CONST IDC_APPSTARTING		=		32650		/* Standard arrow and small hourglass */
CONST IDC_ARROW			=		32512		/* Standard arrow */
CONST IDC_CROSS			=		32515		/* Crosshair */
CONST IDC_HAND			=		32649		/* Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Hand */
CONST IDC_HELP			=		32651		/* Arrow and question mark */
CONST IDC_IBEAM			=		32513		/* I-beam */
CONST IDC_ICON			=		32641		/* Obsolete for applications marked version 4.0 or later. */
CONST IDC_NO			=		32648		/* Slashed circle */
CONST IDC_SIZE			=		32640		/* Obsolete for applications marked version 4.0 or later. Use IDC_SIZEALL. */
CONST IDC_SIZEALL		=		32646		/* Four-pointed arrow pointing north, south, east, and west */
CONST IDC_SIZENESW		=		32643		/* Double-pointed arrow pointing northeast and southwest */
CONST IDC_SIZENS		=		32645		/* Double-pointed arrow pointing north and south */
CONST IDC_SIZENWSE		=		32642		/* Double-pointed arrow pointing northwest and southeast */
CONST IDC_SIZEWE		=		32644		/* Double-pointed arrow pointing west and east */
CONST IDC_UPARROW		=		32516		/* Vertical arrow */
CONST IDC_WAIT			=		32514		/* Hourglass */
CONST IDABORT			=		3		/* Abort button was selected. */
CONST IDCANCEL			=		0x2		/* Cancel button was selected. */
CONST IDCLOSE			=		0x8		/* The user closed the training card. */
CONST IDCONTINUE		=		11		/* Continue button was selected. */
CONST IDHELP			=		9
CONST IDIGNORE			=		5		/* Ignore button was selected. */
CONST IDNO			=		7		/* No button was selected. */
CONST IDOK			=		1		/* OK button was selected. */
CONST IDRETRY			=		4		/* Retry button was selected. */
CONST IDTRYAGAIN		=		10		/* Try Again button was selected. */
CONST IDYES			=		6		/* Yes button was selected. */
CONST ILC_COLOR			=		0x0		/* Use the default behavior if none of the other ILC_COLOR flags is specified.Typically,the default is ILC_COLOR4, but for older display drivers, the default is ILC_COLORDDB */
CONST ILC_COLOR16		=		0x10		/* Use a 16-bit(32/64k-color) DIB section */
CONST ILC_COLOR24		=		0x18		/* Use a 24-bit DIB section */
CONST ILC_COLOR32		=		0x20		/* Use a 32-bit DIB section */
CONST ILC_COLOR4		=		0x4		/* Use a 4-bit(16-color) device-independent bitmap(DIB) section as the bitmap for the imagelist */
CONST ILC_COLOR8		=		0x8		/* Use an 8-bit DIB section.The colors used for the color table are the same colors as the half tone palette */
CONST ILC_COLORDDB		=		0xFE		/* Use a device-dependent bitmap */
CONST ILC_MASK			=		0x1		/* Use a mask.The imagelist contains two bitmaps,one of which is a monochrome bitmap used as a mask.If this value is not included, the imagelist contains only one bitmap */
CONST ILCF_SWAP			=		0x1
CONST IMAGE_BITMAP		=		0
CONST IMAGE_CURSOR		=		0x2
CONST IMAGE_ENHMETAFILE		=		0x3
CONST IMAGE_ICON		=		0x1
CONST INFINITE			=		0xFFFFFFFF
CONST INFOTIPSIZE		=		1024
CONST INTERNET_DIRECT		=		0x1
CONST INTERNET_FLAG_RELOAD	=		0x80000000
CONST INTERNET_PRECONFIG	=		0
CONST INTERNET_PROXY		=		0x3
CONST INTERNET_SERVICE_FTP	=		0x1
CONST INTERNET_SERVICE_GOPHER	=		0x2
CONST INTERNET_SERVICE_HTTP	=		0x3
CONST INVALID_FILE_ATTRIBUTES	=		-1
CONST INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE	=		0xFFFFFFFF
CONST IPM_CLEARADDRESS 		=		(WM_USER+100)		/* Clears the contents of the IP address control. */
CONST IPM_GETADDRESS 		=		(WM_USER+102)		/* Retrieves the address values for all four fields in the IP address control. */
CONST IPM_ISBLANK 		=		(WM_USER+105)		/* Determines if all fields in the IP address control are blank. */
CONST IPM_SETADDRESS 		=		(WM_USER+101)		/* Sets the address values for all four fields in the IP address control. */
CONST IPM_SETFOCUS 		=		(WM_USER+104)		/* Sets the keyboard focus to the specified field in the IP address control. All of the text in that field will be selected. */
CONST IPM_SETRANGE 		=		(WM_USER+103)		/* Sets the valid range for the specified field in the IP address control.  */
CONST IPN_FIRST 		=		-860
CONST IPN_FIELDCHANGED 		=		(IPN_FIRST-0)		/* Sent when the user changes a field in the control or moves from one field to another. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST IPN_LAST 			=		-879
CONST JOHAB_CHARSET		=		130
CONST KEY_ALL_ACCESS		=		0xf003f		/* Combination of KEY_QUERY_VALUE, KEY_ENUMERATE_SUB_KEYS, KEY_NOTIFY, KEY_CREATE_SUB_KEY, KEY_CREATE_LINK, and KEY_SET_VALUE access.  */
CONST KEY_CREATE_LINK		=		32		/* Permission to create a symbolic link. */
CONST KEY_CREATE_SUB_KEY	=		0x4		/* Permission to create subkeys. */
CONST KEY_ENUMERATE_SUB_KEYS	=		0x8		/* Permission to enumerate subkeys. */
CONST KEY_EXECUTE		=		0x20019		/* Permission for read access. */
CONST KEY_NOTIFY		=		16		/* Permission for change notification. */
CONST KEY_QUERY_VALUE		=		0x1		/* Permission to query subkey data. */
CONST KEY_READ			=		0x20019		/* Combination of KEY_QUERY_VALUE, KEY_ENUMERATE_SUB_KEYS, and KEY_NOTIFY access. */
CONST KEY_SET_VALUE		=		0x2		/* Permission to set subkey data. */
CONST KEY_WRITE			=		0x20006		/* Combination of KEY_SET_VALUE and KEY_CREATE_SUB_KEY access.  */
CONST LANG_AFRIKAANS		=		0x36
CONST LANG_ALBANIAN		=		0x1c
CONST LANG_ARABIC		=		0x1
CONST LANG_ARMENIAN		=		0x2b
CONST LANG_ASSAMESE		=		0x4d
CONST LANG_AZERI		=		0x2c
CONST LANG_BASQUE		=		0x2d
CONST LANG_BELARUSIAN		=		0x23
CONST LANG_BENGALI		=		0x45
CONST LANG_BULGARIAN		=		0x2
CONST LANG_CATALAN		=		0x3
CONST LANG_CHINESE		=		0x4
CONST LANG_CROATIAN		=		0x1A
CONST LANG_CZECH		=		0x5
CONST LANG_DANISH		=		0x6
CONST LANG_DUTCH		=		0x13
CONST LANG_ENGLISH		=		0x9
CONST LANG_ESTONIAN		=		0x25
CONST LANG_FAEROESE		=		0x38
CONST LANG_FARSI		=		0x29
CONST LANG_FINNISH		=		0xB
CONST LANG_FRENCH		=		0xC
CONST LANG_GEORGIAN		=		0x37
CONST LANG_GERMAN		=		0x7
CONST LANG_GREEK		=		0x8
CONST LANG_GUJARATI		=		0x47
CONST LANG_HEBREW		=		0xd
CONST LANG_HINDI		=		0x39
CONST LANG_HUNGARIAN		=		0xE
CONST LANG_ICELANDIC		=		0xF
CONST LANG_INDONESIAN		=		0x21
CONST LANG_ITALIAN		=		0x10
CONST LANG_JAPANESE		=		0x11
CONST LANG_KANNADA		=		0x4b
CONST LANG_KASHMIRI		=		0x60
CONST LANG_KAZAK		=		0x3f
CONST LANG_KONKANI		=		0x57
CONST LANG_KOREAN		=		0x12
CONST LANG_LATVIAN		=		0x26
CONST LANG_LITHUANIAN		=		0x27
CONST LANG_MACEDONIAN		=		0x2f
CONST LANG_MALAY		=		0x3e
CONST LANG_MALAYALAM		=		0x4c
CONST LANG_MANIPURI		=		0x58
CONST LANG_MARATHI		=		0x4e
CONST LANG_NEPALI		=		0x61
CONST LANG_NEUTRAL		=		0x0
CONST LANG_NORWEGIAN		=		0x14
CONST LANG_ORIYA		=		0x48
CONST LANG_POLISH		=		0x15
CONST LANG_PORTUGUESE		=		0x16
CONST LANG_PUNJABI		=		0x46
CONST LANG_ROMANIAN		=		0x18
CONST LANG_RUSSIAN		=		0x19
CONST LANG_SANSKRIT		=		0x4f
CONST LANG_SERBIAN		=		0x1a
CONST LANG_SINDHI		=		0x59
CONST LANG_SLOVAK		=		0x1B
CONST LANG_SLOVENIAN		=		0x24
CONST LANG_SPANISH		=		0xA
CONST LANG_SWAHILI		=		0x41
CONST LANG_SWEDISH		=		0x1D
CONST LANG_TAMIL		=		0x49
CONST LANG_TATAR		=		0x44
CONST LANG_TELUGU		=		0x4a
CONST LANG_THAI			=		0x1e
CONST LANG_TURKISH		=		0x1F
CONST LANG_UKRAINIAN		=		0x22
CONST LANG_URDU			=		0x20
CONST LANG_UZBEK		=		0x43
CONST LANG_VIETNAMESE		=		0x2a
CONST LB_ADDFILE		=		0x196		/* An application sends an LB_ADDFILE message to add the specified filename to a list box that contains a directory listing. */
CONST LB_ADDSTRING		=		0x180		/* An application sends an LB_ADDSTRING message to add a string to a list box. If the list box does not have the LBS_SORT style, the string is added to the end of the list. Otherwise, the string is inserted into the list and the list is sorted. */
CONST LB_CTLCODE		=		0
CONST LB_DELETESTRING		=		0x182		/* An application sends an LB_DELETESTRING message to delete a string in a list box. */
CONST LB_DIR			=		0x18D		/* The message adds the names of directories and files that match a specified string and set of file attributes. LB_DIR can also add mapped drive letters to the list box. */
CONST LB_ERR			=		-1		/* If an error occurs, the return value is LB_ERR. */
CONST LB_ERRSPACE		=		-2		/* If there is insufficient memory to store the items, the return value is LB_ERRSPACE. */
CONST LB_FINDSTRING		=		0x18F		/* An application sends an LB_FINDSTRING message to find the first string in a list box that begins with the specified string. */
CONST LB_FINDSTRINGEXACT	=		0x1A2		/* An application sends a LB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message to find the first list box string that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. */
CONST LB_GETANCHORINDEX		=		0x19D		/* An application sends an LB_GETANCHORINDEX message to retrieve the index of the anchor item—that is, the item from which a multiple selection starts. A multiple selection spans all items from the anchor item to the caret item. */
CONST LB_GETCARETINDEX		=		0x19F		/* An application sends an LB_GETCARETINDEX message to determine the index of the item that has the focus rectangle in a multiple-selection list box. The item may or may not be selected. */
CONST LB_GETCOUNT		=		0x18B		/* An application sends an LB_GETCOUNT message to retrieve the number of items in a list box. */
CONST LB_GETCURSEL		=		0x188		/* Send an LB_GETCURSEL message to retrieve the index of the currently selected item, if any, in a single-selection list box. */
CONST LB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT	=		0x193		/* An application sends an LB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT message to retrieve from a list box the width, in pixels, by which the list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width) if the list box has a horizontal scroll bar. */
CONST LB_GETITEMDATA		=		0x199		/* An application sends an LB_GETITEMDATA message to retrieve the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. */
CONST LB_GETITEMHEIGHT		=		0x1A1		/* An application sends an LB_GETITEMHEIGHT message to retrieve the height of items in a list box. */
CONST LB_GETITEMRECT		=		0x198		/* An application sends an LB_GETITEMRECT message to retrieve the dimensions of the rectangle that bounds a list box item as it is currently displayed in the list box. */
CONST LB_GETLOCALE		=		0x1A6		/* An application sends an LB_GETLOCALE message to retrieve the current locale of the list box. */
CONST LB_GETSEL			=		0x187		/* An application sends an LB_GETSEL message to retrieve the selection state of an item. */
CONST LB_GETSELCOUNT		=		0x190		/* An application sends an LB_GETSELCOUNT message to retrieve the total number of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. */
CONST LB_GETSELITEMS		=		0x191		/* An application sends an LB_GETSELITEMS message to fill a buffer with an array of integers that specify the item numbers of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. */
CONST LB_GETTEXT		=		0x189		/* An application sends an LB_GETTEXT message to retrieve a string from a list box. */
CONST LB_GETTEXTLEN		=		0x18A		/* An application sends an LB_GETTEXTLEN message to retrieve the length of a string in a list box. */
CONST LB_GETTOPINDEX		=		0x18E		/* An application sends an LB_GETTOPINDEX message to retrieve the index of the first visible item in a list box. Initially the item with index 0 is at the top of the list box, but if the list box contents have been scrolled another item may be at the t */
CONST LB_INITSTORAGE		=		0x1A8		/* An application sends the LB_INITSTORAGE message before adding a large number of items to a list box. This message allocates memory for storing list box items. */
CONST LB_INSERTSTRING		=		0x181		/* An application sends an LB_INSERTSTRING message to insert a string into a list box. Unlike the LB_ADDSTRING message, the LB_INSERTSTRING message does not cause a list with the LBS_SORT style to be sorted. */
CONST LB_ITEMFROMPOINT		=		0x1A9		/* An application sends the LB_ITEMFROMPOINT message to retrieve the zero-based index of the item nearest the specified point in a list box. */
CONST LB_MSGMAX			=		0x1A8
CONST LB_MULTIPLEADDSTRING	=		0x1B1
CONST LB_OKAY			=		0
CONST LB_RESETCONTENT		=		0x184		/* An application sends an LB_RESETCONTENT message to remove all items from a list box. */
CONST LB_SELECTSTRING		=		0x18C		/* An application sends an LB_SELECTSTRING message to search a list box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. */
CONST LB_SELITEMRANGE		=		0x19B		/* An application sends an LB_SELITEMRANGE message to select one or more consecutive items in a multiple-selection list box. */
CONST LB_SELITEMRANGEEX		=		0x183		/* An application sends an LB_SELITEMRANGEEX message to select one or more consecutive items in a multiple-selection list box. */
CONST LB_SETANCHORINDEX		=		0x19C		/* An application sends an LB_SETANCHORINDEX message to set the anchor item—that is, the item from which a multiple selection starts. A multiple selection spans all items from the anchor item to the caret item. */
CONST LB_SETCARETINDEX		=		0x19E		/* An application sends an LB_SETCARETINDEX message to set the focus rectangle to the item at the specified index in a multiple-selection list box. If the item is not visible, it is scrolled into view. */
CONST LB_SETCOLUMNWIDTH		=		0x195		/* An application sends an LB_SETCOLUMNWIDTH message to a multiple-column list box (created with the LBS_MULTICOLUMN style) to set the width, in pixels, of all columns in the list box. */
CONST LB_SETCOUNT		=		0x1A7		/* An application sends an LB_SETCOUNT message to set the count of items in a list box created with the LBS_NODATA style and not created with the LBS_HASSTRINGS style. */
CONST LB_SETCURSEL		=		0x186		/* An application sends an LB_SETCURSEL message to select a string and scroll it into view, if necessary. When the new string is selected, the list box removes the highlight from the previously selected string. */
CONST LB_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT	=		0x194		/* An application sends an LB_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT message to set the width, in pixels, by which a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width).  */
CONST LB_SETITEMDATA		=		0x19A		/* An application sends an LB_SETITEMDATA message to set a value associated with the specified item in a list box. */
CONST LB_SETITEMHEIGHT		=		0x1A0		/* An application sends an LB_SETITEMHEIGHT message to set the height, in pixels, of items in a list box. If the list box has the LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE style, this message sets the height of the item specified by the wParam parameter. */
CONST LB_SETLOCALE		=		0x1A5		/* An application sends an LB_SETLOCALE message to set the current locale of the list box. */
CONST LB_SETSEL			=		0x185		/* An application sends an LB_SETSEL message to select a string in a multiple-selection list box. */
CONST LB_SETTABSTOPS		=		0x192		/* An application sends an LB_SETTABSTOPS message to set the tab-stop positions in a list box. */
CONST LB_SETTOPINDEX		=		0x197		/* An application sends an LB_SETTOPINDEX message to ensure that a particular item in a list box is visible. */
CONST LBN_DBLCLK		=		2		/* An application sends the LBN_DBLCLK notification message when the user double-clicks a string in a list box. The parent window of the list box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST LBN_ERRSPACE		=		-2		/* An application sends the LBN_ERRSPACE notification message when a list box cannot allocate enough memory to meet a specific request. The parent window of the list box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST LBN_KILLFOCUS		=		0x5		/* An application sends the LBN_KILLFOCUS notification message when a list box loses the keyboard focus. The parent window of the list box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST LBN_SELCANCEL		=		0x3		/* An application sends the LBN_SELCANCEL notification message when the user cancels the selection in a list box. The parent window of the list box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST LBN_SELCHANGE		=		0x1		/* An application sends the LBN_SELCHANGE notification message when the selection in a list box is about to change. The parent window of the list box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST LBN_SETFOCUS		=		0x4		/* An application sends the LBN_SETFOCUS notification message when a list box receives the keyboard focus. The parent window of the list box receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST LBS_DISABLENOSCROLL	=		0x1000		/* Shows a disabled vertical scroll bar for the list box when the box does not contain enough items to scroll. If you do not specify this style, the scroll bar is hidden when the list box does not contain enough items. */
CONST LBS_EXTENDEDSEL		=		0x800		/* Allows multiple items to be selected by using the SHIFT key and the mouse or special key combinations. */
CONST LBS_HASSTRINGS		=		0x40		/* Specifies that a list box contains items consisting of strings. The list box maintains the memory and addresses for the strings so that the application can use the LB_GETTEXT message to retrieve the text for a particular item. */
CONST LBS_MULTICOLUMN		=		0x200		/* Specifies amulti columnn list box that is scrolled horizontally. The LB_SETCOLUMNWIDTH message sets the width of the columns. */
CONST LBS_MULTIPLESEL		=		0x8		/* Turns string selection on or off each time the user clicks or double-clicks a string in the list box. The user can select any number of strings. */
CONST LBS_NODATA		=		0x2000		/* Specifies a no-data list box. Specify this style when the count of items in the list box will exceed one thousand. A no-data list box must also have the LBS_OWNERDRAWFIXED style, but must not have the LBS_SORT or LBS_HASSTRINGS style. */
CONST LBS_NOINTEGRALHEIGHT	=		0x100		/* Specifies that the size of the list box is exactly the size specified by the application when it created the list box. Normally, the system sizes a list box so that the list box does not display partial items. */
CONST LBS_NOREDRAW		=		0x4		/* Specifies that the list box's appearance is not updated when changes are made. */
CONST LBS_NOSEL			=		0x4000		/* Specifies that the list box contains items that can be viewed but not selected. */
CONST LBS_NOTIFY		=		0x1		/* Notifies the parent window with an input message whenever the user clicks or double-clicks a string in the list box. */
CONST LBS_OWNERDRAWFIXED	=		0x10		/* Specifies that the owner of the list box is responsible for drawing its contents and that the items in the list box are the same height. */
CONST LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE	=		0x20		/* Specifies that the owner of the list box is responsible for drawing its contents and that the items in the list box are variable in height. */
CONST LBS_SORT			=		0x2		/* Sorts strings in the list box alphabetically. */
CONST LBS_USETABSTOPS		=		0x80		/* Enables a list box to recognize and expand tab characters when drawing its strings. You can use the LB_SETTABSTOPS message to specify tab stop positions. The default tab positions are 32 dialog template units apart. */
CONST LBS_WANTKEYBOARDINPUT	=		0x400		/* Specifies that the owner of the list box receives WM_VKEYTOITEM messages whenever the user presses a key and the list box has the input focus. This enables an application to perform special processing on the keyboard input */
CONST LBS_STANDARD		=		(LBS_NOTIFY|LBS_SORT|0x115|0x800000)		/* Sorts strings in the list box alphabetically. The parent window receives an input message whenever the user clicks or double-clicks a string. The list box has borders on all sides.     WS_VSCROLL|WS_BORDER */
CONST LC_INTERIORS		=		128		/* Device can draw interiors */
CONST LC_MARKER			=		0x4		/* Device can draw a marker */
CONST LC_NONE			=		0		/* Device does not support lines */
CONST LC_POLYLINE		=		0x2		/* Device can draw a polyline */
CONST LC_POLYMARKER		=		0x8		/* Device can draw multiple markers */
CONST LC_STYLED			=		32		/* Device can draw styled lines */
CONST LC_WIDE			=		16		/* Device can draw wide lines */
CONST LC_WIDESTYLED		=		64		/* Device can draw lines that are wide and styled */
CONST LF_FACESIZE		=		32
CONST LF_FULLFACESIZE		=		64
CONST LINECAPS			=		30
CONST LM_BAUD_115200		=		115200
CONST LM_BAUD_1152K		=		1152000
CONST LM_BAUD_1200		=		1200
CONST LM_BAUD_19200		=		19200
CONST LM_BAUD_2400		=		2400
CONST LM_BAUD_38400		=		38400
CONST LM_BAUD_4M		=		4000000
CONST LM_BAUD_57600		=		57600
CONST LM_BAUD_576K		=		576000
CONST LM_BAUD_9600		=		9600
CONST LM_GETIDEALHEIGHT		=		(WM_USER+0x301)		/* Retrieves the preferred height of a link for the control's current width. */
CONST LM_GETITEM		=		(WM_USER+0x303)		/* Retrieves the states and attributes of an item. */
CONST LM_HITTEST		=		(WM_USER+0x300)		/* Determines whether the user clicked the specified link */
CONST LM_SETITEM		=		(WM_USER+0x302)		/* Sets the states and attributes of an item. */
CONST LOGPIXELSX		=		88		/* Number of pixels per logical inch along the screen width. In a system with multiple display monitors, this value is the same for all monitors. */
CONST LOGPIXELSY		=		90		/* Number of pixels per logical inch along the screen height. In a system with multiple display monitors, this value is the same for all monitors. */
CONST LR_COLOR			=		0x0002
CONST LR_COPYDELETEORG		=		0x0008		/* Deletes the original image after creating the copy. */
CONST LR_COPYFROMRESOURCE	=		0x4000		/* Tries to reload an icon or cursor resource from the original resource file rather than simply copying the current image. This is useful for creating a different-sized copy when the resource file contains multiple sizes of the resource. */
CONST LR_COPYRETURNORG		=		0x0004		/* Returns the original hImage if it satisfies the criteria for the copy—that is, correct dimensions and color depth—in which case the LR_COPYDELETEORG flag is ignored. If this flag is not specified, a new object is always created. */
CONST LR_CREATEDIBSECTION	=		0x2000		/* When the uType parameter specifies IMAGE_BITMAP, causes the function to return a DIB section bitmap rather than a compatible bitmap. This flag is useful for loading a bitmap without mapping it to the colors of the display device. */
CONST LR_DEFAULTCOLOR		=		0x0000		/* The default flag; it does nothing. All it means is "not LR_MONOCHROME". */
CONST LR_DEFAULTSIZE		=		0x0040		/* Uses the width or height specified by the system metric values for cursors or icons, if the cxDesired or cyDesired values are set to zero. */
CONST LR_LOADFROMFILE		=		0x10		/* Loads the image from the file specified by the lpszName parameter. If this flag is not specified, lpszName is the name of the resource. */
CONST LR_LOADMAP3DCOLORS	=		0x1000		/* Searches the color table for the image and replaces the following shades of gray with the corresponding 3-D color */
CONST LR_LOADTRANSPARENT	=		0x0020		/* Retrieves the color value of the first pixel in the image and replaces the corresponding entry in the color table with the default window color (COLOR_WINDOW). All pixels in the image that use that entry become the default window color. */
CONST LR_MONOCHROME		=		0x0001		/* Loads the image in black and white. */
CONST LR_SHARED			=		0x8000		/* Shares the image handle if the image is loaded multiple times. If LR_SHARED is not set, a second call to LoadImage for the same resource will load the image again and return a different handle. */
CONST LR_VGACOLOR		=		0x0080		/* Uses true VGA colors. */
CONST LTGRAY_BRUSH		=		0x1		/* Light gray brush. */
CONST LVCF_FMT			=		0x0001		/* The fmt member is valid. */
CONST LVCF_IMAGE		=		0x0010		/* Version 4.70. The iImage member is valid. */
CONST LVCF_ORDER		=		0x0020		/* Version 4.70. The iOrder member is valid. */
CONST LVCF_SUBITEM		=		0x0008		/* The iSubItem member is valid. */
CONST LVCF_TEXT			=		0x0004		/* The pszText member is valid. */
CONST LVCF_WIDTH		=		0x0002		/* The cx member is valid. */
CONST LVCFMT_BITMAP_ON_RIGHT	=		0x1000		/* Version 4.70. The bitmap appears to the right of text. This does not affect an image from an image list assigned to the header item. */
CONST LVCFMT_CENTER		=		0x0002		/* Text is centered. */
CONST LVCFMT_COL_HAS_IMAGES	=		0x8000		/* Version 4.70. The header item contains an image in the image list. */
CONST LVCFMT_IMAGE		=		0x0800		/* Version 4.70. The item displays an image from an image list.  */
CONST LVCFMT_JUSTIFYMASK	=		0x0003		/* A bitmask used to select those bits of fmt that control field justification. To check the format of a column, use a logical "and" to combine LCFMT_JUSTIFYMASK with fmt. */
CONST LVCFMT_LEFT		=		0x0000		/* Text is left-aligned. */
CONST LVCFMT_RIGHT		=		0x0001		/* Text is right-aligned. */
CONST LVHT_ABOVE		=		0x8		/* The position is above the control's client area. */
CONST LVHT_BELOW		=		16		/* The position is below the control's client area. */
CONST LVHT_NOWHERE		=		0x1		/* The position is inside the list-view control's client window, but it is not over a list item. */
CONST LVHT_ONITEMICON		=		0x2		/* The position is over a list-view item's icon. */
CONST LVHT_ONITEMLABEL		=		0x4		/* The position is over a list-view item's text. */
CONST LVHT_ONITEMSTATEICON	=		0x8		/* The position is over the state image of a list-view item. */
CONST LVHT_TOLEFT		=		64		/* The position is to the left of the list-view control's client area. */
CONST LVHT_TORIGHT		=		32		/* The position is to the right of the list-view control's client area. */
CONST LVHT_ONITEM		=		(LVHT_ONITEMICON|LVHT_ONITEMLABEL|LVHT_ONITEMSTATEICON)
CONST LVIF_COLUMNS		=		0x200		/* The cColumns member is valid or must be filled in. */
CONST LVIF_DI_SETITEM		=		0x1000		/* The operating system should store the requested list item information and not ask for it again. This flag is used only with the LVN_GETDISPINFO notification message. */
CONST LVIF_GROUPID		=		0x100		/* The iGroupId member is valid or must be filled in. */
CONST LVIF_IMAGE		=		0x2		/* The iImage member is valid or must be filled in. */
CONST LVIF_INDENT		=		0x10		/* The iIndent member is valid or must be filled in. */
CONST LVIF_NORECOMPUTE		=		0x800		/* The control will not generate LVN_GETDISPINFO to retrieve text information if it receives an LVM_GETITEM message. Instead, the pszText member will contain LPSTR_TEXTCALLBACK. */
CONST LVIF_PARAM		=		0x4		/* The lParam member is valid or must be filled in. */
CONST LVIF_STATE		=		0x8		/* The state member is valid or must be filled in. */
CONST LVIF_TEXT			=		0x1		/* The pszText member is valid or must be filled in. */
CONST LVIS_ACTIVATING		=		0x20		/* Not currently supported. */
CONST LVIS_CUT			=		0x4		/* The item is marked for a cut-and-paste operation. */
CONST LVIS_DROPHILITED		=		0x8		/* The item is highlighted as a drag-and-drop target. */
CONST LVIS_FOCUSED		=		0x1		/* The item has the focus, so it is surrounded by a standard focus rectangle. Although more than one item may be selected, only one item can have the focus. */
CONST LVIS_GLOW			=		0x10
CONST LVIS_OVERLAYMASK		=		0xF00		/* The item's overlay image index is retrieved by a mask. */
CONST LVIS_SELECTED		=		0x2		/* The item is selected. The appearance of a selected item depends on whether it has the focus and also on the system colors used for selection. */
CONST LVIS_STATEIMAGEMASK	=		0xF000		/* The item's state image index is retrieved by a mask. */
CONST LVM_FIRST			=		0x1000
CONST LVM_APPROXIMATEVIEWRECT	=		(LVM_FIRST+64)		/* Calculates the approximate width and height required to display a given number of items. */
CONST LVM_ARRANGE		=		(LVM_FIRST+22)		/* Arranges items in icon view. */
CONST LVM_CANCELEDITLABEL	=		(LVM_FIRST+179)		/* Cancels an item text editing operation  ** Minimum operating system Windows XP ** */
CONST LVM_CREATEDRAGIMAGE	=		(LVM_FIRST+33)		/* Creates a drag image list for the specified item. */
CONST LVM_DELETEALLITEMS	=		(LVM_FIRST+9)		/* Removes all items from a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_DELETECOLUMN		=		(LVM_FIRST+28)		/* Removes a column from a list-view control.  */
CONST LVM_DELETEITEM		=		(LVM_FIRST+8)		/* Removes an item from a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_EDITLABEL		=		(LVM_FIRST+23)		/* Begins in-place editing of the specified list-view item's text. */
CONST LVM_ENABLEGROUPVIEW	=		(LVM_FIRST+157)		/* Enables or disables whether the items in a list-view control display as a group. */
CONST LVM_ENSUREVISIBLE		=		(LVM_FIRST+19)		/* Ensures that a list-view item is either entirely or partially visible, scrolling the list-view control if necessary. */
CONST LVM_FINDITEM		=		(LVM_FIRST+13)		/* Searches for a list-view item with the specified characteristics. */
CONST LVM_GETBKCOLOR		=		(LVM_FIRST+0)		/* Retrieves the background color of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETBKIMAGE		=		(LVM_FIRST+69)		/* Retrieves the background image in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETCALLBACKMASK	=		(LVM_FIRST+10)		/* Retrieves the callback mask for a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETCOLUMN		=		(LVM_FIRST+25)		/* Retrieves the attributes of a list-view control's column. */
CONST LVM_GETCOLUMNORDERARRAY	=		(LVM_FIRST+59)		/* Retrieves the current left-to-right order of columns in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETCOLUMNWIDTH	=		(LVM_FIRST+29)		/* Retrieves the width of a column in report or list view. */
CONST LVM_GETCOUNTPERPAGE	=		(LVM_FIRST+40)		/* Calculates the number of items that can fit vertically in the visible area of a list-view control when in list or report view. Only fully visible items are counted. */
CONST LVM_GETEDITCONTROL	=		(LVM_FIRST+24)		/* Retrieves the handle to the edit control being used to edit a list-view item's text. */
CONST LVM_GETEXTENDEDLISTVIEWSTYLE	=	(LVM_FIRST+55)		/* Retrieves the extended styles that are currently in use for a given list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETGROUPINFO		=		(LVM_FIRST+149)		/* Retrieves group information. */
CONST LVM_GETGROUPMETRICS	=		(LVM_FIRST+156)		/* Retrieves the metrics of a group. */
CONST LVM_GETHEADER		=		(LVM_FIRST+31)		/* Retrieves the handle to the header control used by the list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETHOTCURSOR		=		(LVM_FIRST+63)		/* Retrieves the HCURSOR value used when the pointer is over an item while hot tracking is enabled. */
CONST LVM_GETHOTITEM		=		(LVM_FIRST+61)		/* Retrieves the index of the hot item. */
CONST LVM_GETHOVERTIME		=		(LVM_FIRST+72)		/* Retrieves the amount of time that the mouse cursor must hover over an item before it is selected. */
CONST LVM_GETIMAGELIST		=		(LVM_FIRST+2)		/* Retrieves the handle to an image list used for drawing list-view items. */
CONST LVM_GETINSERTMARK		=		(LVM_FIRST+167)		/* Retrieves the position of the insertion point. */
CONST LVM_GETINSERTMARKCOLOR	=		(LVM_FIRST+171)		/* Retrieves the color of the insertion point. */
CONST LVM_GETINSERTMARKRECT	=		(LVM_FIRST+169)		/* Retrieves the rectangle that bounds the insertion point. */
CONST LVM_GETISEARCHSTRING	=		(LVM_FIRST+52)		/* Retrieves the incremental search string of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETITEM		=		(LVM_FIRST+5)		/* Retrieves some or all of a list-view item's attributes. */
CONST LVM_GETITEMCOUNT		=		(LVM_FIRST+4)		/* Retrieves the number of items in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETITEMPOSITION	=		(LVM_FIRST+16)		/* Retrieves the position of a list-view item. */
CONST LVM_GETITEMRECT		=		(LVM_FIRST+14)		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle for all or part of an item in the current view. */
CONST LVM_GETITEMSPACING	=		(LVM_FIRST+51)		/* Determines the spacing between items in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETITEMSTATE		=		(LVM_FIRST+44)		/* Retrieves the state of a list-view item. */
CONST LVM_GETITEMTEXT		=		(LVM_FIRST+45)		/* Retrieves the text of a list-view item or subitem. */
CONST LVM_GETNEXTITEM		=		(LVM_FIRST+12)		/* Searches for a list-view item that has the specified properties and bears the specified relationship to a specified item. */
CONST LVM_GETNUMBEROFWORKAREAS	=		(LVM_FIRST+73)		/* Retrieves the number of List-View Working Areas in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETORIGIN		=		(LVM_FIRST+41)		/* Retrieves the current view origin for a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETOUTLINECOLOR	=		(LVM_FIRST+176)		/* Retrieves the color of the border of a list-view control if the LVS_EX_BORDERSELECT extended window style is set. */
CONST LVM_GETSELECTEDCOLUMN	=		(LVM_FIRST+174)		/* Retrieves an integer that specifies the selected column. */
CONST LVM_GETSELECTEDCOUNT	=		(LVM_FIRST+50)		/* Determines the number of selected items in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETSELECTIONMARK	=		(LVM_FIRST+66)		/* Retrieves the selection mark from a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETSTRINGWIDTH	=		(LVM_FIRST+17)		/* Determines the width of a specified string using the specified list-view control's current font. */
CONST LVM_GETSUBITEMRECT	=		(LVM_FIRST+56)		/* Retrieves information about the bounding rectangle for a subitem in a list-view control. This message is intended to be used only with list-view controls that use the LVS_REPORT style. */
CONST LVM_GETTEXTBKCOLOR	=		(LVM_FIRST+37)		/* Retrieves the text background color of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETTEXTCOLOR		=		(LVM_FIRST+35)		/* Retrieves the text color of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETTILEINFO		=		(LVM_FIRST+165)		/* Retrieves information about a tile in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETTILEVIEWINFO	=		(LVM_FIRST+163)		/* Retrieves information about a list-view control in tile view. */
CONST LVM_GETTOOLTIPS		=		(LVM_FIRST+78)		/* Retrieves the ToolTip control that the list-view control uses to display ToolTips. */
CONST LVM_GETTOPINDEX		=		(LVM_FIRST+39)		/* Retrieves the index of the topmost visible item when in list or report view. */
CONST LVM_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the UNICODE character format flag for the control. */
CONST LVM_GETVIEW		=		(LVM_FIRST+143)		/* Retrieves the current view of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_GETVIEWRECT		=		(LVM_FIRST+34)		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle of all items in the list-view control. The list view must be in icon or small icon view. */
CONST LVM_GETWORKAREAS		=		(LVM_FIRST+70)		/* Retrieves the working areas from a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_HASGROUP		=		(LVM_FIRST+161)		/* Determines whether the list-view control has a specified group. */
CONST LVM_HITTEST		=		(LVM_FIRST+18)		/* Determines which list-view item, if any, is at a specified position. */
CONST LVM_INSERTCOLUMN		=		(LVM_FIRST+27)		/* Inserts a new column in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_INSERTGROUP		=		(LVM_FIRST+145)		/* Inserts a group into a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_INSERTGROUPSORTED	=		(LVM_FIRST+159)		/* Inserts a group into an ordered list of groups. */
CONST LVM_INSERTITEM		=		(LVM_FIRST+7)		/* Inserts a new item in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_INSERTMARKHITTEST	=		(LVM_FIRST+168)		/* Retrieves the insertion point closest to a specified point. */
CONST LVM_ISGROUPVIEWENABLED	=		(LVM_FIRST+175)		/* Checks whether the list-view control has group view enabled. */
CONST LVM_MAPIDTOINDEX		=		(LVM_FIRST+181)		/* Maps the identifier (ID) of an item to an index.   ** Minimum operating system Windows XP ** */
CONST LVM_MAPINDEXTOID		=		(LVM_FIRST+180)		/* Maps the index of an item to a unique identifier (ID).   ** Minimum operating system Windows XP ** */
CONST LVM_MOVEGROUP		=		(LVM_FIRST+151)		/* Moves the group to the specified zero based index. */
CONST LVM_MOVEITEMTOGROUP	=		(LVM_FIRST+154)		/* Moves an item specified by an index into a group. */
CONST LVM_REDRAWITEMS		=		(LVM_FIRST+21)		/* Forces a list-view control to redraw a range of items. */
CONST LVM_REMOVEALLGROUPS	=		(LVM_FIRST+160)		/* Removes all groups from a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_REMOVEGROUP		=		(LVM_FIRST+150)		/* Removes a group from a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SCROLL		=		(LVM_FIRST+20)		/* Scrolls the content of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETBKCOLOR		=		(LVM_FIRST+1)		/* Sets the background color of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETBKIMAGE		=		(LVM_FIRST+68)		/* Sets the background image in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETCALLBACKMASK	=		(LVM_FIRST+11)		/* Changes the callback mask for a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETCOLUMN		=		(LVM_FIRST+26)		/* Sets the attributes of a list-view column. */
CONST LVM_SETCOLUMNORDERARRAY	=		(LVM_FIRST+58)		/* Sets the left-to-right order of columns in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETCOLUMNWIDTH	=		(LVM_FIRST+30)		/* Changes the width of a column in report-view mode or the width of all columns in list-view mode. */
CONST LVM_SETEXTENDEDLISTVIEWSTYLE	=	(LVM_FIRST+54)		/* Sets extended styles in list-view controls. */
CONST LVM_SETGROUPINFO		=		(LVM_FIRST+147)		/* Sets group information. */
CONST LVM_SETGROUPMETRICS	=		(LVM_FIRST+155)		/* Sets the metrics of a group. */
CONST LVM_SETHOTCURSOR		=		(LVM_FIRST+62)		/* Sets the HCURSOR value that the list-view control uses when the pointer is over an item while hot tracking is enabled. */
CONST LVM_SETHOTITEM		=		(LVM_FIRST+60)		/* Sets the hot item for a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETHOVERTIME		=		(LVM_FIRST+71)		/* Sets the amount of time which the mouse cursor must hover over an item before it is selected. */
CONST LVM_SETICONSPACING	=		(LVM_FIRST+53)		/* Sets the spacing between icons in list-view controls that have the LVS_ICON style. */
CONST LVM_SETIMAGELIST		=		(LVM_FIRST+3)		/* Assigns an image list to a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETINFOTIP		=		(LVM_FIRST+173)		/* Sets ToolTip text. */
CONST LVM_SETINSERTMARK		=		(LVM_FIRST+166)		/* Sets the insertion point to the defined position. */
CONST LVM_SETINSERTMARKCOLOR	=		(LVM_FIRST+170)		/* Sets the color of the insertion point. */
CONST LVM_SETITEM		=		(LVM_FIRST+6)		/* Sets some or all of a list-view item's attributes. You can also send LVM_SETITEM to set the text of a subitem. */
CONST LVM_SETITEMCOUNT		=		(LVM_FIRST+47)		/* Causes the list-view control to allocate memory for the specified number of items or sets the virtual number of items in a virtual list-view control. This depends on how the list-view control was created. */
CONST LVM_SETITEMPOSITION	=		(LVM_FIRST+15)		/* Moves an item to a specified position in a list-view control (must be in icon or small icon view).  */
CONST LVM_SETITEMPOSITION32	=		(LVM_FIRST+49)		/* Moves an item to a specified position in a list-view control (must be in icon or small icon view). This message differs from the LVM_SETITEMPOSITION message in that it uses 32-bit coordinates. */
CONST LVM_SETITEMSTATE		=		(LVM_FIRST+43)		/* Changes the state of an item in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETITEMTEXT		=		(LVM_FIRST+46)		/* Changes the text of a list-view item or subitem. */
CONST LVM_SETOUTLINECOLOR	=		(LVM_FIRST+177)		/* Sets the color of the border of a list-view control if the LVS_EX_BORDERSELECT extended window style is set. */
CONST LVM_SETSELECTEDCOLUMN	=		(LVM_FIRST+140)		/* Sets the index of the selected column. */
CONST LVM_SETSELECTIONMARK	=		(LVM_FIRST+67)		/* Sets the selection mark in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETTEXTBKCOLOR	=		(LVM_FIRST+38)		/* Sets the background color of text in a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETTEXTCOLOR		=		(LVM_FIRST+36)		/* Sets the text color of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETTILEINFO		=		(LVM_FIRST+164)		/* Sets information for a tile of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETTILEVIEWINFO	=		(LVM_FIRST+162)		/* Sets information that a list-view control uses in tile view. */
CONST LVM_SETTILEWIDTH		=		(LVM_FIRST+141)		/* Not currently supported. */
CONST LVM_SETTOOLTIPS		=		(LVM_FIRST+74)		/* Sets the ToolTip control that the list-view control will use to display ToolTips. */
CONST LVM_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the UNICODE character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST LVM_SETVIEW		=		(LVM_FIRST+142)		/* Sets the view of a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SETWORKAREAS		=		(LVM_FIRST+65)		/* Sets the working areas within a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SORTGROUPS		=		(LVM_FIRST+158)		/* Uses an application-defined comparison function to sort groups by ID within a list-view control. */
CONST LVM_SORTITEMS		=		(LVM_FIRST+48)		/* Uses an application-defined comparison function to sort the items of a list-view control. The index of each item changes to reflect the new sequence. */
CONST LVM_SORTITEMSEX		=		(LVM_FIRST+81)		/* Uses an application-defined comparison function to sort the items of a list-view control. The index of each item changes to reflect the new sequence. */
CONST LVM_SUBITEMHITTEST	=		(LVM_FIRST+57)		/* Determines which list-view item or subitem is at a given position. */
CONST LVM_UPDATE		=		(LVM_FIRST+42)		/* Updates a list-view item. */
CONST LVN_FIRST			=		-100
CONST LVN_BEGINDRAG		=		(LVN_FIRST-9)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that a drag-and-drop operation involving the left mouse button is being initiated. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_BEGINLABELEDIT	=		(LVN_FIRST-5)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window about the start of label editing for an item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_BEGINRDRAG		=		(LVN_FIRST-11)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that a drag-and-drop operation involving the right mouse button is being initiated. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_BEGINSCROLL		=		(LVN_FIRST-80)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window when a scrolling operation starts. */
CONST LVN_COLUMNCLICK		=		(LVN_FIRST-8)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that a column was clicked. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_DELETEALLITEMS	=		(LVN_FIRST-4)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that all items in the control are about to be deleted. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_DELETEITEM		=		(LVN_FIRST-3)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that an item is about to be deleted. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_ENDLABELEDIT		=		(LVN_FIRST-6)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window about the end of label editing for an item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_ENDSCROLL		=		(LVN_FIRST-81)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window when a scrolling operation ends. */
CONST LVN_GETDISPINFO		=		(LVN_FIRST-50)		/* Sent by a list-view control to its parent window. It is a request for the parent window to provide information needed to display or sort a list-view item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_GETINFOTIP		=		(LVN_FIRST-57)		/* Sent by a large icon view list-view control that has the LVS_EX_INFOTIP extended style. This notification is sent when the list-view control is requesting additional text information to be displayed in a ToolTip. */
CONST LVN_HOTTRACK		=		(LVN_FIRST-21)		/* Sent by a list-view control when the user moves the mouse over an item. This notification is only sent by list-view controls that have the LVS_EX_TRACKSELECT extended list-view style. It is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_INSERTITEM		=		(LVN_FIRST-2)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that a new item was inserted. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_ITEMACTIVATE		=		(LVN_FIRST-14)		/* Sent by a list-view control when the user activates an item. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_ITEMCHANGED		=		(LVN_FIRST-1)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that an item has changed. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_ITEMCHANGING		=		(LVN_FIRST-0)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that an item is changing. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_KEYDOWN		=		(LVN_FIRST-55)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that a key has been pressed. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_LAST			=		-199
CONST LVN_MARQUEEBEGIN		=		(LVN_FIRST-56)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that a bounding box (marquee) selection has begun. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_ODCACHEHINT		=		(LVN_FIRST-13)		/* Sent by a virtual list-view control when the contents of its display area have changed. For example, a list-view control sends this notification when the user scrolls the control's display. */
CONST LVN_ODFINDITEM		=		(LVN_FIRST-52)		/* Sent by a virtual list-view control when it needs the owner to find a particular callback item. For example, the control will send this notification when it receives shortcut keyboard input or when it receives an LVM_FINDITEM message. */
CONST LVN_ODSTATECHANGED	=		(LVN_FIRST-15)		/* Sent by a list-view control when the state of an item or range of items has changed. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVN_SETDISPINFO		=		(LVN_FIRST-51)		/* Notifies a list-view control's parent window that it must update the information it maintains for an item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST LVNI_ABOVE		=		0x100		/* Searches for an item that is above the specified item. */
CONST LVNI_ALL			=		0x0		/* Searches for a subsequent item by index, the default value. */
CONST LVNI_BELOW		=		0x200		/* Searches for an item that is below the specified item */
CONST LVNI_CUT			=		0x4		/* The item has the LVIS_CUT state flag set. */
CONST LVNI_DROPHILITED		=		0x8		/* The item has the LVIS_DROPHILITED state flag set */
CONST LVNI_FOCUSED		=		0x1		/* The item has the LVIS_FOCUSED state flag set. */
CONST LVNI_SELECTED		=		0x2		/* The item has the LVIS_SELECTED state flag set. */
CONST LVNI_TOLEFT		=		0x400		/* Searches for an item to the left of the specified item. */
CONST LVNI_TORIGHT		=		0x800		/* Searches for an item to the right of the specified item. */
CONST LVS_ALIGNLEFT		=		0x800		/* Items are left-aligned in icon and small icon view. */
CONST LVS_ALIGNMASK		=		0xc00		/* Determines the control's current alignment. */
CONST LVS_ALIGNTOP		=		0x0		/* Items are aligned with the top of the list-view control in icon and small icon view. */
CONST LVS_AUTOARRANGE		=		0x100		/* Icons are automatically kept arranged in icon and small icon view. */
CONST LVS_EDITLABELS		=		0x200		/* Item text can be edited in place. The parent window must process the LVN_ENDLABELEDIT notification message. */
CONST LVS_EX_BORDERSELECT	=		0x8000		/* Version 4.71. If this style is set, when an item is selected the border color of the item changes rather than the item being highlighted.  */
CONST LVS_EX_CHECKBOXES		=		0x4		/* Version 4.70. Enables check boxes for items in a list-view control. When set to this style, the control creates and sets a state image list with two images using DrawFrameControl. State image 1 is the unchecked box, and state image 2 is the checked  */
CONST LVS_EX_DOUBLEBUFFER	=		0x10000
CONST LVS_EX_FLATSB		=		0x100		/* Version 4.71. Enables flat scroll bars in the list view. If you need more control over the appearance of the list-view's scroll bars, you should manipulate the list-view's scroll bars directly using the Flat Scroll Bar APIs. */
CONST LVS_EX_FULLROWSELECT	=		0x020		/* Version 4.70. When an item is selected, the item and all its subitems are highlighted. This style is available only in conjunction with the LVS_REPORT style. */
CONST LVS_EX_GRIDLINES		=		0x1		/* Version 4.70. Displays gridlines around items and subitems. This style is available only in conjunction with the LVS_REPORT style. */
CONST LVS_EX_HEADERDRAGDROP	=		0x10		/* Version 4.70. Enables drag-and-drop reordering of columns in a list-view control. This style is only available to list-view controls that use the LVS_REPORT style. */
CONST LVS_EX_HIDELABELS		=		0x20000
CONST LVS_EX_INFOTIP		=		0x400		/* Version 4.71. When a list-view control uses the LVS_EX_INFOTIP style, the LVN_GETINFOTIP notification message is sent to the parent window before displaying an item's ToolTip. */
CONST LVS_EX_LABELTIP		=		0x4000		/* Version 5.80. If a partially hidden label in any list-view mode lacks ToolTip text, the list-view control will unfold the label. If this style is not set, the list-view control will unfold partly hidden labels only for the large icon mode. */
CONST LVS_EX_MULTIWORKAREAS	=		0x2000		/* Version 4.71. If the list-view control has the LVS_AUTOARRANGE style, the control will not autoarrange its icons until one or more work areas are defined (see LVM_SETWORKAREAS).  */
CONST LVS_EX_ONECLICKACTIVATE	=		0x40		/* Version 4.70. The list-view control sends an LVN_ITEMACTIVATE notification message to the parent window when the user clicks an item. This style also enables hot tracking in the list-view control. */
CONST LVS_EX_REGIONAL		=		0x200		/* Version 4.71. Sets the list-view window region to include only the item icons and text using SetWindowRgn. Any area that is not part of an item is excluded from the window region. */
CONST LVS_EX_SINGLEROW		=		0x40000
CONST LVS_EX_SNAPTOGRID		=		0x80000
CONST LVS_EX_SUBITEMIMAGES	=		0x2		/* Version 4.70. Allows images to be displayed for subitems. This style is available only in conjunction with the LVS_REPORT style. */
CONST LVS_EX_TRACKSELECT	=		0x8		/* Version 4.70. Enables hot-track selection in a list-view control. Hot track selection means that an item is automatically selected when the cursor remains over the item for a certain period of time.  */
CONST LVS_EX_TWOCLICKACTIVATE	=		0x80		/* Version 4.70. The list-view control sends an LVN_ITEMACTIVATE notification message to the parent window when the user double-clicks an item. This style also enables hot tracking in the list-view control. */
CONST LVS_EX_UNDERLINECOLD	=		0x1000		/* Version 4.71. Causes those non-hot items that may be activated to be displayed with underlined text. This style requires that LVS_EX_TWOCLICKACTIVATE be set also. */
CONST LVS_EX_UNDERLINEHOT	=		0x800		/* Version 4.71. Causes those hot items that may be activated to be displayed with underlined text. This style requires that LVS_EX_ONECLICKACTIVATE or LVS_EX_TWOCLICKACTIVATE also be set. */
CONST LVS_ICON			=		0x0		/* This style specifies icon view. */
CONST LVS_LIST			=		0x3		/* This style specifies list view. */
CONST LVS_NOCOLUMNHEADER	=		0x4000		/* Column headers are not displayed in report view. By default, columns have headers in report view. */
CONST LVS_NOLABELWRAP		=		0x80		/* Item text is displayed on a single line in icon view. By default, item text may wrap in icon view. */
CONST LVS_NOSCROLL		=		0x2000		/* Scrolling is disabled. All items must be within the client area. This style is not compatible with the LVS_LIST or LVS_REPORT styles. See Knowledge Base Article Q137520 for further discussion. */
CONST LVS_NOSORTHEADER		=		0x8000		/* Column headers do not work like buttons. This style can be used if clicking a column header in report view does not carry out an action, such as sorting.  */
CONST LVS_OWNERDATA		=		0x1000		/* Version 4.70. This style specifies a virtual list-view control. For more information about this list control style, see List-View Controls Overview. */
CONST LVS_OWNERDRAWFIXED	=		0x400		/* The owner window can paint items in report view. The list-view control sends a WM_DRAWITEM message to paint each item; it does not send separate messages for each subitem. */
CONST LVS_REPORT		=		0x1		/* This style specifies report view. When using the LVS_REPORT style with a list-view control, the first column is always left-aligned. You cannot use LVCFMT_RIGHT to change this alignment. See LVCOLUMN for further information on column alignment. */
CONST LVS_SHAREIMAGELISTS	=		0x40		/* The image list will not be deleted when the control is destroyed. This style enables the use of the same image lists with multiple list-view controls. */
CONST LVS_SHOWSELALWAYS		=		0x8		/* The selection, if any, is always shown, even if the control does not have the focus. */
CONST LVS_SINGLESEL		=		0x4		/* Only one item at a time can be selected. By default, multiple items may be selected. */
CONST LVS_SMALLICON		=		0x2		/* This style specifies small icon view. */
CONST LVS_SORTASCENDING		=		0x10		/* Item indexes are sorted based on item text in ascending order. */
CONST LVS_SORTDESCENDING	=		0x20		/* Item indexes are sorted based on item text in descending order. */
CONST LVS_TYPEMASK		=		0x3		/* Determines the control's current window style. */
CONST LVS_TYPESTYLEMASK		=		0xfc00		/* Determines the window styles that control item alignment and header appearance and behavior. */
CONST LVSCW_AUTOSIZE		=		-1		/* Automatically sizes the column. */
CONST LVSCW_AUTOSIZE_USEHEADER	=		-2		/* Automatically sizes the column to fit the header text. If you use this value with the last column, its width is set to fill the remaining width of the list-view control. */
CONST LVSICF_NOINVALIDATEALL	=		0x1		/* The list-view control will not repaint unless affected items are currently in view. */
CONST LVSICF_NOSCROLL		=		0x2		/* The list-view control will not change the scroll position when the item count changes. */
CONST LVSIL_NORMAL		=		0		/* Image list with large icons. */
CONST LVSIL_SMALL		=		0x1		/* Image list with small icons. */
CONST LVSIL_STATE		=		0x2		/* Image list with state images. */
CONST LVTVIF_AUTOSIZE		=		0x00000000		/* Size the control automatically. */
CONST LVTVIF_FIXEDHEIGHT	=		0x00000002		/* Apply a fixed height to the control. */
CONST LVTVIF_FIXEDSIZE		=		0x00000003		/* Apply a fixed size to the control. */
CONST LVTVIF_FIXEDWIDTH		=		0x00000001		/* Apply a fixed width to the control. */
CONST LVTVIM_COLUMNS		=		0x00000002		/* Retrieve column information. */
CONST LVTVIM_LABELMARGIN	=		0x00000004		/* Retrieve the margin of the label. */
CONST LVTVIM_TILESIZE		=		0x00000001		/* Retrieve the size of a tile. */
CONST LWA_ALPHA			=		0x00000002
CONST LWA_COLORKEY		=		0x00000001
CONST MA_ACTIVATE		=		0x1		/* Activates the window, and does not discard the mouse message. */
CONST MA_ACTIVATEANDEAT		=		0x2		/* Activates the window, and discards the mouse message. */
CONST MA_NOACTIVATE		=		0x3		/* Does not activate the window, and does not discard the mouse message. */
CONST MA_NOACTIVATEANDEAT	=		0x4		/* Does not activate the window, but discards the mouse message. */
CONST MAC_CHARSET		=		77
CONST MAX_PATH			=		260
CONST MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE	=		0x2		/* The message box contains three push buttons: Abort, Retry, and Ignore. */
CONST MB_APPLMODAL		=		0x0		/* The user must respond to the message box before continuing work in the window identified by the hWnd parameter. However, the user can move to the windows of other threads and work in those windows. */
CONST MB_CANCELTRYCONTINUE	=		0x6		/* Microsoft® Windows® 2000/XP: The message box contains three push buttons: Cancel, Try Again, Continue. Use this message box type instead of MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE. */
CONST MB_COMPOSITE		=		0x2		/* Always use composite charactersthat is, characters in which a base character and a nonspacing character have different character values. Cannot be used with MB_PRECOMPOSED. */
CONST MB_DEFAULT_DESKTOP_ONLY	=		0x20000		/* Windows NT/2000/XP: Same as MB_SERVICE_NOTIFICATION except that the system will display the message box only on the default desktop of the interactive window station. For more information, see Window Stations. */
CONST MB_DEFBUTTON1		=		0x0		/* The first button is the default button.  MB_DEFBUTTON1 is the default unless MB_DEFBUTTON2, MB_DEFBUTTON3, or MB_DEFBUTTON4 is specified. */
CONST MB_DEFBUTTON2		=		0x100		/* The second button is the default button. */
CONST MB_DEFBUTTON3		=		0x200		/* The third button is the default button. */
CONST MB_DEFBUTTON4		=		0x300		/* The fourth button is the default button. */
CONST MB_DEFMASK		=		0xF00
CONST MB_ERR_INVALID_CHARS	=		0x8		/* If the function encounters an invalid input character, it fails and GetLastError returns ERROR_NO_UNICODE_TRANSLATION.  */
CONST MB_FUNC			=		0x4000
CONST MB_FUNC_STR		=		0		/* "mb" */
CONST MB_HELP			=		0x4000		/* Windows 95/98/Me, Windows NT® 4.0 and later: Adds a Help button to the message box. When the user clicks the Help button or presses F1, the system sends a WM_HELP message to the owner. */
CONST MB_ICONASTERISK		=		0x40		/* An icon consisting of a lowercase letter i in a circle appears in the message box. */
CONST MB_ICONERROR		=		0x10		/* A stop-sign icon appears in the message box. */
CONST MB_ICONEXCLAMATION	=		0x30		/* An exclamation-point icon appears in the message box. */
CONST MB_ICONHAND		=		0x10		/* A stop-sign icon appears in the message box. */
CONST MB_ICONINFORMATION	=		(MB_ICONASTERISK)		/* An icon consisting of a lowercase letter i in a circle appears in the message box. */
CONST MB_ICONMASK		=		0xF0
CONST MB_ICONQUESTION		=		0x20		/* A question-mark icon appears in the message box. */
CONST MB_ICONSTOP		=		(MB_ICONHAND)		/* A stop-sign icon appears in the message box. */
CONST MB_ICONWARNING		=		(MB_ICONEXCLAMATION)		/* An exclamation-point icon appears in the message box. */
CONST MB_MISCMASK		=		0xC000
CONST MB_MODEMASK		=		0x3000
CONST MB_NOFOCUS		=		0x8000
CONST MB_OK			=		0x0		/* The message box contains one push button: OK. This is the default. */
CONST MB_OKCANCEL		=		0x1		/* The message box contains two push buttons: OK and Cancel. */
CONST MB_PRECOMPOSED		=		0x1		/* Always use precomposed charactersthat is, characters in which a base character and a nonspacing character have a single character value. This is the default translation option. Cannot be used with MB_COMPOSITE. */
CONST MB_RETRYCANCEL		=		0x5		/* The message box contains two push buttons: Retry and Cancel. */
CONST MB_RIGHT			=		0x80000		/* The text is right-justified. */
CONST MB_RTLREADING		=		0x100000		/* Displays message and caption text using right-to-left reading order on Hebrew and Arabic systems. */
CONST MB_SERVICE_NOTIFICATION	=		0x40000		/* Windows NT/2000/XP: The caller is a service notifying the user of an event. The function displays a message box on the current active desktop, even if there is no user logged on to the computer. */
CONST MB_SERVICE_NOTIFICATION_NT3X	=	0x40000		/* Windows NT/2000/XP: This value corresponds to the value defined for MB_SERVICE_NOTIFICATION for Windows NT version 3.51. */
CONST MB_SETFOREGROUND		=		0x10000		/* The message box becomes the foreground window. Internally, the system calls the SetForegroundWindow function for the message box. */
CONST MB_SYSTEMMODAL		=		0x1000		/* Same as MB_APPLMODAL except that the message box has the WS_EX_TOPMOST style. Use system-modal message boxes to notify the user of serious, potentially damaging errors that require immediate attention (for example, running out of memory). */
CONST MB_TASKMODAL		=		0x2000		/* Same as MB_APPLMODAL except that all the top-level windows belonging to the current thread are disabled if the hWnd parameter is NULL.  */
CONST MB_TOPMOST		=		0x40000		/* The message box is created with the WS_EX_TOPMOST window style. */
CONST MB_TYPEMASK		=		0xF
CONST MB_USEGLYPHCHARS		=		0x4		/* Use glyph characters instead of control characters. */
CONST MB_USERICON		=		0x80
CONST MB_YESNO			=		0x4		/* The message box contains two push buttons: Yes and No. */
CONST MB_YESNOCANCEL		=		0x3		/* The message box contains three push buttons: Yes, No, and Cancel. */
CONST MCM_FIRST			=		0x1000
CONST MCM_GETCURSEL		=		(MCM_FIRST+1)		/* Retrieves the currently selected date. */
CONST MCM_GETCOLOR		=		(MCM_FIRST+11)		/* Retrieves the color for a given portion of a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_GETFIRSTDAYOFWEEK	=		(MCM_FIRST+16)		/* Retrieves the first day of the week for a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_GETMAXSELCOUNT	=		(MCM_FIRST+3)		/* Retrieves the maximum date range that can be selected in a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_GETMAXTODAYWIDTH	=		(MCM_FIRST+21)		/* Retrieves the maximum width of the "today" string in a month calendar control. This includes the label text and the date text. */
CONST MCM_GETMINREQRECT		=		(MCM_FIRST+9)		/* Retrieves the minimum size required to display a full month in a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_GETMONTHDELTA		=		(MCM_FIRST+19)		/* Retrieves the scroll rate for a month calendar control. The scroll rate is the number of months that the control moves its display when the user clicks a scroll button. */
CONST MCM_GETMONTHRANGE		=		(MCM_FIRST+7)		/* Retrieves date information (using SYSTEMTIME structures) that represents the high and low limits of a month calendar control's display. */
CONST MCM_GETRANGE		=		(MCM_FIRST+17)		/* Retrieves the minimum and maximum allowable dates set for a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_GETSELRANGE		=		(MCM_FIRST+5)		/* Retrieves date information that represents the upper and lower limits of the date range currently selected by the user. */
CONST MCM_GETTODAY		=		(MCM_FIRST+13)		/* Retrieves the date information for the date specified as "today" for a month calendar control.  */
CONST MCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST MCM_HITTEST		=		(MCM_FIRST+14)		/* Determines which portion of a month calendar control is at a given point on the screen. */
CONST MCM_SETCOLOR		=		(MCM_FIRST+10)		/* Sets the color for a given portion of a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_SETCURSEL		=		(MCM_FIRST+2)		/* Sets the currently selected date for a month calendar control. If the specified date is not in view, the control updates the display to bring it into view. */
CONST MCM_SETDAYSTATE		=		(MCM_FIRST+8)		/* Sets the day states for all months that are currently visible within a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_SETFIRSTDAYOFWEEK	=		(MCM_FIRST+15)		/* Sets the first day of the week for a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_SETMAXSELCOUNT	=		(MCM_FIRST+4)		/* Sets the maximum number of days that can be selected in a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_SETMONTHDELTA		=		(MCM_FIRST+20)		/* Sets the scroll rate for a month calendar control. The scroll rate is the number of months that the control moves its display when the user clicks a scroll button. */
CONST MCM_SETRANGE		=		(MCM_FIRST+18)		/* Sets the minimum and maximum allowable dates for a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_SETSELRANGE		=		(MCM_FIRST+6)		/* Sets the selection for a month calendar control to a given date range. */
CONST MCM_SETTODAY		=		(MCM_FIRST+12)		/* Sets the "today" selection for a month calendar control. */
CONST MCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST MCN_FIRST			=		-750
CONST MCN_GETDAYSTATE		=		(MCN_FIRST+3)		/* Sent by a month calendar control to request information about how individual days should be displayed. This notification message is sent only by month calendar controls that use the MCS_DAYSTATE style, and it is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY messa */
CONST MCN_LAST			=		-759
CONST MCN_SELCHANGE		=		(MCN_FIRST+1)		/* Sent by a month calendar control when the currently selected date or range of dates changes. */
CONST MCN_SELECT		=		(MCN_FIRST+4)		/* Sent by a month calendar control when the user makes an explicit date selection within a month calendar control. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message.  */
CONST MCS_DAYSTATE		=		0x1		/* Version 4.70. The month calendar will send MCN_GETDAYSTATE notifications to request information about which days should be displayed in bold. For more information about supporting this style, see Processing the MCN_GETDAYSTATE Notification Message.  */
CONST MCS_MULTISELECT		=		0x2		/* Version 4.70. The month calendar will allow the user to select a range of dates within the control. By default, the maximum range is one week. You can change the maximum range that can be selected by using the MCM_SETMAXSELCOUNT message.  */
CONST MCS_NOTODAY		=		0x10		/* Version 4.70. The month calendar control will not display the "today" date at the bottom of the control.  */
CONST MCS_NOTODAYCIRCLE		=		0x8		/* Version 4.70. The month calendar control will not circle the "today" date.  */
CONST MCS_WEEKNUMBERS		=		0x4		/* Version 4.70. The month calendar control will display week numbers (1-52) to the left of each row of days. Week 1 is defined as the first week that contains at least four days.  */
CONST MCSC_BACKGROUND		=		0		/* Retrieve the background color displayed between months. */
CONST MCSC_MONTHBK		=		0x4		/* Retrieve the background color displayed within the month. */
CONST MCSC_TEXT			=		0x1		/* Retrieve the color used to display text within a month. */
CONST MCSC_TITLEBK		=		0x2		/* Retrieve the background color displayed in the calendar's title. */
CONST MCSC_TITLETEXT		=		0x3		/* Retrieve the color used to display text within the calendar's title. */
CONST MCSC_TRAILINGTEXT		=		0x5		/* Retrieve the color used to display header day and trailing day text. Header and trailing days are the days from the previous and following months that appear on the current month calendar. */
CONST MEM_COMMIT		=		0x1000		/* Indicates committed pages for which physical storage has been allocated, either in memory or in the paging file on disk. */
CONST MEM_DECOMMIT		=		0x4000		/* Decommits the specified region of committed pages. After this operation, the pages are in the reserved state. */
CONST MEM_FREE			=		0x10000		/* Indicates free pages not accessible to the calling process and available to be allocated. For free pages, the information in the AllocationBase, AllocationProtect, Protect, and Type members is undefined. */
CONST MEM_IMAGE			=		0x1000000		/* Indicates that the memory pages within the region are mapped into the view of an image section. */
CONST MEM_MAPPED		=		0x40000		/* Indicates that the memory pages within the region are mapped into the view of a section. */
CONST MEM_PHYSICAL		=		0x400000		/* Allocates physical memory with read-write access. This value is solely for use with Address Windowing Extensions (AWE) memory. */
CONST MEM_PRIVATE		=		0x20000		/* Indicates that the memory pages within the region are private (that is, not shared by other processes). */
CONST MEM_RELEASE		=		0x8000		/* Releases the specified region of pages. After this operation, the pages are in the free state. */
CONST MEM_RESERVE		=		0x2000		/* Indicates reserved pages where a range of the process's virtual address space is reserved without any physical storage being allocated. For reserved pages, the information in the Protect member is undefined. */
CONST MEM_RESET			=		0x80000		/* Specifies that the data in the memory range specified by lpAddress and dwSize is no longer of interest. The pages should not be read from or written to the paging file. */
CONST MERGECOPY			=		0x00C000CA
CONST MERGEPAINT		=		0x00BB0226
CONST MF_APPEND			=		0x00000100
CONST MF_BITMAP			=		0x00000004		/* Contains a bitmap handle. */
CONST MF_BYCOMMAND		=		0x0		/* Indicates that uIDEnableItem gives the identifier of the menu item. If neither the MF_BYCOMMAND nor MF_BYPOSITION flag is specified, the MF_BYCOMMAND flag is the default flag. */
CONST MF_BYPOSITION		=		0x00000400		/* Indicates that uIDEnableItem gives the zero-based relative position of the menu item. */
CONST MF_CALLBACKS		=		0x8000000
CONST MF_CHANGE			=		0x00000080
CONST MF_CHECKED		=		0x00000008		/* Indicates that the menu item has a check mark next to it. */
CONST MF_CONV			=		0x40000000
CONST MF_DEFAULT		=		0x00001000
CONST MF_DELETE			=		0x00000200
CONST MF_DISABLED		=		0x00000002		/* Indicates that the menu item is disabled, but not grayed, so it cannot be selected. */
CONST MF_DLL_NAME		=		0		/* "MicrosoftPictureConverter" */
CONST MF_ENABLED		=		0x0		/* Indicates that the menu item is enabled and restored from a grayed state so that it can be selected. */
CONST MF_END			=		0x80
CONST MF_ERRORS			=		0x10000000
CONST MF_FLAGS_CREATE_BUT_NO_SHOW_DISABLED=	0x8
CONST MF_FLAGS_EVEN_IF_NO_RESOURCE	=	0x1
CONST MF_FLAGS_FILL_IN_UNKNOWN_RESOURCE	=	0x4
CONST MF_FLAGS_NO_CREATE_IF_NO_RESOURCE	=	0x2
CONST MF_FPCR_FUNC		=		0x25
CONST MF_FPCR_FUNC_STR		=		0		/* "mf_fpcr" */
CONST MF_GRAYED			=		0x00000001		/* Indicates that the menu item is initially inactive and drawn with a gray effect. */
CONST MF_HELP			=		0x00004000		/* Indicates that the menu item has a vertical separator to its left. */
CONST MF_HILITE			=		0x00000080		/* Highlights the menu item. If this flag is not specified, the highlighting is removed from the item. */
CONST MF_HSZ_INFO		=		0x1000000
CONST MF_INSERT			=		0x0
CONST MF_LINKS			=		0x20000000
CONST MF_MASK			=		0xFF000000
CONST MF_MENUBARBREAK		=		0x00000020		/* Indicates that the menu item is placed in a new column. The old and new columns are separated by a bar. */
CONST MF_MENUBREAK		=		0x00000040		/* Indicates that the menu item is placed in a new column. */
CONST MF_MOUSESELECT		=		0x00008000
CONST MF_OWNERDRAW		=		0x00000100		/* Indicates that the owner window of the menu is responsible for drawing all visual aspects of the menu item, including highlighted, selected, and inactive states. This option is not valid for an item in a menu bar. */
CONST MF_POPUP			=		0x00000010		/* Indicates that the item is one that opens a drop-down menu or submenu. */
CONST MF_POSTMSGS		=		0x4000000
CONST MF_REMOVE			=		0x00001000
CONST MF_RIGHTJUSTIFY		=		0x00004000
CONST MF_SENDMSGS		=		0x2000000
CONST MF_SEPARATOR		=		0x00000800
CONST MF_STRING			=		0x0		/* Contains a pointer to a null-terminated string. */
CONST MF_SYSMENU		=		0x00002000
CONST MF_UNCHECKED		=		0x0		/* Sets the check-mark attribute to the clear state.  */
CONST MF_UNHILITE		=		0x0		/* Removes highlighting from the menu item. */
CONST MF_USECHECKBITMAPS	=		0x00000200
CONST MFCOMMENT			=		15
CONST MFS_CHECKED		=		(MF_CHECKED)		/* Checks the menu item. For more information about selected menu items, see the hbmpChecked member. */
CONST MFS_DEFAULT		=		(MF_DEFAULT)		/* Specifies that the menu item is the default. A menu can contain only one default menu item, which is displayed in bold. */
CONST MFS_DISABLED		=		0x3		/* Disables the menu item and grays it so that it cannot be selected. This is equivalent to MFS_GRAYED. */
CONST MFS_ENABLED		=		(MF_ENABLED)		/* Enables the menu item so that it can be selected. This is the default state. */
CONST MFS_GRAYED		=		0x3		/* Disables the menu item and grays it so that it cannot be selected. This is equivalent to MFS_DISABLED. */
CONST MFS_HILITE		=		(MF_HILITE)		/* Highlights the menu item. */
CONST MFS_UNCHECKED		=		(MF_UNCHECKED)		/* Unchecks the menu item. For more information about clear menu items, see the hbmpChecked member. */
CONST MFS_UNHILITE		=		(MF_UNHILITE)		/* Removes the highlight from the menu item. This is the default state. */
CONST MFT_BITMAP		=		(MF_BITMAP)		/* Displays the menu item using a bitmap. The low-order word of the dwTypeData member is the bitmap handle, and the cch member is ignored.  Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: MFT_BITMAP is replaced by MIIM_BITMAP and hbmpItem. */
CONST MFT_MENUBARBREAK		=		(MF_MENUBARBREAK)		/* Places the menu item on a new line (for a menu bar) or in a new column (for a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu). For a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu, a vertical line separates the new column from the old. */
CONST MFT_MENUBREAK		=		(MF_MENUBREAK)		/* Places the menu item on a new line (for a menu bar) or in a new column (for a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu). For a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu, the columns are not separated by a vertical line. */
CONST MFT_OWNERDRAW		=		(MF_OWNERDRAW)		/* Assigns responsibility for drawing the menu item to the window that owns the menu. */
CONST MFT_RADIOCHECK		=		0x00000200		/* Displays selected menu items using a radio-button mark instead of a check mark if the hbmpChecked member is NULL. */
CONST MFT_RIGHTJUSTIFY		=		(MF_RIGHTJUSTIFY)		/* Right-justifies the menu item and any subsequent items. This value is valid only if the menu item is in a menu bar. */
CONST MFT_RIGHTORDER		=		0x00002000		/* Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Specifies that menus cascade right-to-left (the default is left-to-right). This is used to support right-to-left languages, such as Arabic and Hebrew. */
CONST MFT_SEPARATOR		=		(MF_SEPARATOR)		/* Specifies that the menu item is a separator. A menu item separator appears as a horizontal dividing line. The dwTypeData and cch members are ignored. This value is valid only in a drop-down menu, submenu, or shortcut menu. */
CONST MFT_STRING		=		(MF_STRING)		/* Displays the menu item using a text string. The dwTypeData member is the pointer to a null-terminated string, and the cch member is the length of the string.Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: MFT_STRING is replaced by MIIM_STRING. */
CONST MM_ANISOTROPIC		=		0x8
CONST MM_HIENGLISH		=		0x5
CONST MM_HIMETRIC		=		0x3
CONST MM_ISOTROPIC		=		0x7
CONST MM_LOENGLISH		=		0x4
CONST MM_LOMETRIC		=		0x2
CONST MM_MSFT_GENERIC_WAVEIN	=		23
CONST MM_TEXT			=		0x1
CONST MM_TWIPS			=		0x6
CONST MM_WIM_DATA		=		0x3C0
CONST MOD_ALT			=		0x1		/* Either ALT key was held down. */
CONST MOD_CONTROL		=		0x2		/* Either CTRL key was held down. */
CONST MOD_CREATED		=		0x1
CONST MOD_DELETED		=		0x2
CONST MOD_DENY_ACCESS		=		0x4
CONST MOD_FMSYNTH		=		0x4
CONST MOD_IGNORE_ALL_MODIFIER	=		0x400
CONST MOD_LEFT			=		0x8000
CONST MOD_MAPPER		=		0x5
CONST MOD_MIDIPORT		=		0x1
CONST MOD_ON_KEYUP		=		0x800
CONST MOD_RIGHT			=		0x4000
CONST MOD_SHIFT			=		0x4		/* Either SHIFT key was held down. */
CONST MOD_SQSYNTH		=		0x3
CONST MOD_SWSYNTH		=		0x7
CONST MOD_SYNTH			=		0x2
CONST MOD_UNMODIFIED		=		0x0
CONST MOD_WAVETABLE		=		0x6
CONST MOD_WIN			=		0x8		/* Either WINDOWS key was held down. These keys are labeled with the Microsoft® Windows® logo. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_ABSOLUTE	=		0x8000		/* Specifies that the dx and dy parameters contain normalized absolute coordinates. If not set, those parameters contain relative data: the change in position since the last reported position. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_LEFTDOWN	=		0x2		/* Specifies that the left button is down. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_LEFTUP	=		0x4		/* Specifies that the left button is up. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_MIDDLEDOWN	=		0x20		/* Specifies that the middle button is down. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_MIDDLEUP	=		0x40		/* Specifies that the middle button is up. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_MOVE		=		0x1		/* Specifies that movement occurred. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_RIGHTDOWN	=		0x8		/* Specifies that the right button is down. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_RIGHTUP	=		0x10		/* Specifies that the right button is up. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_VIRTUALDESK	=		0x4000
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_WHEEL		=		0x800		/* Windows NT/2000/XP: Specifies that the wheel has been moved, if the mouse has a wheel. The amount of movement is specified in dwData */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_XDOWN		=		0x80		/* Windows 2000/XP: Specifies that an X button was pressed. */
CONST MOUSEEVENTF_XUP		=		0x100		/* Windows 2000/XP: Specifies that an X button was released. */
CONST NIF_ICON			=		0x2		/* The hIcon member is valid. */
CONST NIF_MESSAGE		=		0x1		/* The uCallbackMessage member is valid. */
CONST NIF_TIP			=		0x4		/* The szTip member is valid. */
CONST NIF_INFO			=		0x10		/* Use a balloon ToolTip instead of a standard ToolTip. The szInfo, uTimeout, szInfoTitle, and dwInfoFlags members are valid. */
CONST NIF_STATE			=		0x8		/* The dwState and dwStateMask members are valid. */
CONST NIM_ADD			=		0		/* Adds an icon to the status area. The hWnd and uID members of the NOTIFYICONDATA structure pointed to by lpdata will be used to identify the icon in later calls to Shell_NotifyIcon. */
CONST NIM_DELETE		=		0x2		/* Deletes an icon from the status area. Use the hWnd and uID members of the NOTIFYICONDATA structure pointed to by lpdata to identify the icon to be deleted. */
CONST NIM_MODIFY		=		0x1		/* Modifies an icon in the status area. Use the hWnd and uID members of the NOTIFYICONDATA structure pointed to by lpdata to identify the icon to be modified. */
CONST NIM_SETFOCUS		=		0x3		/* Version 5.0. Returns focus to the taskbar notification area. Taskbar icons should use this message when they have completed their user interface operation.  */
CONST NIM_SETVERSION		=		0x4		/* Version 5.0. Instructs the taskbar to behave according to the version number specified in the uVersion member of the structure pointed to by lpdata. */
CONST NINF_KEY			=		0x1
CONST NIN_SELECT		=		(WM_USER+2)
CONST NIN_GETVERSION		=		(WM_USER+0)
CONST NIN_KEYSELECT		=		(NIN_SELECT|NINF_KEY)
CONST NM_FIRST			=		0
CONST NM_CHAR			=		(NM_FIRST-18)		/* The NM_CHAR notification message is sent by a control when a character key is processed. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_CLICK			=		(NM_FIRST-2)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the user has clicked the left mouse button within the control. NM_CLICK is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_CUSTOMDRAW		=		(NM_FIRST-12)		/* Sent by some common controls to notify their parent windows about drawing operations. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_DBLCLK			=		(NM_FIRST-3)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the user has double-clicked the left mouse button within the control. NM_DBLCLK is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_HOVER			=		(NM_FIRST-13)		/* Sent by a control when the mouse hovers over an item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_KEYDOWN		=		(NM_FIRST-15)		/* Sent by a control when the control has the keyboard focus and the user presses a key. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_KILLFOCUS		=		(NM_FIRST-8)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the control has lost the input focus. NM_KILLFOCUS is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_LDOWN			=		(NM_FIRST-20)		/* Notifies a toolbar's parent window that the left mouse button has been pressed. */
CONST NM_NCHITTEST		=		(NM_FIRST-14)		/* Sent by a control when the control receives a WM_NCHITTEST message. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_OUTOFMEMORY		=		(NM_FIRST-1)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the control could not complete an operation because there was not enough memory available. NM_OUTOFMEMORY is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_RCLICK			=		(NM_FIRST-5)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the user has clicked the right mouse button within the control. NM_RCLICK is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_RDBLCLK		=		(NM_FIRST-6)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the user has double-clicked the right mouse button within the control. NM_RDBLCLK is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_RDOWN			=		(NM_FIRST-21)
CONST NM_RELEASEDCAPTURE	=		(NM_FIRST-16)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the control is releasing mouse capture. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_RETURN			=		(NM_FIRST-4)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the control has the input focus and that the user has pressed the ENTER key. NM_RETURN is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_SETCURSOR		=		(NM_FIRST-17)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the control is setting the cursor in response to a NM_SETCURSOR message. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_SETFOCUS		=		(NM_FIRST-7)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the control has received the input focus. NM_SETFOCUS is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST NM_TOOLTIPSCREATED	=		(NM_FIRST-19)		/* Notifies a control's parent window that the control has created a ToolTip control. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message.  */
CONST NOMIRRORBITMAP		=		0x80000000
CONST NOTSRCCOPY		=		0x00330008
CONST NOTSRCERASE		=		0x001100A6
CONST NULL_BRUSH		=		0x5		/* Null brush (equivalent to HOLLOW_BRUSH). */
CONST NULL_PEN			=		0x8
CONST NUMBRUSHES		=		16		/* Returns the number of device-specific brushes. */
CONST NUMCOLORS			=		24		/* Returns the number of entries in the device's color table, if the device has a color depth of no more than 8 bits per pixel. For devices with greater color depths, –1 is returned. */
CONST NUMFONTS			=		22		/* Returns the number of device-specific fonts. */
CONST NUMMARKERS		=		20		/* Returns the number of device-specific markers. */
CONST NUMPENS			=		18		/* Returns the number of device-specific pens. */
CONST NUMRESERVED		=		106
CONST OBJ_BITMAP		=		0x7		/* Bitmap */
CONST OBJ_BRUSH			=		0x2		/* Brush */
CONST OBJ_COLORSPACE		=		14		/* Color space */
CONST OBJ_DC			=		0x3		/* Device context */
CONST OBJ_ENHMETADC		=		12		/* Enhanced metafile DC */
CONST OBJ_ENHMETAFILE		=		13		/* Enhanced metafile */
CONST OBJ_EXTPEN		=		11		/* Extended pen */
CONST OBJ_FONT			=		0x6		/* Font */
CONST OBJ_MEMDC			=		10		/* Memory DC */
CONST OBJ_METADC		=		0x4		/* Metafile DC */
CONST OBJ_METAFILE		=		0x9		/* Metafile */
CONST OBJ_PAL			=		0x5		/* Palette */
CONST OBJ_PEN			=		0x1		/* Pen */
CONST OBJ_REGION		=		0x8		/* Region */
CONST OBM_BTNCORNERS		=		32758
CONST OBM_BTSIZE		=		32761
CONST OBM_CHECK			=		32760
CONST OBM_CHECKBOXES		=		32759
CONST OBM_CLOSE			=		32754
CONST OBM_COMBO			=		32738
CONST OBM_DNARROW		=		32752
CONST OBM_DNARROWD		=		32742
CONST OBM_DNARROWI		=		32736
CONST OBM_LFARROW		=		32750
CONST OBM_LFARROWD		=		32740
CONST OBM_LFARROWI		=		32734
CONST OBM_MNARROW		=		32739
CONST OBM_OLD_CLOSE		=		32767
CONST OBM_OLD_DNARROW		=		32764
CONST OBM_OLD_LFARROW		=		32762
CONST OBM_OLD_REDUCE		=		32757
CONST OBM_OLD_RESTORE		=		32755
CONST OBM_OLD_RGARROW		=		32763
CONST OBM_OLD_UPARROW		=		32765
CONST OBM_OLD_ZOOM		=		32756
CONST OBM_REDUCE		=		32749
CONST OBM_REDUCED		=		32746
CONST OBM_RESTORE		=		32747
CONST OBM_RESTORED		=		32744
CONST OBM_RGARROW		=		32751
CONST OBM_RGARROWD		=		32741
CONST OBM_RGARROWI		=		32735
CONST OBM_SIZE			=		32766
CONST OBM_UPARROW		=		32753
CONST OBM_UPARROWD		=		32743
CONST OBM_UPARROWI		=		32737
CONST OBM_ZOOM			=		32748
CONST OBM_ZOOMD			=		32745
CONST OEM_CHARSET		=		255
CONST OEM_FIXED_FONT		=		10		/* Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) dependent fixed-pitch (monospace) font. */
CONST OIC_BANG			=		32515
CONST OIC_HAND			=		32513
CONST OIC_ERROR			=		(OIC_HAND)
CONST OIC_NOTE			=		32516
CONST OIC_INFORMATION		=		(OIC_NOTE)
CONST OIC_QUES			=		32514
CONST OIC_SAMPLE		=		32512
CONST OIC_WARNING		=		(OIC_BANG)
CONST OIC_WINLOGO		=		32517
CONST OPEN_ALWAYS		=		0x4
CONST OPEN_EXISTING		=		0x3
CONST PAGE_READWRITE		=		0x4
CONST PATCOPY			=		0x00F00021
CONST PATINVERT			=		0x005A0049
CONST PATPAINT			=		0x00FB0A09
CONST PBM_DELTAPOS		=		(WM_USER+3)		/* Advances the current position of a progress bar by a specified increment and redraws the bar to reflect the new position. */
CONST PBM_GETPOS		=		(WM_USER+8)		/* Retrieves the current position of the progress bar. */
CONST PBM_GETRANGE		=		(WM_USER+7)		/* Retrieves information about the current high and low limits of a given progress bar control. */
CONST PBM_SETBARCOLOR		=		(WM_USER+9)		/* Sets the color of the progress indicator bar in the progress bar control.  */
CONST PBM_SETBKCOLOR		=		(CCM_SETBKCOLOR)		/* Sets the background color in the progress bar. */
CONST PBM_SETMARQUEE		=		(WM_USER+10)		/* Sets the progress bar to marquee mode. This causes the progress bar to move like a marquee. */
CONST PBM_SETPOS		=		(WM_USER+2)		/* Sets the current position for a progress bar and redraws the bar to reflect the new position. */
CONST PBM_SETRANGE		=		(WM_USER+1)		/* Sets the minimum and maximum values for a progress bar and redraws the bar to reflect the new range. */
CONST PBM_SETRANGE32		=		(WM_USER+6)		/* Sets the range of a progress bar control to a 32-bit value. */
CONST PBM_SETSTEP		=		(WM_USER+4)		/* Specifies the step increment for a progress bar. The step increment is the amount by which the progress bar increases its current position whenever it receives a PBM_STEPIT message. By default, the step increment is set to 10. */
CONST PBM_STEPIT		=		(WM_USER+5)		/* Advances the current position for a progress bar by the step increment and redraws the bar to reflect the new position. An application sets the step increment by sending the PBM_SETSTEP message. */
CONST PBS_MARQUEE		=		0x08		/* Version 6.0 or later. The progress bar moves like a marquee. */
CONST PBS_SMOOTH		=		0x01		/* Version 4.70 or later. The progress bar displays progress status in a smooth scrolling bar instead of the default segmented bar. */
CONST PBS_VERTICAL		=		0x04		/* Version 4.70 or later. The progress bar displays progress status vertically, from bottom to top. */
CONST PC_INTERIORS		=		128		/* Device can draw interiors */
CONST PC_NONE			=		0		/* Device does not support polygons */
CONST PC_PATHS			=		512
CONST PC_POLYGON		=		0x1		/* Device can draw alternate-fill polygons */
CONST PC_POLYPOLYGON		=		256		/*  */
CONST PC_RECTANGLE		=		0x2		/* Device can draw rectangles */
CONST PC_SCANLINE		=		0x8		/* Device can draw a single scanline */
CONST PC_STYLED			=		32		/* Device can draw styled borders */
CONST PC_TRAPEZOID		=		0x4
CONST PC_WIDE			=		16		/* Device can draw wide borders */
CONST PC_WIDESTYLED		=		64		/* Device can draw borders that are wide and styled */
CONST PC_WINDPOLYGON		=		0x4		/* Device can draw winding-fill polygons */
CONST PDEVICESIZE		=		26		/* Reserved. */
CONST PGM_FIRST 		=		0x1400
CONST PGM_FORWARDMOUSE 		=		(PGM_FIRST+3)		/* Enables or disables mouse forwarding for the pager control. When mouse forwarding is enabled, the pager control forwards WM_MOUSEMOVE messages to the contained window. */
CONST PGM_GETBKCOLOR 		=		(PGM_FIRST+5)		/* Retrieves the current background color for the pager control. */
CONST PGM_GETBORDER 		=		(PGM_FIRST+7)		/* Retrieves the current border size for the pager control. */
CONST PGM_GETBUTTONSIZE 	=		(PGM_FIRST+11)		/* Retrieves the current button size for the pager control. */
CONST PGM_GETBUTTONSTATE 	=		(PGM_FIRST+12)		/* Retrieves the state of the specified button in a pager control. */
CONST PGM_GETDROPTARGET 	=		(CCM_GETDROPTARGET)		/* Retrieves a pager control's IDropTarget interface pointer. */
CONST PGM_GETPOS 		=		(PGM_FIRST+9)		/* Retrieves the current scroll position of the pager control. */
CONST PGM_RECALCSIZE 		=		(PGM_FIRST+2)		/* Forces the pager control to recalculate the size of the contained window. Sending this message will result in a PGN_CALCSIZE notification being sent. */
CONST PGM_SETBKCOLOR 		=		(PGM_FIRST+4)		/* Sets the current background color for the pager control. */
CONST PGM_SETBORDER 		=		(PGM_FIRST+6)		/* Sets the current border size for the pager control. */
CONST PGM_SETBUTTONSIZE 	=		(PGM_FIRST+10)		/* Sets the current button size for the pager control. */
CONST PGM_SETCHILD 		=		(PGM_FIRST+1)		/* Sets the contained window for the pager control. This message will not change the parent of the contained window; it only assigns a window handle to the pager control for scrolling. In most cases, the contained window will be a child window. */
CONST PGM_SETPOS 		=		(PGM_FIRST+8)		/* Sets the current scroll position for the pager control. */
CONST PGN_FIRST 		=		-900
CONST PGN_CALCSIZE 		=		(PGN_FIRST-2)		/* Notification sent by a pager control to obtain the scrollable dimensions of the contained window. These dimensions are used by the pager control to determine the scrollable size of the contained window. */
CONST PGN_HOTITEMCHANGE 	=		(PGN_FIRST-3)		/* Sent by a pager control when the hot (highlighted) item changes. */
CONST PGN_LAST 			=		-950
CONST PGN_SCROLL 		=		(PGN_FIRST-1)		/* Notification sent by a pager control prior to the contained window being scrolled. */
CONST PGS_AUTOSCROLL 		=		0x2		/* The pager control will scroll when the user hovers the mouse over one of the scroll buttons. */
CONST PGS_DRAGNDROP 		=		0x4		/* The contained window can be a drag-and-drop target. The pager control will automatically scroll if an item is dragged from outside the pager over one of the scroll buttons. */
CONST PGS_HORZ 			=		0x1		/* Creates a pager control that can be scrolled horizontally. This style and the PGS_VERT style are mutually exclusive and cannot be combined. */
CONST PGS_VERT 			=		0x0		/* Creates a pager control that can be scrolled vertically. This is the default direction if no direction style is specified. This style and the PGS_HORZ style are mutually exclusive and cannot be combined. */
CONST PHYSICALHEIGHT		=		111		/* For printing devices, returns the height of the physical page, in device units. For example, a printer set to print at 600 dpi on 8.5"x11" paper has a physical height value of 6600 device units. */
CONST PHYSICALOFFSETX		=		112		/* For printing devices, returns the distance from the left edge of the physical page to the left edge of the printable area, in device units. */
CONST PHYSICALOFFSETY		=		113		/* For printing devices, returns the distance from the top edge of the physical page to the top edge of the printable area, in device units. */
CONST PHYSICALWIDTH		=		110		/* For printing devices, returns the width of the physical page, in device units. For example, a printer set to print at 600 dpi on 8.5"x11" paper has a physical width value of 5100 device units. */
CONST PLANES			=		14		/* Returns the number of color planes. */
CONST POLYGONALCAPS		=		32
CONST PROCESS_QUERY_INFORMATION	=		0x400
CONST PROCESS_VM_OPERATION	=		0x8
CONST PROCESS_VM_READ		=		0x10
CONST PROCESS_VM_WRITE		=		0x20
CONST PSM_ADDPAGE 		=		(WM_USER+103)		/* Adds a new page to the end of an existing property sheet. You can send this message explicitly or by using the PropSheet_AddPage macro. */
CONST PSM_APPLY 		=		(WM_USER+110)		/* Simulates the selection of the Apply button, indicating that one or more pages have changed and the changes need to be validated and recorded. */
CONST PSM_CANCELTOCLOSE 	=		(WM_USER+107)		/* Sent by an application when it has performed changes since the most recent PSN_APPLY notification that cannot be canceled. */
CONST PSM_CHANGED 		=		(WM_USER+104)		/* Informs a property sheet that information in a page has changed. */
CONST PSM_GETCURRENTPAGEHWND 	=		(WM_USER+118)		/* Retrieves a handle to the window of the current page of a property sheet. */
CONST PSM_GETRESULT 		=		(WM_USER+135)		/* Used by modeless property sheets to retrieve the information returned to modal property sheets by PropertySheet. */
CONST PSM_GETTABCONTROL 	=		(WM_USER+116)		/* Retrieves the handle to the tab control of a property sheet. */
CONST PSM_HWNDTOINDEX 		=		(WM_USER+129)		/* Takes the window handle of the property sheet page and returns its zero-based index. */
CONST PSM_IDTOINDEX 		=		(WM_USER+133)		/* Takes the resource identifier (ID) of a property sheet page and returns its zero-based index. */
CONST PSM_INDEXTOHWND 		=		(WM_USER+130)		/* Takes the index of a property sheet page and returns its window handle. */
CONST PSM_INDEXTOID 		=		(WM_USER+134)		/* Takes the index of a property sheet page and returns its resource identifier (ID). */
CONST PSM_INDEXTOPAGE 		=		(WM_USER+132)		/* Takes the index of a property sheet page and returns its HPROPSHEETPAGE handle. */
CONST PSM_INSERTPAGE 		=		(WM_USER+119)		/* Inserts a new page into an existing property sheet. The page can be inserted either at a specified index or after a specified page. */
CONST PSM_ISDIALOGMESSAGE 	=		(WM_USER+117)		/* Passes a message to a property sheet dialog box and indicates whether the dialog box processed the message. */
CONST PSM_PAGETOINDEX 		=		(WM_USER+131)		/* Takes the HPROPSHEETPAGE handle of the property sheet page and returns its zero-based index. */
CONST PSM_PRESSBUTTON 		=		(WM_USER+113)		/* Simulates the selection of a property sheet button. */
CONST PSM_QUERYSIBLINGS 	=		(WM_USER+108)		/* Sent to a property sheet, which then forwards the message to each of its pages. */
CONST PSM_REBOOTSYSTEM 		=		(WM_USER+106)		/* Indicates the system needs to be restarted for the changes to take effect. */
CONST PSM_RECALCPAGESIZES 	=		(WM_USER+136)		/* Recalculates the page size of a standard or wizard property sheet after pages have been added or removed. */
CONST PSM_REMOVEPAGE 		=		(WM_USER+102)		/* Removes a page from a property sheet. */
CONST PSM_RESTARTWINDOWS 	=		(WM_USER+105)		/* Indicates that Windows needs to be restarted for the changes to take effect. */
CONST PSM_SETCURSEL 		=		(WM_USER+101)		/* Activates the specified page in a property sheet. */
CONST PSM_SETCURSELID 		=		(WM_USER+114)		/* Activates the given page in a property sheet based on the resource identifier of the page. */
CONST PSM_SETFINISHTEXT 	=		(WM_USER+115)		/* Sets the text of the Finish button in a wizard, shows and enables the button, and hides the Next and Back buttons. */
CONST PSM_SETHEADERSUBTITLE 	=		(WM_USER+127)		/* Sets the subtitle text for the header of a wizard's interior page. */
CONST PSM_SETHEADERTITLE 	=		(WM_USER+125)		/* Sets the title text for the header of a wizard's interior page. */
CONST PSM_SETTITLE 		=		(WM_USER+111)		/* Sets the title of a property sheet. */
CONST PSM_SETWIZBUTTONS 	=		(WM_USER+112)		/* Enables or disables the Back, Next, and Finish buttons in a wizard. */
CONST PSM_UNCHANGED 		=		(WM_USER+109)		/* Informs a property sheet that information in a page has reverted to the previously saved state. */
CONST PSN_FIRST 		=		-200
CONST PSN_APPLY 		=		(PSN_FIRST-2)		/* Sent to every page in the property sheet to indicate that the user has clicked the OK, Close, or Apply button and wants all changes to take effect. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_GETOBJECT 		=		(PSN_FIRST-10)		/* Sent by a property sheet to request a drop target object when the cursor passes over one of the tab control's buttons. */
CONST PSN_HELP 			=		(PSN_FIRST-5)		/* Notifies a page that the user has clicked the Help button. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_KILLACTIVE 		=		(PSN_FIRST-1)		/* Notifies a page that it is about to lose activation either because another page is being activated or the user has clicked the OK button. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_LAST 			=		-299
CONST PSN_QUERYCANCEL 		=		(PSN_FIRST-9)		/* Indicates that the user has canceled the property sheet. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_QUERYINITIALFOCUS 	=		(PSN_FIRST-13)		/* Sent by a property sheet to provide a property sheet page an opportunity to specify which dialog box control should receive the initial focus. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_RESET 		=		(PSN_FIRST-3)		/* Notifies a page that the property sheet is about to be destroyed. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_SETACTIVE 		=		(PSN_FIRST-0)		/* Notifies a page that it is about to be activated. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_TRANSLATEACCELERATOR	=		(PSN_FIRST-12)		/* Notifies a property sheet that a keyboard message has been received. It provides the page an opportunity to do private keyboard accelerator translation. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_WIZBACK 		=		(PSN_FIRST-6)		/* Notifies a page that the user has clicked the Back button in a wizard. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST PSN_WIZFINISH 		=		(PSN_FIRST-8)		/* Notifies a page that the user has clicked the Finish button in a wizard. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message.  */
CONST PSN_WIZNEXT 		=		(PSN_FIRST-7)		/* Notifies a page that the user has clicked the Next button in a wizard. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST RASTER_FONTTYPE		=		0x001
CONST RASTERCAPS		=		38		/* Returns the value that indicates the raster capabilities of the device */
CONST RC_BANDING		=		0x2		/* (Requires banding support) */
CONST RC_BIGFONT		=		0x0400
CONST RC_BITBLT			=		0x1		/* Capable of transferring bitmaps */
CONST RC_BITMAP64		=		0x8		/* Capable of supporting bitmaps larger than 64K */
CONST RC_DEVBITS		=		0x8000
CONST RC_DI_BITMAP		=		0x0080		/* Capable of supporting the SetDIBits and GetDIBits functions */
CONST RC_DIBTODEV		=		0x0200		/* Capable of supporting the SetDIBitsToDevice function */
CONST RC_FLOODFILL		=		0x1000		/* Capable of performing flood fills */
CONST RC_GDI20_OUTPUT		=		0x0010		/* Capable of supporting features of 16-bit Windows 2.0 */
CONST RC_GDI20_STATE		=		0x0020
CONST RC_OP_DX_OUTPUT		=		0x4000
CONST RC_PALETTE		=		0x0100		/* Specifies a palette-based device */
CONST RC_SAVEBITMAP		=		0x0040
CONST RC_SCALING		=		0x4		/* Capable of scaling */
CONST RC_STRETCHBLT		=		0x0800		/* Capable of performing the StretchBlt function */
CONST RC_STRETCHDIB		=		0x2000		/* Capable of performing the StretchDIBits function */
CONST RDW_ALLCHILDREN		=		0x0080
CONST RDW_ERASE			=		0x0004
CONST RDW_ERASENOW		=		0x0200
CONST RDW_FRAME			=		0x0400
CONST RDW_INTERNALPAINT		=		0x0002
CONST RDW_INVALIDATE		=		0x0001
CONST RDW_NOCHILDREN		=		0x0040
CONST RDW_NOERASE		=		0x0020
CONST RDW_NOFRAME		=		0x0800
CONST RDW_NOINTERNALPAINT	=		0x0010
CONST RDW_UPDATENOW		=		0x0100
CONST RDW_VALIDATE		=		0x0008
CONST REG_BINARY		=		0x3
CONST REG_DWORD			=		0x4
CONST REG_DWORD_BIG_ENDIAN	=		0x5
CONST REG_DWORD_LITTLE_ENDIAN	=		0x4
CONST REG_EXPAND_SZ		=		0x2
CONST REG_FULL_RESOURCE_DESCRIPTOR	=	0x9
CONST REG_LINK			=		0x6
CONST REG_MULTI_SZ		=		0x7
CONST REG_NONE			=		0
CONST REG_QWORD			=		11
CONST REG_QWORD_LITTLE_ENDIAN	=		11
CONST REG_RESOURCE_LIST		=		0x8
CONST REG_RESOURCE_REQUIREMENTS_LIST	=	10
CONST REG_SZ			=		0x1
CONST REGDB_E_CLASSNOTREG	=		0x80040154
CONST RFCCM_NEEDELEMENT		=		0x3
CONST RFCCM_VIEWLOCAL		=		0x1
CONST RFCCM_VIEWNETWORK		=		0x2
CONST RGN_AND			=		0x1		/* The intersecting parts of two original regions define a new region. */
CONST RGN_COPY			=		0x5		/* A copy of the first (of the two original regions) defines a new region. */
CONST RGN_DIFF			=		0x4		/* The part of the first region that does not intersect the second defines a new region. */
CONST RGN_MAX			=		(RGN_COPY)
CONST RGN_MIN			=		(RGN_AND)
CONST RGN_OR			=		0x2		/* The two original regions define a new region. */
CONST RGN_XOR			=		0x3		/* Those parts of the two original regions that do not overlap define a new region. */
CONST RUSSIAN_CHARSET		=		204
CONST S_OK			=		0
CONST SB_BOTH			=		0x3		/* Shows or hides the horizontal and vertical scroll bars. */
CONST SB_BOTTOM			=		0x7		/* Scroll to lower right. */
CONST SB_CTL			=		0x2
CONST SB_ENDSCROLL		=		0x8		/* End scroll. */
CONST SB_GETBORDERS		=		(WM_USER+7)		/* Retrieves the current widths of the horizontal and vertical borders of a status window. */
CONST SB_GETICON		=		(WM_USER+20)		/* Retrieves the icon for a part in a status bar.  */
CONST SB_GETPARTS		=		(WM_USER+6)		/* Retrieves a count of the parts in a status window. The message also retrieves the coordinate of the right edge of the specified number of parts.  */
CONST SB_GETRECT		=		(WM_USER+10)		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle of a part in a status window. */
CONST SB_GETTEXT		=		(WM_USER+2)		/* The SB_GETTEXT message retrieves the text from the specified part of a status window. */
CONST SB_GETTEXTLENGTH		=		(WM_USER+3)		/* The SB_GETTEXTLENGTH message retrieves the length, in characters, of the text from the specified part of a status window. */
CONST SB_GETTIPTEXT		=		(WM_USER+18)		/* Retrieves the ToolTip text for a part in a status bar. The status bar must be created with the SBT_TOOLTIPS style to enable ToolTips. */
CONST SB_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST SB_HORZ			=		0		/* Shows or hides the horizontal scroll bar. */
CONST SB_ISSIMPLE		=		(WM_USER+14)		/* Checks a status bar control to determine if it is in simple mode. */
CONST SB_LEFT			=		0x6		/* Scroll to upper left. */
CONST SB_LINEDOWN		=		0x1		/* Scroll one line down. */
CONST SB_LINELEFT		=		0		/* Scrolls left by one unit. */
CONST SB_LINERIGHT		=		0x1		/* Scrolls right by one unit. */
CONST SB_LINEUP			=		0		/* Scroll one line up. */
CONST SB_PAGEDOWN		=		0x3		/* Scroll one page down. */
CONST SB_PAGELEFT		=		0x2		/* Scrolls left by the width of the window. */
CONST SB_PAGERIGHT		=		0x3		/* Scrolls right by the width of the window. */
CONST SB_PAGEUP			=		0x2		/* Scroll one page up. */
CONST SB_RIGHT			=		0x7		/* Scroll to lower right. */
CONST SB_SETBKCOLOR		=		(CCM_SETBKCOLOR)		/* Sets the background color in a status bar. */
CONST SB_SETICON		=		(WM_USER+15)		/* Sets the icon for a part in a status bar. */
CONST SB_SETMINHEIGHT		=		(WM_USER+8)		/* Sets the minimum height of a status window's drawing area. */
CONST SB_SETPARTS		=		(WM_USER+4)		/* Sets the number of parts in a status window and the coordinate of the right edge of each part. */
CONST SB_SETTEXT		=		(WM_USER+1)		/* The SB_SETTEXT message sets the text in the specified part of a status window. */
CONST SB_SETTIPTEXT		=		(WM_USER+16)		/* Sets the ToolTip text for a part in a status bar. The status bar must have been created with the SBT_TOOLTIPS style to enable ToolTips. */
CONST SB_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST SB_SIMPLE			=		(WM_USER+9)		/* Specifies whether a status window displays simple text or displays all window parts set by a previous SB_SETPARTS message. */
CONST SB_SIMPLEID		=		0xFF
CONST SB_THUMBPOSITION		=		0x4		/* Scroll to absolute position. The current position is specified by the high-order word. */
CONST SB_THUMBTRACK		=		0x5
CONST SB_TOP			=		0x6		/* Scroll to upper left. */
CONST SB_VERT			=		0x1		/* Shows or hides the vertical scroll bar. */
CONST SBARS_SIZEGRIP		=		0x100
CONST SBARS_TOOLTIPS		=		0x800
CONST SBM_ENABLE_ARROWS		=		0xE4		/* An application sends the SBM_ENABLE_ARROWS message to enable or disable one or both arrows of a scroll bar control. */
CONST SBM_GETPOS		=		0xE1		/* The SBM_GETPOS message is sent to retrieve the current position of the scroll box of a scroll bar control. The current position is a relative value that depends on the current scrolling range. */
CONST SBM_GETRANGE		=		0xE3		/* The SBM_GETRANGE message is sent to retrieve the minimum and maximum position values for the scroll bar control. */
CONST SBM_GETSCROLLBARINFO	=		0xEB		/* An application sends the SBM_GETSCROLLBARINFO message to retrieve information about the specified scroll bar. */
CONST SBM_GETSCROLLINFO		=		0xEA		/* The SBM_GETSCROLLINFO message is sent to retrieve the parameters of a scroll bar. */
CONST SBM_SETPOS		=		0xE0		/* The SBM_SETPOS message is sent to set the position of the scroll box (thumb) and, if requested, redraw the scroll bar to reflect the new position of the scroll box. */
CONST SBM_SETRANGE		=		0xE2		/* The SBM_SETRANGE message is sent to set the minimum and maximum position values for the scroll bar control. */
CONST SBM_SETRANGEREDRAW	=		0xE6		/* An application sends the SBM_SETRANGEREDRAW message to a scroll bar control to set the minimum and maximum position values and to redraw the control. */
CONST SBM_SETSCROLLINFO		=		0xE9		/* The SBM_SETSCROLLINFO message is sent to set the parameters of a scroll bar. */
CONST SBS_BOTTOMALIGN		=		0x4		/* Aligns the bottom edge of the scroll bar with the bottom edge of the rectangle defined by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx function.  */
CONST SBS_HORZ			=		0x0		/* Designates a horizontal scroll bar. If neither the SBS_BOTTOMALIGN nor SBS_TOPALIGN style is specified, the scroll bar has the height, width, and position specified by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx */
CONST SBS_LEFTALIGN		=		0x2		/* Aligns the left edge of the scroll bar with the left edge of the rectangle defined by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx. The scroll bar has the default width for system scroll bars. Use this style with the SBS_VERT style. */
CONST SBS_RIGHTALIGN		=		0x4		/* Aligns the right edge of the scroll bar with the right edge of the rectangle defined by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx. The scroll bar has the default width for system scroll bars. Use this style with the SBS_VERT style. */
CONST SBS_SIZEBOX		=		0x8		/* Designates a size box. If you specify neither the SBS_SIZEBOXBOTTOMRIGHTALIGN nor the SBS_SIZEBOXTOPLEFTALIGN style, the size box has the height, width, and position specified by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx. */
CONST SBS_SIZEBOXBOTTOMRIGHTALIGN =		0x4		/* Aligns the lower right corner of the size box with the lower right corner of the rectangle specified by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx. The size box has the default size for system size boxes. */
CONST SBS_SIZEBOXTOPLEFTALIGN	=		0x2		/* Aligns the upper left corner of the size box with the upper left corner of the rectangle specified by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx. The size box has the default size for system size boxes. */
CONST SBS_SIZEGRIP		=		0x10		/* Same as SBS_SIZEBOX, but with a raised edge. */
CONST SBS_TOPALIGN		=		0x2		/* Aligns the top edge of the scroll bar with the top edge of the rectangle defined by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx. The scroll bar has the default height for system scroll bars. Use this style with the SBS_HORZ style. */
CONST SBS_VERT			=		0x1		/* Designates a vertical scroll bar. If you specify neither the SBS_RIGHTALIGN nor the SBS_LEFTALIGN style, the scroll bar has the height, width, and position specified by the x, y, nWidth, and nHeight parameters of CreateWindowEx. */
CONST SBT_NOBORDERS		=		0x100		/* The text is drawn without borders. */
CONST SBT_NOTABPARSING		=		0x800
CONST SBT_OWNERDRAW		=		0x1000		/* The text is drawn by the parent window. */
CONST SBT_POPOUT		=		0x200		/* The text is drawn with a border to appear higher than the plane of the window. */
CONST SBT_RTLREADING		=		0x400		/* The text will be displayed in the opposite direction to the text in the parent window. */
CONST SBT_TOOLTIPS		=		0x800
CONST SC_ARRANGE		=		0xF110
CONST SC_CLOSE			=		0xF060		/* Closes the window. */
CONST SC_CONTEXTHELP		=		0xF180		/* Changes the cursor to a question mark with a pointer. If the user then clicks a control in the dialog box, the control receives a WM_HELP message. */
CONST SC_DEFAULT		=		0xF160		/* Selects the default item; the user double-clicked the window menu. */
CONST SC_EOL_CR			=		0x1
CONST SC_EOL_CRLF		=		0
CONST SC_EOL_LF			=		0x2
CONST SC_HOTKEY			=		0xF150		/* Activates the window associated with the application-specified hot key. The lParam parameter identifies the window to activate. */
CONST SC_HSCROLL		=		0xF080		/* Scrolls horizontally. */
CONST SC_KEYMENU		=		0xF100		/* Retrieves the window menu as a result of a keystroke. For more information, see the Remarks section. */
CONST SC_MARGIN_NUMBER		=		0x1
CONST SC_MARGIN_SYMBOL		=		0
CONST SC_MARK_ARROW		=		0x2
CONST SC_MARK_BACKGROUND	=		22
CONST SC_MARK_CIRCLE		=		0
CONST SC_MARK_ROUNDRECT		=		0x1
CONST SC_MARK_SMALLRECT		=		0x3
CONST SC_MAXIMIZE		=		0xF030		/* Maximizes the window. */
CONST SC_MINIMIZE		=		0xF020		/* Minimizes the window. */
CONST SC_MONITORPOWER		=		0xF170		/* Sets the state of the display. This command supports devices that have power-saving features, such as a battery-powered personal computer. */
CONST SC_MOUSEMENU		=		0xF090		/* Retrieves the window menu as a result of a mouse click. */
CONST SC_MOVE			=		0xF010		/* Moves the window. */
CONST SC_NEXTWINDOW		=		0xF040		/* Moves to the next window. */
CONST SC_PREVWINDOW		=		0xF050		/* Moves to the previous window. */
CONST SC_PRINT_COLOURONWHITEDEFAULTBG	=	4
CONST SC_RESTORE		=		0xF120		/* Restores the window to its normal position and size. */
CONST SC_SCREENSAVE		=		0xF140		/* Executes the screen saver application specified in the [boot] section of the System.ini file. */
CONST SC_SEPARATOR		=		0xF00F
CONST SC_SIZE			=		0xF000		/* Sizes the window. */
CONST SC_TASKLIST		=		0xF130		/* Activates the Start menu. */
CONST SC_VSCROLL		=		0xF070		/* Scrolls vertically. */
CONST SCALINGFACTORX		=		114
CONST SCALINGFACTORY		=		115
CONST SCE_B_COMMENT		=		1
CONST SCE_B_DATE		=		8
CONST SCE_B_DEFAULT		=		0
CONST SCE_B_IDENTIFIER		=		7
CONST SCE_B_KEYWORD		=		3
CONST SCE_B_NUMBER		=		2
CONST SCE_B_OPERATOR		=		6
CONST SCE_B_PREPROCESSOR	=		5
CONST SCE_B_STRING		=		4
CONST SCFIND_MATCHCASE		=		4
CONST SCFIND_WHOLEWORD		=		2
CONST SCFIND_WORDSTART		=		0x100000
CONST SCI_ADDTEXT		=		2001
CONST SCI_AUTOCCANCEL		=		2101
CONST SCI_AUTOCSETAUTOHIDE	=		2118
CONST SCI_AUTOCSETIGNORECASE	=		2115
CONST SCI_AUTOCSHOW		=		2100
CONST SCI_CALLTIPACTIVE		=		2202
CONST SCI_CALLTIPCANCEL		=		2201
CONST SCI_CALLTIPPOSSTART	=		2203
CONST SCI_CALLTIPSETHLT		=		2204
CONST SCI_CALLTIPSHOW		=		2200
CONST SCI_CANPASTE		=		2173
CONST SCI_CANUNDO		=		2174
CONST SCI_CLEAR			=		2180
CONST SCI_CLEARALL		=		2004
CONST SCI_CONVERTEOLS		=		2029
CONST SCI_COPY			=		2178
CONST SCI_CUT			=		2177
CONST SCI_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER	=		2175
CONST SCI_FORMATRANGE		=		2151
CONST SCI_GETCOLUMN		=		2129
CONST SCI_GETCURRENTPOS		=		2008
CONST SCI_GETEOLMODE		=		2030
CONST SCI_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE	=		2152
CONST SCI_GETINDENTATIONGUIDES	=		2133
CONST SCI_GETLENGTH		=		2006
CONST SCI_GETLINE		=		2153
CONST SCI_GETLINECOUNT		=		2154
CONST SCI_GETLINEENDPOSITION	=		2136
CONST SCI_GETLINEINDENTATION	=		2127
CONST SCI_GETMODIFY		=		2159
CONST SCI_GETSCROLLWIDTH	=		2275
CONST SCI_GETSELECTIONEND	=		2145
CONST SCI_GETSELECTIONSTART	=		2143
CONST SCI_GETSELTEXT		=		2161
CONST SCI_GETTARGETEND		=		2193
CONST SCI_GETTARGETSTART	=		2191
CONST SCI_GETTEXT		=		2182
CONST SCI_GOTOLINE		=		2024
CONST SCI_GOTOPOS		=		2025
CONST SCI_GRABFOCUS		=		2400
CONST SCI_INSERTTEXT		=		2003
CONST SCI_LINEFROMPOSITION	=		2166
CONST SCI_LINELENGTH		=		2350
CONST SCI_LINESCROLL		=		2168
CONST SCI_MARKERADD		=		2043
CONST SCI_MARKERDEFINE		=		2040
CONST SCI_MARKERDELETE		=		2044
CONST SCI_MARKERDELETEALL	=		2045
CONST SCI_MARKERGET		=		2046
CONST SCI_MARKERNEXT		=		2047
CONST SCI_MARKERPREVIOUS	=		2048
CONST SCI_MARKERSETBACK		=		2042
CONST SCI_MARKERSETFORE		=		2041
CONST SCI_NULL			=		2172
CONST SCI_PASTE			=		2179
CONST SCI_POINTXFROMPOSITION	=		2164
CONST SCI_POSITIONFROMLINE	=		2167
CONST SCI_REPLACESEL		=		2170
CONST SCI_REPLACETARGET		=		2194
CONST SCI_REPLACETARGETRE	=		2195
CONST SCI_SCROLLCARET		=		2169
CONST SCI_SEARCHINTARGET	=		2197
CONST SCI_SETANCHOR		=		2026
CONST SCI_SETBACKSPACEUNINDENTS	=		2262
CONST SCI_SETCARETLINEBACK	=		2098
CONST SCI_SETCARETLINEVISIBLE	=		2096
CONST SCI_SETCURRENTPOS		=		2141
CONST SCI_SETEOLMODE		=		2031
CONST SCI_SETINDENTATIONGUIDES	=		2132
CONST SCI_SETKEYWORDS		=		4005
CONST SCI_SETLEXER		=		4001
CONST SCI_SETMARGINWIDTHN	=		2242
CONST SCI_SETPRINTCOLOURMODE	=		2148
CONST SCI_SETREADONLY		=		2171
CONST SCI_SETSAVEPOINT		=		2014
CONST SCI_SETSCROLLWIDTH	=		2274
CONST SCI_SETSEARCHFLAGS	=		2198
CONST SCI_SETSEL		=		2160
CONST SCI_SETSELBACK		=		2068
CONST SCI_SETSELECTIONEND	=		2144
CONST SCI_SETSELECTIONSTART	=		2142
CONST SCI_SETSELFORE		=		2067
CONST SCI_SETSTYLEBITS		=		2090
CONST SCI_SETTABWIDTH		=		2036
CONST SCI_SETTARGETEND		=		2192
CONST SCI_SETTARGETSTART	=		2190
CONST SCI_SETWORDCHARS		=		2077
CONST SCI_STYLECLEARALL		=		2050
CONST SCI_STYLESETBACK		=		2052
CONST SCI_STYLESETBOLD		=		2053
CONST SCI_STYLESETFONT		=		2056
CONST SCI_STYLESETFORE		=		2051
CONST SCI_STYLESETITALIC	=		2054
CONST SCI_STYLESETSIZE		=		2055
CONST SCI_TEXTWIDTH		=		2276
CONST SCI_UNDO			=		2176
CONST SCI_WORDSTARTPOSITION	=		2266
CONST SCLEX_VB			=		8
CONST SCN_CHARADDED		=		2001
CONST SCN_DOUBLECLICK		=		2006
CONST SCR_H			=		600
CONST SCR_W			=		800
CONST SEC_IMAGE			=		0x1000000
CONST SES_XLTCRCRLFTOCR		=		16384
CONST SF_NCRFORNONASCII		=		0x40
CONST SF_RTF			=		0x0002
CONST SF_RTFNOOBJS		=		0x0003
CONST SF_RTFVAL			=		0x0700
CONST SF_TEXT			=		0x0001
CONST SF_TEXTIZED		=		0x0004
CONST SF_UNICODE		=		0x0010
CONST SF_USECODEPAGE		=		0x0020
CONST SFF_KEEPDOCINFO		=		0x1000
CONST SFF_PERSISTVIEWSCALE	=		0x2000
CONST SFF_PLAINRTF		=		0x4000
CONST SFF_PWD			=		0x0800
CONST SFF_SELECTION		=		0x8000
CONST SFF_WRITEXTRAPAR		=		0x80
CONST SFVM_ADDOBJECT		=		0x3		/* Adds an object to the shell view. Used by SHShellFolderView_Message. */
CONST SFVM_CUTOBJECTS		=		0x10
CONST SFVM_GETARRANGECOLUMN	=		0x2		/* This message indicates that the user has clicked a column in the header of the list control. The list needs to be rearranged. */
CONST SFVM_GETAUTOARRANGE	=		0x13
CONST SFVM_GETDRAGPOINT		=		0xC
CONST SFVM_GETDROPPOINT		=		0xD
CONST SFVM_GETITEMCOUNT		=		0x4		/* Used to retrieve the number of items in the list. */
CONST SFVM_GETITEMPIDL		=		0x5
CONST SFVM_GETITEMSPACING	=		0x15
CONST SFVM_GETSELECTEDCOUNT	=		0x14		/* This message can be used to learn how many items are selected in the list. */
CONST SFVM_GETSELECTEDOBJECTS	=		0x9		/* Use this message to retrieve an array of pidls for all selected objects. */
CONST SFVM_ISDROPONBACKGROUND	=		0xF
CONST SFVM_ISDROPONSOURCE	=		0xA
CONST SFVM_LINEUPICONS		=		0x12
CONST SFVM_MOVEICONS		=		0xB
CONST SFVM_REARRANGE		=		0x1		/* Notifies the IShellView to rearrange its items. Used by SHShellFolderView_Message. */
CONST SFVM_REFRESHOBJECT	=		0x16
CONST SFVM_REMOVEOBJECT		=		0x6		/* Removes an object from the shell view. Used by SHShellFolderView_Message. */
CONST SFVM_SETCLIPBOARDPOINTS	=		0x17
CONST SFVM_SETOBJECTPOS		=		0xE
CONST SFVM_SETREDRAW		=		0x8
CONST SFVM_TOGGLEAUTOARRANGE	=		0x11
CONST SFVM_UPDATEOBJECT		=		0x7		/* Updates an object by passing a pointer to an array of two pointers to item identifier lists (PIDLs). Used by SHShellFolderView_Message. */
CONST SHGETFPTYPECURRENT	=		0x0
CONST SHGFI_ADDOVERLAYS		=		0x00000020		/* Version 5.0. Apply the appropriate overlays to the file's icon. The SHGFI_ICON flag must also be set. */
CONST SHGFI_ATTR_SPECIFIED	=		0x00020000		/* Modify SHGFI_ATTRIBUTES to indicate that the dwAttributes member of the SHFILEINFO structure at psfi contains the specific attributes that are desired.  */
CONST SHGFI_ATTRIBUTES		=		0x00000800		/* Retrieve the item attributes. The attributes are copied to the dwAttributes member of the structure specified in the psfi parameter. */
CONST SHGFI_DISPLAYNAME		=		0x00000200		/* Retrieve the display name for the file. The name is copied to the szDisplayName member of the structure specified in psfi. The returned display name uses the long file name, if there is one, rather than the 8.3 form of the file name. */
CONST SHGFI_EXETYPE		=		0x00002000		/* Retrieve the type of the executable file if pszPath identifies an executable file. The information is packed into the return value. This flag cannot be specified with any other flags. */
CONST SHGFI_ICON		=		0x00000100		/* Retrieve the handle to the icon that represents the file and the index of the icon within the system image list. The handle is copied to the hIcon member of the structure specified by psfi, and the index is copied to the iIcon member. */
CONST SHGFI_ICONLOCATION	=		0x00001000		/* Retrieve the name of the file and the icon index within that file that contains the icon representing the file specified by pszPath. The name of the file containing the icon is copied to the szDisplayName member of the structure specified by psfi. */
CONST SHGFI_LARGEICON		=		0x00000000		/* Modify SHGFI_ICON, causing the function to retrieve the file's large icon. The SHGFI_ICON flag must also be set. */
CONST SHGFI_LINKOVERLAY		=		0x00008000		/* Modify SHGFI_ICON, causing the function to add the link overlay to the file's icon. The SHGFI_ICON flag must also be set. */
CONST SHGFI_OPENICON		=		0x00000002		/* Modify SHGFI_ICON, causing the function to retrieve the file's open icon. Also used to modify SHGFI_SYSICONINDEX, causing the function to return the handle to the system image list that contains the file's small open icon. */
CONST SHGFI_OVERLAYINDEX	=		0x00000040		/* Version 5.0. Return the index of the overlay icon. The value of the overlay index is returned in the upper eight bits of the iIcon member of the structure specified by psfi. */
CONST SHGFI_PIDL		=		0x00000008		/* Indicate that pszPath is the address of an ITEMIDLIST structure rather than a path name. */
CONST SHGFI_SELECTED		=		0x00010000		/* Modify SHGFI_ICON, causing the function to blend the file's icon with the system highlight color. The SHGFI_ICON flag must also be set. */
CONST SHGFI_SHELLICONSIZE	=		0x00000004		/* Modify SHGFI_ICON, causing the function to retrieve a Shell-sized icon. If this flag is not specified the function sizes the icon according to the system metric values. The SHGFI_ICON flag must also be set. */
CONST SHGFI_SMALLICON		=		0x00000001		/* Modify SHGFI_ICON, causing the function to retrieve the file's small icon. Also used to modify SHGFI_SYSICONINDEX, causing the function to return the handle to the system image list that contains small icon images. */
CONST SHGFI_SYSICONINDEX	=		0x00004000		/* Retrieve the index of a system image list icon. If successful, the index is copied to the iIcon member of psfi. The return value is a handle to the system image list. Only those images whose indices are successfully copied to iIcon are valid. */
CONST SHGFI_TYPENAME		=		0x00000400		/* Retrieve the string that describes the file's type. The string is copied to the szTypeName member of the structure specified in psfi. */
CONST SHGFI_USEFILEATTRIBUTES	=		0x00000010		/* Indicates that the function should not attempt to access the file specified by pszPath. Rather, it should act as if the file specified by pszPath exists with the file attributes passed in dwFileAttributes. */
CONST SHIFTJIS_CHARSET		=		128
CONST SIF_DISABLENOSCROLL	=		0x0008		/* Disables the scroll bar if the new information would cause the scroll bar to be removed. */
CONST SIF_PAGE			=		0x0002		/* Retrieves the page information for the flat scroll bar. This will be placed in the nPage member of the SCROLLINFO structure. */
CONST SIF_POS			=		0x0004		/* Retrieves the position information for the flat scroll bar. This will be placed in the nPos member of the SCROLLINFO structure. */
CONST SIF_RANGE			=		0x0001		/* Retrieves the range information for the flat scroll bar. This will be placed in the nMin and nMax members of the SCROLLINFO structure. */
CONST SIF_TRACKPOS		=		0x0010		/* Copies the current scroll box tracking position to the nTrackPos member of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi. */
CONST SIF_ALL			=		(SIF_RANGE|SIF_PAGE|SIF_POS|SIF_TRACKPOS)		/* A combination of SIF_PAGE, SIF_POS, and SIF_RANGE. */
CONST SIZEPALETTE		=		104
CONST SM_CXEDGE			=		45
CONST SM_CXFRAME		=		32
CONST SM_CXMENUSIZE		=		54
CONST SM_CYCAPTION		=		4
CONST SM_CYEDGE			=		46
CONST SM_CYFRAME		=		33
CONST SM_CYMENUSIZE		=		55
CONST SND_ALIAS			=		0x10000		/* The pszSound parameter is a system-event alias in the registry or the WIN.INI file. Do not use with either SND_FILENAME or SND_RESOURCE. */
CONST SND_ALIAS_ID		=		0x110000		/* The pszSound parameter is a predefined sound identifier. */
CONST SND_ALIAS_START		=		0x0
CONST SND_APPLICATION		=		0x80		/* The sound is played using an application-specific association. */
CONST SND_ASYNC			=		0x1		/* The sound is played asynchronously and PlaySound returns immediately after beginning the sound. To terminate an asynchronously played waveform sound, call PlaySound with pszSound set to NULL. */
CONST SND_FILENAME		=		0x20000		/* The pszSound parameter is a filename. */
CONST SND_LOOP			=		0x8		/* The sound plays repeatedly until PlaySound is called again with the pszSound parameter set to NULL. You must also specify the SND_ASYNC flag to indicate an asynchronous sound event. */
CONST SND_MEMORY		=		0x4		/* A sound event's file is loaded in RAM. The parameter specified by pszSound must point to an image of a sound in memory. */
CONST SND_NODEFAULT		=		0x2		/* No default sound event is used. If the sound cannot be found, PlaySound returns silently without playing the default sound. */
CONST SND_NOSTOP		=		0x10		/* The specified sound event will yield to another sound event that is already playing.If this flag is not specified, PlaySound attempts to stop the currently playing sound so that the device can be used to play the new sound. */
CONST SND_NOWAIT		=		0x2000		/* If the driver is busy, return immediately without playing the sound. */
CONST SND_PURGE			=		0x40		/* Sounds are to be stopped for the calling task. If pszSound is not NULL, all instances of the specified sound are stopped. If pszSound is NULL, all sounds that are playing on behalf of the calling task are stopped. */
CONST SND_RESERVED		=		0xFF000000
CONST SND_RESOURCE		=		0x40004		/* The pszSound parameter is a resource identifier; hmod must identify the instance that contains the resource. */
CONST SND_SYNC			=		0x0		/* Synchronous playback of a sound event. PlaySound returns after the sound event completes. */
CONST SND_TYPE_MASK		=		0x170007
CONST SND_VALID			=		0x1F
CONST SND_VALIDFLAGS		=		0x17201F
CONST SPI_GETACCESSTIMEOUT	=		0x003C		/* Retrieves information about the time-out period associated with the accessibility features. */
CONST SPI_GETACTIVEWINDOWTRACKING	=	0x1000		/* Determines whether active window tracking (activating the window the mouse is on) is on or off. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE for on, or FALSE for off. */
CONST SPI_GETACTIVEWNDTRKTIMEOUT	=	0x2002		/* Retrieves the active window tracking delay, in milliseconds. The pvParam parameter must point to a DWORD variable that receives the time. */
CONST SPI_GETACTIVEWNDTRKZORDER	=		0x100C		/* Determines whether windows activated through active window tracking will be brought to the top. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE for on, or FALSE for off. */
CONST SPI_GETANIMATION		=		0x0048		/* Retrieves the animation effects associated with user actions. The pvParam parameter must point to an ANIMATIONINFO structure that receives the information. */
CONST SPI_GETBEEP		=		0x0001		/* Determines whether the warning beeper is on. */
CONST SPI_GETBLOCKSENDINPUTRESETS	=	0x1026		/* Retrieves a BOOL indicating whether an application can reset the screensaver's timer by calling the SendInput function to simulate keyboard or mouse input. */
CONST SPI_GETBORDER		=		0x0005		/* Retrieves the border multiplier factor that determines the width of a window's sizing border. The pvParam parameter must point to an integer variable that receives this value. */
CONST SPI_GETCARETWIDTH		=		0x2006		/* Retrieves the caret width in edit controls, in pixels. The pvParam parameter must point to a DWORD that receives this value. */
CONST SPI_GETCOMBOBOXANIMATION	=		0x1004		/* Determines whether the slide-open effect for combo boxes is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE for enabled, or FALSE for disabled. */
CONST SPI_GETCURSORSHADOW	=		0x101A		/* Determines whether the cursor has a shadow around it. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if the shadow is enabled, FALSE if it is disabled. */
CONST SPI_GETDEFAULTINPUTLANG	=		0x0059		/* Retrieves the input locale identifier for the system default input language. */
CONST SPI_GETDESKWALLPAPER	=		0x0073		/* Retrieves the full path of the bitmap file for the desktop wallpaper. */
CONST SPI_GETDRAGFULLWINDOWS	=		0x0026		/* Determines whether dragging of full windows is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled, or FALSE otherwise. */
CONST SPI_GETDROPSHADOW		=		0x1024		/* Determines whether the drop shadow effect is enabled.  Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me/98/95  This value is not supported */
CONST SPI_GETFASTTASKSWITCH	=		0x0023		/* This flag is obsolete. Previous versions of Windows use this flag to determine whether ALT+TAB fast task switching is enabled. Beginning with Windows 95 and Windows NT version 4.0, fast task switching is always enabled. */
CONST SPI_GETFILTERKEYS		=		0x0032		/* Retrieves information about the FilterKeys accessibility feature. */
CONST SPI_GETFLATMENU		=		0x1022		/* Determines whether native User menus have flat menu appearance.  Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me/98/95  This value is not supported. */
CONST SPI_GETFOCUSBORDERHEIGHT	=		0x2010		/* Retrieves the height, in pixels, of the top and bottom edges of the focus rectangle drawn with DrawFocusRect. The pvParam parameter must point to a UINT. */
CONST SPI_GETFOCUSBORDERWIDTH	=		0x200E		/* Retrieves the width, in pixels, of the left and right edges of the focus rectangle drawn with DrawFocusRect. The pvParam parameter must point to a UINT */
CONST SPI_GETFONTSMOOTHING	=		0x004A		/* Determines whether the font smoothing feature is enabled. This feature uses font antialiasing to make font curves appear smoother by painting pixels at different gray levels. */
CONST SPI_GETFONTSMOOTHINGCONTRAST	=	0x200C		/* Retrieves a contrast value that is used in ClearType™ smoothing.  Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me/98/95  This value is not supported. */
CONST SPI_GETFONTSMOOTHINGORIENTATION	=	0x2012
CONST SPI_GETFONTSMOOTHINGTYPE	=		0x200A		/* Retrieves the type of font smoothing.  Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me/98/95  This value is not supported. */
CONST SPI_GETFOREGROUNDFLASHCOUNT	=	0x2004		/* Retrieves the number of times SetForegroundWindow will flash the taskbar button when rejecting a foreground switch request. The pvParam parameter must point to a DWORD variable that receives the value. */
CONST SPI_GETFOREGROUNDLOCKTIMEOUT	=	0x2000		/* Retrieves the amount of time following user input, in milliseconds, during which the system will not allow applications to force themselves into the foreground.  */
CONST SPI_GETGRADIENTCAPTIONS	=		0x1008		/* Determines whether the gradient effect for window title bars is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE for enabled, or FALSE for disabled. */
CONST SPI_GETGRIDGRANULARITY	=		0x0012		/* Retrieves the current granularity value of the desktop sizing grid. The pvParam parameter must point to an integer variable that receives the granularity. */
CONST SPI_GETHIGHCONTRAST	=		0x0042		/* Retrieves information about the HighContrast accessibility feature. */
CONST SPI_GETHOTTRACKING	=		0x100E		/* Determines whether hot tracking of user-interface elements, such as menu names on menu bars, is enabled. */
CONST SPI_GETICONMETRICS	=		0x002D		/* Retrieves the metrics associated with icons. */
CONST SPI_GETICONTITLELOGFONT	=		0x001F		/* Retrieves the logical font information for the current icon-title font. */
CONST SPI_GETICONTITLEWRAP	=		0x0019		/* Determines whether icon-title wrapping is enabled. */
CONST SPI_GETKEYBOARDCUES	=		0x100A		/* Determines whether menu access keys are always underlined. */
CONST SPI_GETKEYBOARDDELAY	=		0x0016		/* Retrieves the keyboard repeat-delay setting, which is a value in the range from 0 (approximately 250 ms delay) through 3 (approximately 1 second delay). The actual delay associated with each value may vary depending on the hardware. */
CONST SPI_GETKEYBOARDPREF	=		0x0044		/* Determines whether the user relies on the keyboard instead of the mouse, and wants applications to display keyboard interfaces that would otherwise be hidden. */
CONST SPI_GETKEYBOARDSPEED	=		0x000A		/* Retrieves the keyboard repeat-speed setting, which is a value in the range from 0 (approximately 2.5 repetitions per second) through 31 (approximately 30 repetitions per second).  */
CONST SPI_GETLISTBOXSMOOTHSCROLLING	=	0x1006		/* Determines whether the smooth-scrolling effect for list boxes is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE for enabled, or FALSE for disabled. */
CONST SPI_GETLOWPOWERACTIVE	=		0x0053		/* Determines whether the low-power phase of screen saving is enabled. */
CONST SPI_GETLOWPOWERTIMEOUT	=		0x004F		/* Retrieves the time-out value for the low-power phase of screen saving. The pvParam parameter must point to an integer variable that receives the value. This flag is supported for 32-bit applications only. */
CONST SPI_GETMENUANIMATION	=		0x1002		/* Determines whether the menu animation feature is enabled. This master switch must be on to enable menu animation effects. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if animation is enabled and FALSE if it is disabled. */
CONST SPI_GETMENUDROPALIGNMENT	=		0x001B		/* Determines whether pop-up menus are left-aligned or right-aligned, relative to the corresponding menu-bar item. */
CONST SPI_GETMENUFADE		=		0x1012		/* Determines whether menu fade animation is enabled. */
CONST SPI_GETMENUSHOWDELAY	=		0x006A		/* Retrieves the time, in milliseconds, that the system waits before displaying a shortcut menu when the mouse cursor is over a submenu item. */
CONST SPI_GETMENUUNDERLINES	=		(SPI_GETKEYBOARDCUES)		/* Same as SPI_GETKEYBOARDCUES. */
CONST SPI_GETMINIMIZEDMETRICS	=		0x002B		/* Retrieves the metrics associated with minimized windows. The pvParam parameter must point to a MINIMIZEDMETRICS structure that receives the information. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSE		=		0x0003		/* Retrieves the two mouse threshold values and the mouse acceleration. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSECLICKLOCK	=		0x101E		/* Retrieves the state of the Mouse ClickLock feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled, or FALSE otherwise. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSECLICKLOCKTIME	=		0x2008		/* Retrieves the time delay before the primary mouse button is locked. The pvParam parameter must point to DWORD that receives the time delay. This is only enabled if SPI_SETMOUSECLICKLOCK is set to TRUE. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSEHOVERHEIGHT	=		0x0064		/* Retrieves the height, in pixels, of the rectangle within which the mouse pointer has to stay for TrackMouseEvent to generate a WM_MOUSEHOVER message. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSEHOVERTIME	=		0x0066		/* Retrieves the time, in milliseconds, that the mouse pointer has to stay in the hover rectangle for TrackMouseEvent to generate a WM_MOUSEHOVER message. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSEHOVERWIDTH	=		0x0062		/* Retrieves the width, in pixels, of the rectangle within which the mouse pointer has to stay for TrackMouseEvent to generate a WM_MOUSEHOVER message. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSEKEYS		=		0x0036		/* Retrieves information about the MouseKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a MOUSEKEYS structure that receives the information. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSESONAR		=		0x101C		/* Retrieves the state of the Mouse Sonar feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled or FALSE otherwise. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSESPEED		=		0x0070		/* Retrieves the current mouse speed. The mouse speed determines how far the pointer will move based on the distance the mouse moves. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSETRAILS	=		0x005E		/* Determines whether the Mouse Trails feature is enabled. This feature improves the visibility of mouse cursor movements by briefly showing a trail of cursors and quickly erasing them. */
CONST SPI_GETMOUSEVANISH	=		0x1020		/* Retrieves the state of the Mouse Vanish feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled or FALSE otherwise */
CONST SPI_GETNONCLIENTMETRICS	=		0x0029		/* Retrieves the metrics associated with the nonclient area of nonminimized windows. The pvParam parameter must point to a NONCLIENTMETRICS structure that receives the information. */
CONST SPI_GETPOWEROFFACTIVE	=		0x0054		/* Determines whether the power-off phase of screen saving is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled, or FALSE if disabled. This flag is supported for 32-bit applications only. */
CONST SPI_GETPOWEROFFTIMEOUT	=		0x0050		/* Retrieves the time-out value for the power-off phase of screen saving. The pvParam parameter must point to an integer variable that receives the value. This flag is supported for 32-bit applications only. */
CONST SPI_GETSCREENREADER	=		0x0046		/* Determines whether a screen reviewer utility is running. A screen reviewer utility directs textual information to an output device, such as a speech synthesizer or Braille display. */
CONST SPI_GETSCREENSAVEACTIVE	=		0x0010		/* Determines whether screen saving is enabled. */
CONST SPI_GETSCREENSAVERRUNNING	=		0x0072		/* Determines whether a screen saver is currently running on the window station of the calling process. */
CONST SPI_GETSCREENSAVETIMEOUT	=		0x000E		/* Retrieves the screen saver time-out value, in seconds. */
CONST SPI_GETSELECTIONFADE	=		0x1014		/* Determines whether the selection fade effect is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled or FALSE if disabled. */
CONST SPI_GETSERIALKEYS		=		0x003E		/* Retrieves information about the SerialKeys accessibility feature.  Windows XP/2000/NT  Not supported. The user controls this feature through the control panel. */
CONST SPI_GETSHOWIMEUI		=		0x006E		/* Determines whether the IME status window is visible (on a per-user basis). The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if the status window is visible, or FALSE if it is not. */
CONST SPI_GETSHOWSOUNDS		=		0x0038		/* Determines whether the Show Sounds accessibility flag is on or off. If it is on, the user requires an application to present information visually in situations where it would otherwise present the information only in audible form. */
CONST SPI_GETSNAPTODEFBUTTON	=		0x005F		/* Determines whether the snap-to-default-button feature is enabled. If enabled, the mouse cursor automatically moves to the default button, such as OK or Apply, of a dialog box. */
CONST SPI_GETSOUNDSENTRY	=		0x0040		/* Retrieves information about the SoundSentry accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a SOUNDSENTRY structure that receives the information. */
CONST SPI_GETSTICKYKEYS		=		0x003A		/* Retrieves information about the StickyKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a STICKYKEYS structure that receives the information. */
CONST SPI_GETTOGGLEKEYS		=		0x0034		/* Retrieves information about the ToggleKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a TOGGLEKEYS structure that receives the information. */
CONST SPI_GETTOOLTIPANIMATION	=		0x1016		/* Determines whether ToolTip animation is enabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if enabled or FALSE if disabled. */
CONST SPI_GETTOOLTIPFADE	=		0x1018		/* If SPI_SETTOOLTIPANIMATION is enabled, SPI_GETTOOLTIPFADE indicates whether ToolTip animation uses a fade effect or a slide effect. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE for fade animation or FALSE for slide animatio */
CONST SPI_GETUIEFFECTS		=		0x103E		/* Determines whether UI effects are enabled or disabled. The pvParam parameter must point to a BOOL variable that receives TRUE if all UI effects are enabled, or FALSE if they are disabled. */
CONST SPI_GETWHEELSCROLLLINES	=		0x0068		/* Retrieves the number of lines to scroll when the mouse wheel is rotated. */
CONST SPI_GETWINDOWSEXTENSION	=		0x005C		/* Windows 95  Determines whether the Windows extension, Windows Plus!, is installed. Set the uiParam parameter to 1. The pvParam parameter is not used. The function returns TRUE if the extension is installed, or FALSE if it is not. */
CONST SPI_GETWORKAREA		=		0x0030		/* Retrieves the size of the work area on the primary display monitor. The work area is the portion of the screen not obscured by the system taskbar or by application desktop toolbars. */
CONST SPI_ICONHORIZONTALSPACING	=		0x000D		/* Sets or retrieves the width, in pixels, of an icon cell. The system uses this rectangle to arrange icons in large icon view. */
CONST SPI_ICONVERTICALSPACING	=		0x0018		/* Sets or retrieves the height, in pixels, of an icon cell. */
CONST SPI_LANGDRIVER		=		0x000C		/* Not implemented. */
CONST SPI_SCREENSAVERRUNNING	=		0x0061		/* Windows 95 only Used internally; applications should not use this flag. */
CONST SPI_SETACCESSTIMEOUT	=		0x003D		/* Sets the time-out period associated with the accessibility features. The pvParam parameter must point to an ACCESSTIMEOUT structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETACTIVEWINDOWTRACKING	=	0x1001		/* Sets active window tracking (activating the window the mouse is on) either on or off. Set pvParam to TRUE for on or FALSE for off. */
CONST SPI_SETACTIVEWNDTRKTIMEOUT	=	0x2003		/* Sets the active window tracking delay. Set pvParam to the number of milliseconds to delay before activating the window under the mouse pointer. */
CONST SPI_SETACTIVEWNDTRKZORDER	=		0x100D		/* Determines whether or not windows activated through active window tracking should be brought to the top. Set pvParam to TRUE for on or FALSE for off. */
CONST SPI_SETANIMATION		=		0x0049		/* Sets the animation effects associated with user actions. The pvParam parameter must point to an ANIMATIONINFO structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETBEEP		=		0x0002		/* Turns the warning beeper on or off. */
CONST SPI_SETBLOCKSENDINPUTRESETS	=	0x1027		/* Determines whether an application can reset the screensaver's timer by calling the SendInput function to simulate keyboard or mouse input. */
CONST SPI_SETBORDER		=		0x0006		/* Sets the border multiplier factor that determines the width of a window's sizing border. */
CONST SPI_SETCARETWIDTH		=		0x2007		/* Sets the caret width in edit controls. Set pvParam to the desired width, in pixels. The default and minimum value is 1. */
CONST SPI_SETCOMBOBOXANIMATION	=		0x1005		/* Enables or disables the slide-open effect for combo boxes. Set the pvParam parameter to TRUE to enable the gradient effect, or FALSE to disable it. */
CONST SPI_SETCURSORS		=		0x0057		/* Reloads the system cursors. */
CONST SPI_SETCURSORSHADOW	=		0x101B		/* Enables or disables a shadow around the cursor. The pvParam parameter is a BOOL variable. Set pvParam to TRUE to enable the shadow or FALSE to disable the shadow. This effect appears only if the system has a color depth of more than 256 colors. */
CONST SPI_SETDEFAULTINPUTLANG	=		0x005A		/* Sets the default input language for the system shell and applications. The specified language must be displayable using the current system character set. */
CONST SPI_SETDESKPATTERN	=		0x0015		/* Sets the current desktop pattern by causing Windows to read the Pattern= setting from the WIN.INI file. */
CONST SPI_SETDESKWALLPAPER	=		0x0014		/* Sets the desktop wallpaper. */
CONST SPI_SETDOUBLECLICKTIME	=		0x0020		/* Sets the double-click time for the mouse to the value of the uiParam parameter. The double-click time is the maximum number of milliseconds that can occur between the first and second clicks of a double-click. */
CONST SPI_SETDOUBLECLKHEIGHT	=		0x001E		/* Sets the height of the double-click rectangle to the value of the uiParam parameter.  The double-click rectangle is the rectangle within which the second click of a double-click must fall for it to be registered as a double-click. */
CONST SPI_SETDOUBLECLKWIDTH	=		0x001D		/* Sets the width of the double-click rectangle to the value of the uiParam parameter. The double-click rectangle is the rectangle within which the second click of a double-click must fall for it to be registered as a double-click. */
CONST SPI_SETDRAGFULLWINDOWS	=		0x0025		/* Sets dragging of full windows either on or off. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for on, or FALSE for off.  */
CONST SPI_SETDRAGHEIGHT		=		0x004D		/* Sets the height, in pixels, of the rectangle used to detect the start of a drag operation. Set uiParam to the new value. To retrieve the drag height, call GetSystemMetrics with the SM_CYDRAG flag. */
CONST SPI_SETDRAGWIDTH		=		0x004C		/* Sets the width, in pixels, of the rectangle used to detect the start of a drag operation. Set uiParam to the new value. To retrieve the drag width, call GetSystemMetrics with the SM_CXDRAG flag. */
CONST SPI_SETDROPSHADOW		=		0x1025		/* Enables or disables the drop shadow effect. */
CONST SPI_SETFASTTASKSWITCH	=		0x0024		/* This flag is obsolete. Previous versions of Windows use this flag to enable or disable ALT+TAB fast task switching. Beginning with Windows 95 and Windows NT version 4.0, fast task switching is always enabled. */
CONST SPI_SETFILTERKEYS		=		0x0033		/* Sets the parameters of the FilterKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a FILTERKEYS structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETFLATMENU		=		0x1023		/* Enables or disables flat menu appearance for native User menus. */
CONST SPI_SETFOCUSBORDERHEIGHT	=		0x2011		/* Sets the height of the top and bottom edges of the focus rectangle drawn with DrawFocusRect to the value of the pvParam parameter.  Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me/98/95  This value is not supported. */
CONST SPI_SETFOCUSBORDERWIDTH	=		0x200F		/* Sets the height of the left and right edges of the focus rectangle drawn with DrawFocusRect to the value of the pvParam parameter.  Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me/98/95  This value is not supported. */
CONST SPI_SETFONTSMOOTHING	=		0x004B		/* Enables or disables the font smoothing feature, which uses font antialiasing to make font curves appear smoother by painting pixels at different gray levels. */
CONST SPI_SETFONTSMOOTHINGCONTRAST	=	0x200D		/* Sets the contrast value used in ClearType smoothing. */
CONST SPI_SETFONTSMOOTHINGORIENTATION	=	0x2013
CONST SPI_SETFONTSMOOTHINGTYPE	=		0x200B		/* Sets the font smoothing type. The pvParam parameter is either FE_FONTSMOOTHINGSTANDARD, if standard anti-aliasing is used, or FE_FONTSMOOTHINGCLEARTYPE, if ClearType is used. The default is FE_FONTSMOOTHINGSTANDARD. */
CONST SPI_SETFOREGROUNDFLASHCOUNT	=	0x2005		/* Sets the number of times SetForegroundWindow will flash the taskbar button when rejecting a foreground switch request. Set pvParam to the number of times to flash. */
CONST SPI_SETFOREGROUNDLOCKTIMEOUT	=	0x2001		/* Sets the amount of time following user input, in milliseconds, during which the system does not allow applications to force themselves into the foreground. Set pvParam to the new timeout value. */
CONST SPI_SETGRADIENTCAPTIONS	=		0x1009		/* Enables or disables the gradient effect for window title bars. Set the pvParam parameter to TRUE to enable it, or FALSE to disable it. The gradient effect is possible only if the system has a color depth of more than 256 colors. */
CONST SPI_SETGRIDGRANULARITY	=		0x0013		/* Sets the granularity of the desktop sizing grid to the value of the uiParam parameter. */
CONST SPI_SETHANDHELD		=		0x004E		/* Used internally; applications should not use this value. */
CONST SPI_SETHIGHCONTRAST	=		0x0043		/* Sets the parameters of the HighContrast accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a HIGHCONTRAST structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETHOTTRACKING	=		0x100F		/* Enables or disables hot tracking of user-interface elements such as menu names on menu bars. Set the pvParam parameter to TRUE to enable it, or FALSE to disable it. */
CONST SPI_SETICONMETRICS	=		0x002E		/* Sets the metrics associated with icons. The pvParam parameter must point to an ICONMETRICS structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETICONS		=		0x0058		/* Reloads the system icons. */
CONST SPI_SETICONTITLELOGFONT	=		0x0022		/* Sets the font that is used for icon titles. */
CONST SPI_SETICONTITLEWRAP	=		0x001A		/* Turns icon-title wrapping on or off. */
CONST SPI_SETKEYBOARDCUES	=		0x100B		/* Sets the underlining of menu access key letters. The pvParam parameter is a BOOL variable. Set pvParam to TRUE to always underline menu access keys, or FALSE to underline menu access keys only when the menu is activated from the keyboard. */
CONST SPI_SETKEYBOARDDELAY	=		0x0017		/* Sets the keyboard repeat-delay setting. The uiParam parameter must specify 0, 1, 2, or 3, where zero sets the shortest delay (approximately 250 ms) and 3 sets the longest delay (approximately 1 second).  */
CONST SPI_SETKEYBOARDPREF	=		0x0045		/* Sets the keyboard preference. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE if the user relies on the keyboard instead of the mouse, and wants applications to display keyboard interfaces that would otherwise be hidden; uiParam is FALSE otherwise. */
CONST SPI_SETKEYBOARDSPEED	=		0x000B		/* Sets the keyboard repeat-speed setting. The uiParam parameter must specify a value in the range from 0 (approximately 2.5 repetitions per second) through 31 (approximately 30 repetitions per second).  */
CONST SPI_SETLANGTOGGLE		=		0x005B		/* Sets the hot key set for switching between input languages. The uiParam and pvParam parameters are not used. The value sets the shortcut keys in the keyboard property sheets by reading the registry again. */
CONST SPI_SETLISTBOXSMOOTHSCROLLING	=	0x1007		/* Enables or disables the smooth-scrolling effect for list boxes. Set the pvParam parameter to TRUE to enable the smooth-scrolling effect, or FALSE to disable it. */
CONST SPI_SETLOWPOWERACTIVE	=		0x0055		/* Activates or deactivates the low-power phase of screen saving. Set uiParam to 1 to activate, or zero to deactivate. The pvParam parameter must be NULL. This flag is supported for 32-bit applications only. */
CONST SPI_SETLOWPOWERTIMEOUT	=		0x0051		/* Sets the time-out value, in seconds, for the low-power phase of screen saving. The uiParam parameter specifies the new value. The pvParam parameter must be NULL. This flag is supported for 32-bit applications only. */
CONST SPI_SETMENUANIMATION	=		0x1003		/* Enables or disables menu animation. This master switch must be on for any menu animation to occur. The pvParam parameter is a BOOL variable; set pvParam to TRUE to enable animation and FALSE to disable animation. */
CONST SPI_SETMENUDROPALIGNMENT	=		0x001C		/* Sets the alignment value of pop-up menus. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for right alignment, or FALSE for left alignment. */
CONST SPI_SETMENUFADE		=		0x1013		/* Enables or disables menu fade animation. Set pvParam to TRUE to enable the menu fade effect or FALSE to disable it. */
CONST SPI_SETMENUSHOWDELAY	=		0x006B		/* Sets uiParam to the time, in milliseconds, that the system waits before displaying a shortcut menu when the mouse cursor is over a submenu item. */
CONST SPI_SETMENUUNDERLINES	=		0x100B		/* Same as SPI_SETKEYBOARDCUES. */
CONST SPI_SETMINIMIZEDMETRICS	=		0x002C		/* Sets the metrics associated with minimized windows. The pvParam parameter must point to a MINIMIZEDMETRICS structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSE		=		0x0004		/* Sets the two mouse threshold values and the mouse acceleration. The pvParam parameter must point to an array of three integers that specifies these values. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSEBUTTONSWAP	=		0x0021		/* Swaps or restores the meaning of the left and right mouse buttons. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE to swap the meanings of the buttons, or FALSE to restore their original meanings. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSECLICKLOCK	=		0x101F		/* Turns the Mouse ClickLock accessibility feature on or off. This feature temporarily locks down the primary mouse button when that button is clicked and held down for the time specified by SPI_SETMOUSECLICKLOCKTIME */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSECLICKLOCKTIME	=		0x2009		/* Adjusts the time delay before the primary mouse button is locked. The uiParam parameter specifies the time delay in microseconds. For example, specify 1000 for a 1 second delay. The default is 1200. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSEHOVERHEIGHT	=		0x0065		/* Sets the height, in pixels, of the rectangle within which the mouse pointer has to stay for TrackMouseEvent to generate a WM_MOUSEHOVER message. Set the uiParam parameter to the new height. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSEHOVERTIME	=		0x0067		/* Sets the time, in milliseconds, that the mouse pointer has to stay in the hover rectangle for TrackMouseEvent to generate a WM_MOUSEHOVER message. This is used only if you pass HOVER_DEFAULT in the dwHoverTime parameter in the call to TrackMouseEven */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSEHOVERWIDTH	=		0x0063		/* Sets the width, in pixels, of the rectangle within which the mouse pointer has to stay for TrackMouseEvent to generate a WM_MOUSEHOVER message. Set the uiParam parameter to the new width. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSEKEYS		=		0x0037		/* Sets the parameters of the MouseKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a MOUSEKEYS structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSESONAR		=		0x101D		/* Turns the Sonar accessibility feature on or off. This feature briefly shows several concentric circles around the mouse pointer when the user presses and releases the CTRL key.  Windows 2000/NT, Windows 98/95  This value is not supported. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSESPEED		=		0x0071		/* Sets the current mouse speed. The pvParam parameter is an integer between 1 (slowest) and 20 (fastest). A value of 10 is the default. This value is typically set using the mouse control panel application. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSETRAILS	=		0x005D		/* Enables or disables the Mouse Trails feature, which improves the visibility of mouse cursor movements by briefly showing a trail of cursors and quickly erasing them. */
CONST SPI_SETMOUSEVANISH	=		0x1021		/* Turns the Vanish feature on or off. This feature hides the mouse pointer when the user types; the pointer reappears when the user moves the mouse. */
CONST SPI_SETNONCLIENTMETRICS	=		0x002A		/* Sets the metrics associated with the nonclient area of nonminimized windows. The pvParam parameter must point to a NONCLIENTMETRICS structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETPENWINDOWS		=		0x0031		/* Windows Me/98/95  Pen windows is being loaded or unloaded. The uiParam parameter is TRUE when loading and FALSE when unloading pen windows. The pvParam parameter is NULL. */
CONST SPI_SETPOWEROFFACTIVE	=		0x0056		/* Activates or deactivates the power-off phase of screen saving. Set uiParam to 1 to activate, or zero to deactivate. The pvParam parameter must be NULL. This flag is supported for 32-bit applications only. */
CONST SPI_SETPOWEROFFTIMEOUT	=		0x0052		/* Sets the time-out value, in seconds, for the power-off phase of screen saving. The uiParam parameter specifies the new value. The pvParam parameter must be NULL. This flag is supported for 32-bit applications only */
CONST SPI_SETSCREENREADER	=		0x0047		/* Determines whether a screen review utility is running. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for on, or FALSE for off.  Windows NT  This value is not supported. */
CONST SPI_SETSCREENSAVEACTIVE	=		0x0011		/* Sets the state of the screen saver. */
CONST SPI_SETSCREENSAVERRUNNING	=		0x0061		/* Windows Me/98  Used internally; applications should not use this flag. */
CONST SPI_SETSCREENSAVETIMEOUT	=		0x000F		/* Sets the screen saver time-out value to the value of the uiParam parameter. This value is the amount of time, in seconds, that the system must be idle before the screen saver activates. */
CONST SPI_SETSELECTIONFADE	=		0x1015		/* Set pvParam to TRUE to enable the selection fade effect or FALSE to disable it. */
CONST SPI_SETSERIALKEYS		=		0x003F		/* Windows Me/98/95  Sets the parameters of the SerialKeys accessibility feature.  Windows Server 2003, Windows XP/2000/NT  Not supported. */
CONST SPI_SETSHOWIMEUI		=		0x006F		/* Sets whether the IME status window is visible or not on a per-user basis. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for on or FALSE for off. */
CONST SPI_SETSHOWSOUNDS		=		0x0039		/* Turns the ShowSounds accessibility feature on or off. The uiParam parameter specifies TRUE for on, or FALSE for off. */
CONST SPI_SETSNAPTODEFBUTTON	=		0x0060		/* Enables or disables the snap-to-default-button feature. If enabled, the mouse cursor automatically moves to the default button, such as OK or Apply, of a dialog box. */
CONST SPI_SETSOUNDSENTRY	=		0x0041		/* Sets the parameters of the SoundSentry accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a SOUNDSENTRY structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETSTICKYKEYS		=		0x003B		/* Sets the parameters of the StickyKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a STICKYKEYS structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETTOGGLEKEYS		=		0x0035		/* Sets the parameters of the ToggleKeys accessibility feature. The pvParam parameter must point to a TOGGLEKEYS structure that contains the new parameters. */
CONST SPI_SETTOOLTIPANIMATION	=		0x1017		/* Set pvParam to TRUE to enable ToolTip animation or FALSE to disable it. If enabled, you can use SPI_SETTOOLTIPFADE to specify fade or slide animation. */
CONST SPI_SETTOOLTIPFADE	=		0x1019		/* If the SPI_SETTOOLTIPANIMATION flag is enabled, use SPI_SETTOOLTIPFADE to indicate whether ToolTip animation uses a fade effect or a slide effect. Set pvParam to TRUE for fade animation or FALSE for slide animation. */
CONST SPI_SETUIEFFECTS		=		0x103F		/* Enables or disables UI effects. Set the pvParam parameter to TRUE to enable all UI effects or FALSE to disable all UI effects. */
CONST SPI_SETWHEELSCROLLLINES	=		0x0069		/* Sets the number of lines to scroll when the mouse wheel is rotated. The number of lines is set from the uiParam parameter. */
CONST SPI_SETWORKAREA		=		0x002F		/* Sets the size of the work area. The work area is the portion of the screen not obscured by the system taskbar or by application desktop toolbars. */
CONST SRCAND			=		0x008800C6
CONST SRCCOPY			=		0x00CC0020
CONST SRCERASE			=		0x00440328
CONST SRCINVERT			=		0x00660046
CONST SRCPAINT			=		0x00EE0086
CONST SS_BITMAP			=		0xE		/* Specifies that a bitmap is to be displayed in the static control. The text is the name of a bitmap (not a filename) defined elsewhere in the resource file. */
CONST SS_BLACKFRAME		=		0x7		/* Specifies a box with a frame drawn in the same color as the window frames. This color is black in the default color scheme. */
CONST SS_BLACKRECT		=		0x4		/* Specifies a rectangle filled with the current window frame color. This color is black in the default color scheme. */
CONST SS_CENTER			=		0x1		/* Specifies a simple rectangle and centers the text in the rectangle. The text is formatted before it is displayed. Words that extend past the end of a line are automatically wrapped to the beginning of the next centered line. */
CONST SS_CENTERIMAGE		=		0x200		/* Specifies that a bitmap is centered in the static control that contains it. The control is not resized, so that a bitmap too large for the control will be clipped. */
CONST SS_ELLIPSISMASK		=		0xC000
CONST SS_ENDELLIPSIS		=		0x4000		/* Microsoft Windows NT or later: If the end of a string does not fit in the rectangle, it is truncated and ellipses are added. If a word that is not at the end of the string goes beyond the limits of the rectangle, it is truncated without ellipses. */
CONST SS_ENHMETAFILE		=		0xF		/* Specifies that an enhanced metafile is to be displayed in the static control. The text is the name of a metafile. An enhanced metafile static control has a fixed size; the metafile is scaled to fit the static control's client area. */
CONST SS_ETCHEDFRAME		=		0x12		/* Draws the frame of the static control using the EDGE_ETCHED edge style. For more information, see the DrawEdge function. */
CONST SS_ETCHEDHORZ		=		0x10		/* Draws the top and bottom edges of the static control using the EDGE_ETCHED edge style. For more information, see the DrawEdge function. */
CONST SS_ETCHEDVERT		=		0x11		/* Draws the left and right edges of the static control using the EDGE_ETCHED edge style. For more information, see the DrawEdge function. */
CONST SS_GRAYFRAME		=		0x8		/* Specifies a box with a frame drawn with the same color as the screen background (desktop). This color is gray in the default color scheme. */
CONST SS_GRAYRECT		=		0x5		/* Specifies a rectangle filled with the current screen background color. This color is gray in the default color scheme. */
CONST SS_ICON			=		0x3		/* Specifies an icon is to be displayed in the dialog box. If the control is created as part of a dialog box, the text is the name of an icon (not a filename) defined elsewhere in the resource file. */
CONST SS_LEFT			=		0x0		/* Specifies a simple rectangle and left-aligns the text in the rectangle. The text is formatted before it is displayed. Words that extend past the end of a line are automatically wrapped to the beginning of the next left-aligned line. */
CONST SS_LEFTNOWORDWRAP		=		0xC		/* Specifies a simple rectangle and left-aligns the text in the rectangle. Tabs are expanded, but words are not wrapped. Text that extends past the end of a line is clipped. */
CONST SS_LEVEL_VERSION		=		0
CONST SS_MAJOR_VERSION		=		7
CONST SS_MINIMUM_VERSION	=		0		/* "7.00.00.0000" */
CONST SS_MINOR_VERSION		=		0
CONST SS_NOPREFIX		=		0x80		/* Prevents interpretation of any ampersand () characters in the control's text as accelerator prefix characters. These are displayed with the ampersand removed and the next character in the string underlined. */
CONST SS_NOTIFY			=		0x100		/* Sends the parent window STN_CLICKED, STN_DBLCLK, STN_DISABLE, and STN_ENABLE notification messages when the user clicks or double-clicks the control. */
CONST SS_OWNERDRAW		=		0xD		/* Specifies that the owner of the static control is responsible for drawing the control. The owner window receives a WM_DRAWITEM message whenever the control needs to be drawn. */
CONST SS_PATHELLIPSIS		=		0x8000		/* Windows NT or later: Replaces characters in the middle of the string with ellipses so that the result fits in the specified rectangle. */
CONST SS_REALSIZECONTROL	=		0x40		/* Windows XP Adjusts the bitmap to fit the size of the static control. For example, changing the locale can change the system font, and thus controls might be resized. If a static control had a bitmap, the bitmap would no longer fit the control. */
CONST SS_REALSIZEIMAGE		=		0x800		/* Adjusts the static icon control to the size of the icon without centering. */
CONST SS_RIGHT			=		0x2		/* Specifies a simple rectangle and right-aligns the text in the rectangle. The text is formatted before it is displayed. Words that extend past the end of a line are automatically wrapped to the beginning of the next right-aligned line. */
CONST SS_RIGHTJUST		=		0x400		/* Specifies that the lower right corner of a static control with the SS_BITMAP or SS_ICON style is to remain fixed when the control is resized. Only the top and left sides are adjusted to accommodate a new bitmap or icon. */
CONST SS_SIMPLE			=		0xB		/* Specifies a simple rectangle and displays a single line of left-aligned text in the rectangle. The text line cannot be shortened or altered in any way. Also, if the control is disabled, the control does not gray its text. */
CONST SS_SUNKEN			=		0x1000		/* Draws a half-sunken border around a static control. */
CONST SS_TYPEMASK		=		0x1F		/* Note that this is out of date and does not correctly include all valid styles. Thus, you should not use this style. */
CONST SS_USERITEM		=		0xA
CONST SS_WHITEFRAME		=		0x9		/* Specifies a box with a frame drawn with the same color as the window background. This color is white in the default color scheme. */
CONST SS_WHITERECT		=		0x6		/* Specifies a rectangle filled with the current window background color. This color is white in the default color scheme. */
CONST SS_WORDELLIPSIS		=		0xC000		/* Windows NT or later: Truncates any word that does not fit in the rectangle and adds ellipses. */
CONST STARTF_FORCEOFFFEEDBACK	=		0x80
CONST STARTF_FORCEONFEEDBACK	=		0x40
CONST STARTF_RUNFULLSCREEN	=		0x20
CONST STARTF_USECOUNTCHARS	=		0x8
CONST STARTF_USEFILLATTRIBUTE	=		0x10
CONST STARTF_USEHOTKEY		=		0x200
CONST STARTF_USEPOSITION	=		0x4
CONST STARTF_USESHOWWINDOW	=		0x1
CONST STARTF_USESIZE		=		0x2
CONST STARTF_USESTDHANDLES	=		0x100
CONST STD_ERROR_HANDLE		=		-12		/* Handle to the standard error device. Initially, this is a handle to the active console screen buffer, CONOUT$ */
CONST STD_INPUT_HANDLE		=		-10		/* Handle to the standard input device. Initially, this is a handle to the console input buffer, CONIN$. */
CONST STD_OUTPUT_HANDLE		=		-11		/* Handle to the standard output device. Initially, this is a handle to the active console screen buffer, CONOUT$ */
CONST STD_BOOKMARKLENGTH	=		1		/* The following constant is defined in Oledb.h as the standard bookmark length: */
CONST STD_COPY			=		1		/* Copy operation. */
CONST STD_CUT			=		0		/* Cut operation. */
CONST STD_DELETE		=		5		/* Delete operation. */
CONST STD_FILENEW		=		6		/* New file operation. */
CONST STD_FILEOPEN		=		7		/* Open file operation. */
CONST STD_FILESAVE		=		8		/* Save file operation. */
CONST STD_FIND			=		12		/* Find operation. */
CONST STD_HELP			=		11		/* Help operation. */
CONST STD_PASTE			=		2		/* Paste operation. */
CONST STD_PRINT			=		14		/* Print operation. */
CONST STD_PRINTPRE		=		9		/* Print preview operation. */
CONST STD_PROPERTIES		=		10		/* Properties operation. */
CONST STD_REDOW			=		4		/* Redo operation */
CONST STD_REPLACE		=		13		/* Replace operation. */
CONST STD_UNDO			=		3		/* Undo operation. */
CONST STM_GETICON		=		0x171		/* An application sends the STM_GETICON message to retrieve a handle to the icon associated with a static control that has the SS_ICON style. */
CONST STM_GETIMAGE		=		0x173		/* An application sends an STM_GETIMAGE message to retrieve a handle to the image (icon or bitmap) associated with a static control. */
CONST STM_SETICON		=		0x170		/* An application sends the STM_SETICON message to associate an icon with an icon control. */
CONST STM_SETIMAGE		=		0x172		/* An application sends an STM_SETIMAGE message to associate a new image with a static control. */
CONST STN_CLICKED		=		0		/* The STN_CLICKED notification message is sent when the user clicks a static control that has the SS_NOTIFY style. The parent window of the control receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST STN_DBLCLK		=		1		/* The STN_DBLCLK notification message is sent when the user double-clicks a static control that has the SS_NOTIFY style. The parent window of the control receives this notification message through the WM_COMMAND message. */
CONST STN_DISABLE		=		3		/* The STN_DISABLE notification message is sent when a static control is disabled. The static control must have the SS_NOTIFY style to receive this notification message. The parent window of the control receives this notification message through the WM */
CONST STN_ENABLE		=		2		/* The STN_ENABLE notification message is sent when a static control is enabled. The static control must have the SS_NOTIFY style to receive this notification message. */
CONST STYLE_BRACELIGHT		=		34
CONST STYLE_CONTROLCHAR		=		36
CONST STYLE_DEFAULT		=		32
CONST STYLE_INDENTGUIDE		=		37
CONST STYLE_LASTPREDEFINED	=		39
CONST STYLE_LINENUMBER		=		33
CONST STYLE_MAX			=		127
CONST SW_ERASE			=		0x0004		/* Erases the newly invalidated region by sending a WM_ERASEBKGND message to the window when specified with the SW_INVALIDATE flag. */
CONST SW_FORCEMINIMIZE		=		11		/* Windows 2000/XP: Minimizes a window, even if the thread that owns the window is hung. This flag should only be used when minimizing windows from a different thread. */
CONST SW_HIDE			=		0		/* Hides the window and activates another window. */
CONST SW_INVALIDATE		=		0x0002		/* Invalidates the region identified by the hrgnUpdate parameter after scrolling. */
CONST SW_MAX			=		10
CONST SW_MAXIMIZE		=		3		/* Maximizes the specified window. */
CONST SW_MINIMIZE		=		6		/* Minimizes the specified window and activates the next top-level window in the Z order. */
CONST SW_NORMAL			=		1
CONST SW_RESTORE		=		9		/* Activates and displays the window. If the window is minimized or maximized, the system restores it to its original size and position. An application should specify this flag when restoring a minimized window. */
CONST SW_SCROLLCHILDREN		=		0x0001		/* Scrolls all child windows that intersect the rectangle pointed to by the prcScroll parameter. The child windows are scrolled by the number of pixels specified by the dx and dy parameters. */
CONST SW_SHOW			=		5		/* Activates the window and displays it in its current size and position. */
CONST SW_SHOWDEFAULT		=		10		/* Sets the show state based on the SW_ value specified in the STARTUPINFO structure passed to the CreateProcess function by the program that started the application. */
CONST SW_SHOWMAXIMIZED		=		3		/* Activates the window and displays it as a maximized window. */
CONST SW_SHOWMINIMIZED		=		2		/* Activates the window and displays it as a minimized window. */
CONST SW_SHOWMINNOACTIVE	=		7		/* Displays the window as a minimized window. This value is similar to SW_SHOWMINIMIZED, except the window is not activated. */
CONST SW_SHOWNA			=		8		/* Displays the window in its current size and position. This value is similar to SW_SHOW, except the window is not activated. */
CONST SW_SHOWNOACTIVATE		=		4		/* Displays a window in its most recent size and position. This value is similar to SW_SHOWNORMAL, except the window is not actived. */
CONST SW_SHOWNORMAL		=		1		/* Activates and displays a window. If the window is minimized or maximized, the system restores it to its original size and position. An application should specify this flag when displaying the window for the first time. */
CONST SW_SMOOTHSCROLL		=		0x0010		/* Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Scrolls using smooth scrolling. Use the HIWORD portion of the flags parameter to indicate how much time the smooth-scrolling operation should take. */
CONST SWP_ASYNCWINDOWPOS	=		0x4000		/* If the calling thread and the thread that owns the window are attached to different input queues, the system posts the request to the thread that owns the window. */
CONST SWP_DEFERERASE		=		0x2000		/* Prevents generation of the WM_SYNCPAINT message. */
CONST SWP_FRAMECHANGED		=		0x20		/* Applies new frame styles set using the SetWindowLong function. Sends a WM_NCCALCSIZE message to the window, even if the window's size is not being changed. If this flag is not specified, WM_NCCALCSIZE is sent only when the window's size is being cha */
CONST SWP_DRAWFRAME		=		(SWP_FRAMECHANGED)		/* Draws a frame (defined in the window's class description) around the window. */
CONST SWP_HIDEWINDOW		=		0x80		/* Hides the window. */
CONST SWP_NOACTIVATE		=		0x10		/* Does not activate the window. If this flag is not set, the window is activated and moved to the top of either the topmost or non-topmost group (depending on the setting of the hWndInsertAfter parameter). */
CONST SWP_NOCOPYBITS		=		0x100		/* Discards the entire contents of the client area. If this flag is not specified, the valid contents of the client area are saved and copied back into the client area after the window is sized or repositioned. */
CONST SWP_NOMOVE		=		0x2		/* Retains the current position (ignores X and Y parameters). */
CONST SWP_NOOWNERZORDER		=		0x200		/* Does not change the owner window's position in the Z order. */
CONST SWP_NOREDRAW		=		0x8		/* occurs. This applies to the client area, the nonclient area (including the title bar and scroll bars), and any part of the parent window uncovered as a result of the window being moved. */
CONST SWP_NOREPOSITION		=		(SWP_NOOWNERZORDER)		/* Same as the SWP_NOOWNERZORDER flag. */
CONST SWP_NOSENDCHANGING	=		0x400		/* Prevents the window from receiving the WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING message. */
CONST SWP_NOSIZE		=		0x1		/* Retains the current size (ignores the cx and cy parameters). */
CONST SWP_NOZORDER		=		0x4		/* Retains the current Z order (ignores the hWndInsertAfter parameter). */
CONST SWP_SHOWWINDOW		=		0x40		/* Displays the window. */
CONST SYMBOL_CHARSET		=		2
CONST SYSTEM_FIXED_FONT		=		16		/* Fixed-pitch (monospace) system font. This stock object is provided only for compatibility with 16-bit Windows versions earlier than 3.0.  */
CONST SYSTEM_FONT		=		13		/* System font. By default, the system uses the system font to draw menus, dialog box controls, and text. Windows 95/98 and Windows NT: The system font is MS Sans Serif. Windows 2000/XP: The system font is Tahoma */
CONST TA_BASELINE		=		24		/* The reference point will be on the base line of the text. */
CONST TA_BOTTOM			=		8		/* The reference point will be on the bottom edge of the bounding rectangle. */
CONST TA_CENTER			=		6		/* The reference point will be aligned horizontally with the center of the bounding rectangle. */
CONST TA_LEFT			=		0		/* The reference point will be on the left edge of the bounding rectangle. */
CONST TA_NOUPDATECP		=		0		/* The current position is not updated after each text output call. The reference point is passed to the text output function. */
CONST TA_RIGHT			=		2		/* The reference point will be on the right edge of the bounding rectangle. */
CONST TA_RTLREADING		=		256		/* Middle East language edition of Windows: The text is laid out in right to left reading order, as opposed to the default left to right order. This applies only when the font selected into the device context is either Hebrew or Arabic. */
CONST TA_TOP			=		0		/* The reference point will be on the top edge of the bounding rectangle. */
CONST TA_UPDATECP		=		1		/* The current position is updated after each text output call. The current position is used as the reference point. */
CONST TA_MASK			=		(TA_BASELINE|TA_CENTER|TA_UPDATECP)
CONST TB_ADDBITMAP		=		(WM_USER+19)		/* Adds one or more images to the list of button images available for a toolbar. */
CONST TB_ADDBUTTONS		=		(WM_USER+20)		/* Adds one or more buttons to a toolbar. */
CONST TB_ADDSTRING		=		(WM_USER+28)		/* Adds a new string to the toolbar's string pool. */
CONST TB_AUTOSIZE		=		(WM_USER+33)		/* Causes a toolbar to be resized. */
CONST TB_BOTTOM			=		7		/* VK_END */
CONST TB_BUTTONCOUNT		=		(WM_USER+24)		/* Retrieves a count of the buttons currently in the toolbar. */
CONST TB_BUTTONSTRUCTSIZE	=		(WM_USER+30)		/* Specifies the size of the TBBUTTON structure. */
CONST TB_CHANGEBITMAP		=		(WM_USER+43)		/* Changes the bitmap for a button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_CHECKBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+2)		/* Checks or unchecks a given button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_COMMANDTOINDEX		=		(WM_USER+25)		/* Retrieves the zero-based index for the button associated with the specified command identifier. */
CONST TB_CUSTOMIZE		=		(WM_USER+27)		/* Displays the Customize Toolbar dialog box. */
CONST TB_DELETEBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+22)		/* Deletes a button from the toolbar. */
CONST TB_ENABLEBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+1)		/* Enables or disables the specified button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETANCHORHIGHLIGHT	=		(WM_USER+74)		/* Retrieves the anchor highlight setting for a toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETBITMAP		=		(WM_USER+44)		/* Retrieves the index of the bitmap associated with a button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETBITMAPFLAGS		=		(WM_USER+41)		/* Retrieves the flags that describe the type of bitmap to be used. */
CONST TB_GETBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+23)		/* Retrieves information about the specified button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETBUTTONINFO		=		(WM_USER+65)		/* Retrieves extended information for a button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETBUTTONSIZE		=		(WM_USER+58)		/* Retrieves the current width and height of toolbar buttons, in pixels. */
CONST TB_GETBUTTONTEXT		=		(WM_USER+45)		/* Retrieves the current width and height of toolbar buttons, in pixels. */
CONST TB_GETCOLORSCHEME		=		(CCM_GETCOLORSCHEME)		/* Retrieves the color scheme information from the toolbar control. */
CONST TB_GETDISABLEDIMAGELIST	=		(WM_USER+55)		/* Retrieves the image list that a toolbar control uses to display inactive buttons. */
CONST TB_GETEXTENDEDSTYLE	=		(WM_USER+85)		/* Retrieves the extended styles for a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_GETHOTIMAGELIST	=		(WM_USER+53)		/* Retrieves the image list that a toolbar control uses to display hot buttons. */
CONST TB_GETHOTITEM		=		(WM_USER+71)		/* Retrieves the index of the hot item in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETIMAGELIST		=		(WM_USER+49)		/* Retrieves the image list that a toolbar control uses to display buttons in their default state. A toolbar control uses this image list to display buttons when they are not hot or disabled. */
CONST TB_GETINSERTMARK		=		(WM_USER+79)		/* Retrieves the image list that a toolbar control uses to display buttons in their default state. A toolbar control uses this image list to display buttons when they are not hot or disabled. */
CONST TB_GETINSERTMARKCOLOR	=		(WM_USER+89)		/* Retrieves the color used to draw the insertion mark for the toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETITEMRECT		=		(WM_USER+29)		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle of a button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETMAXSIZE		=		(WM_USER+83)		/* Retrieves the total size of all of the visible buttons and separators in the toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETMETRICS		=		(WM_USER+101)		/* Retrieves the metrics of a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_GETOBJECT		=		(WM_USER+62)		/* Retrieves the IDropTarget for a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_GETPADDING		=		(WM_USER+86)		/* Retrieves the padding for a toolbar control.  */
CONST TB_GETRECT		=		(WM_USER+51)		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle for a specified toolbar button. */
CONST TB_GETROWS		=		(WM_USER+40)		/* Retrieves the number of rows of buttons in a toolbar with the TBSTYLE_WRAPABLE style. */
CONST TB_GETSTATE		=		(WM_USER+18)		/* Retrieves information about the state of the specified button in a toolbar, such as whether it is enabled, pressed, or checked. */
CONST TB_GETSTRING		=		(WM_USER+92)		/* Retrieves a string from a toolbar's string pool. */
CONST TB_GETSTYLE		=		(WM_USER+57)		/* Retrieves the styles currently in use for a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_GETTEXTROWS		=		(WM_USER+61)		/* Retrieves the maximum number of text rows that can be displayed on a toolbar button.  */
CONST TB_GETTOOLTIPS		=		(WM_USER+35)		/* Retrieves the handle to the ToolTip control, if any, associated with the toolbar. */
CONST TB_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST TB_HIDEBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+4)		/* Hides or shows the specified button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_HITTEST		=		(WM_USER+69)		/* Determines where a point lies in a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_INDETERMINATE		=		(WM_USER+5)		/* Sets or clears the indeterminate state of the specified button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_INSERTBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+21)		/* Inserts a button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_INSERTMARKHITTEST	=		(WM_USER+81)		/* Retrieves the insertion mark information for a point in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_ISBUTTONCHECKED	=		(WM_USER+10)		/* Determines whether the specified button in a toolbar is checked.  */
CONST TB_ISBUTTONENABLED	=		(WM_USER+9)		/* Determines whether the specified button in a toolbar is enabled.  */
CONST TB_ISBUTTONHIDDEN		=		(WM_USER+12)		/* Determines whether the specified button in a toolbar is hidden. */
CONST TB_ISBUTTONHIGHLIGHTED	=		(WM_USER+14)		/* Checks the highlight state of a toolbar button. */
CONST TB_ISBUTTONINDETERMINATE	=		(WM_USER+13)		/* Determines whether the specified button in a toolbar is indeterminate. */
CONST TB_ISBUTTONPRESSED	=		(WM_USER+11)		/* Determines whether the specified button in a toolbar is pressed. */
CONST TB_LINEDOWN		=		1		/* VK_RIGHT or VK_DOWN */
CONST TB_LINEUP			=		0		/* VK_LEFT or VK_UP */
CONST TB_LOADIMAGES		=		(WM_USER+50)		/* Loads system-defined button images into a toolbar control's image list. */
CONST TB_MAPACCELERATOR		=		(WM_USER+78)		/* Determines the ID of the button that corresponds to the specified accelerator character. */
CONST TB_MARKBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+6)		/* Sets the highlight state of a given button in a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_MOVEBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+82)		/* Moves a button from one index to another. */
CONST TB_PAGEDOWN		=		3		/* VK_NEXT (the user clicked the channel below or to the right of the slider) */
CONST TB_PAGEUP			=		2		/* VK_PRIOR (the user clicked the channel above or to the left of the slider) */
CONST TB_PRESSBUTTON		=		(WM_USER+3)		/* Presses or releases the specified button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_REPLACEBITMAP		=		(WM_USER+46)		/* Replaces an existing bitmap with a new bitmap. */
CONST TB_SAVERESTORE		=		(WM_USER+26)		/* Send this message to initiate saving or restoring a toolbar state. */
CONST TB_SETANCHORHIGHLIGHT	=		(WM_USER+73)		/* Sets the anchor highlight setting for a toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETBITMAPSIZE		=		(WM_USER+32)		/* Sets the size of the bitmapped images to be added to a toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETBUTTONINFO		=		(WM_USER+66)		/* Sets the information for an existing button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETBUTTONSIZE		=		(WM_USER+31)		/* Sets the size of the buttons to be added to a toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETBUTTONWIDTH		=		(WM_USER+59)		/* Sets the minimum and maximum button widths in the toolbar control. */
CONST TB_SETCMDID		=		(WM_USER+42)		/* Sets the command identifier of a toolbar button. */
CONST TB_SETCOLORSCHEME		=		(CCM_SETCOLORSCHEME)		/* Sets the color scheme information for the toolbar control. */
CONST TB_SETDISABLEDIMAGELIST	=		(WM_USER+54)		/* Sets the image list that the toolbar control will use to display disabled buttons. */
CONST TB_SETDRAWTEXTFLAGS	=		(WM_USER+70)		/* Sets the text drawing flags for the toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETEXTENDEDSTYLE	=		(WM_USER+84)		/* Sets the extended styles for a toolbar control.  */
CONST TB_SETHOTIMAGELIST	=		(WM_USER+52)		/* Sets the image list that the toolbar control will use to display hot buttons. */
CONST TB_SETHOTITEM		=		(WM_USER+72)		/* Sets the hot item in a toolbar. This message is ignored for toolbar controls that do not have the TBSTYLE_FLAT style. */
CONST TB_SETIMAGELIST		=		(WM_USER+48)		/* Sets the image list that the toolbar will use to display buttons that are in their default state. */
CONST TB_SETINDENT		=		(WM_USER+47)		/* Sets the indentation for the first button in a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_SETINSERTMARK		=		(WM_USER+80)		/* Sets the current insertion mark for the toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETINSERTMARKCOLOR	=		(WM_USER+88)		/* Sets the color used to draw the insertion mark for the toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETMAXTEXTROWS		=		(WM_USER+60)		/* Sets the maximum number of text rows displayed on a toolbar button. */
CONST TB_SETMETRICS		=		(WM_USER+102)		/* Sets the metrics of a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_SETPADDING		=		(WM_USER+87)		/* Sets the padding for a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_SETPARENT		=		(WM_USER+37)		/* Sets the window to which the toolbar control sends notification messages. */
CONST TB_SETROWS		=		(WM_USER+39)		/* Sets the number of rows of buttons in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETSTATE		=		(WM_USER+17)		/* Sets the state for the specified button in a toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETSTYLE		=		(WM_USER+56)		/* Sets the style for a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_SETTOOLTIPS		=		(WM_USER+36)		/* Associates a ToolTip control with a toolbar. */
CONST TB_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST TB_SETWINDOWTHEME		=		(CCM_SETWINDOWTHEME)		/* Sets the visual style of a toolbar control. */
CONST TB_THUMBPOSITION		=		4		/* WM_LBUTTONUP following a TB_THUMBTRACK notification message */
CONST TB_THUMBTRACK		=		5		/* Slider movement (the user dragged the slider) */
CONST TB_TOP			=		6		/* VK_HOME */
CONST TBCD_CHANNEL		=		0x3		/* Identifies the channel that the trackbar control's thumb marker slides along. */
CONST TBCD_THUMB		=		0x2		/* Identifies the trackbar control's thumb marker. This is the part of the control that the user moves. */
CONST TBCD_TICS			=		0x1		/* Identifies the tick marks that are displayed along the trackbar control's edge. */
CONST TBM_CLEARSEL		=		(WM_USER+19)		/* Clears the current selection range in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_CLEARTICS		=		(WM_USER+9)		/* Removes the current tick marks from a trackbar. This message does not remove the first and last tick marks, which are created automatically by the trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETBUDDY		=		(WM_USER+33)		/* Retrieves the handle to a trackbar control buddy window at a given location. The specified location is relative to the control's orientation (horizontal or vertical).  */
CONST TBM_GETCHANNELRECT	=		(WM_USER+26)		/* Retrieves the size and position of the bounding rectangle for a trackbar's channel. (The channel is the area over which the slider moves. It contains the highlight when a range is selected.)  */
CONST TBM_GETLINESIZE		=		(WM_USER+24)		/* Retrieves the number of logical positions the trackbar's slider moves in response to keyboard input from the arrow keys, such as the or keys. The logical positions are the integer increments in the trackbar's range of minimum to maximum slider posit */
CONST TBM_GETNUMTICS		=		(WM_USER+16)		/* Retrieves the number of tick marks in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETPAGESIZE		=		(WM_USER+22)		/* Retrieves the number of logical positions the trackbar's slider moves in response to keyboard input, such as the or keys, or mouse input, such as clicks in the trackbar's channel. */
CONST TBM_GETPOS		=		(WM_USER)		/* Retrieves the current logical position of the slider in a trackbar. The logical positions are the integer values in the trackbar's range of minimum to maximum slider positions. */
CONST TBM_GETPTICS		=		(WM_USER+14)		/* Retrieves the address of an array that contains the positions of the tick marks for a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETRANGEMAX		=		(WM_USER+2)		/* Retrieves the maximum position for the slider in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETRANGEMIN		=		(WM_USER+1)		/* Retrieves the minimum position for the slider in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETSELEND		=		(WM_USER+18)		/* Retrieves the ending position of the current selection range in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETSELSTART		=		(WM_USER+17)		/* Retrieves the starting position of the current selection range in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETTHUMBLENGTH	=		(WM_USER+28)		/* Retrieves the length of the slider in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETTHUMBRECT		=		(WM_USER+25)		/* Retrieves the size and position of the bounding rectangle for the slider in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETTIC		=		(WM_USER+3)		/* Retrieves the logical position of a tick mark in a trackbar. The logical position can be any of the integer values in the trackbar's range of minimum to maximum slider positions. */
CONST TBM_GETTICPOS		=		(WM_USER+15)		/* Retrieves the current physical position of a tick mark in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETTOOLTIPS		=		(WM_USER+30)		/* Retrieves the current physical position of a tick mark in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST TBM_SETBUDDY		=		(WM_USER+32)		/* Assigns a window as the buddy window for a trackbar control. Trackbar buddy windows are automatically displayed in a location relative to the control's orientation (horizontal or vertical). */
CONST TBM_SETLINESIZE		=		(WM_USER+23)		/* Sets the number of logical positions the trackbar's slider moves in response to keyboard input from the arrow keys, such as the or keys. The logical positions are the integer increments in the trackbar's range of minimum to maximum slider positions. */
CONST TBM_SETPAGESIZE		=		(WM_USER+21)		/* Sets the number of logical positions the trackbar's slider moves in response to keyboard input, such as the or keys, or mouse input, such as clicks in the trackbar's channel. */
CONST TBM_SETPOS		=		(WM_USER+5)		/* Sets the current logical position of the slider in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_SETRANGE		=		(WM_USER+6)		/* Sets the range of minimum and maximum logical positions for the slider in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_SETRANGEMAX		=		(WM_USER+8)		/* Sets the maximum logical position for the slider in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_SETRANGEMIN		=		(WM_USER+7)		/* Sets the minimum logical position for the slider in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_SETSEL		=		(WM_USER+10)		/* Sets the starting and ending positions for the available selection range in a trackbar. */
CONST TBM_SETSELEND		=		(WM_USER+12)		/* Sets the ending logical position of the current selection range in a trackbar. This message is ignored if the trackbar does not have the TBS_ENABLESELRANGE style. */
CONST TBM_SETSELSTART		=		(WM_USER+11)		/* Sets the starting logical position of the current selection range in a trackbar. This message is ignored if the trackbar does not have the TBS_ENABLESELRANGE style. */
CONST TBM_SETTHUMBLENGTH	=		(WM_USER+27)		/* Sets the length of the slider in a trackbar. This message is ignored if the trackbar does not have the TBS_FIXEDLENGTH style. */
CONST TBM_SETTIC		=		(WM_USER+4)		/* Sets a tick mark in a trackbar at the specified logical position. */
CONST TBM_SETTICFREQ		=		(WM_USER+20)		/* Sets the interval frequency for tick marks in a trackbar. For example, if the frequency is set to two, a tick mark is displayed for every other increment in the trackbar's range. */
CONST TBM_SETTIPSIDE		=		(WM_USER+31)		/* Positions a ToolTip control used by a trackbar control. Trackbar controls that use the TBS_TOOLTIPS style display ToolTips. */
CONST TBM_SETTOOLTIPS		=		(WM_USER+29)		/* Assigns a ToolTip control to a trackbar control.  */
CONST TBM_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control.  */
CONST TBN_FIRST			=		-700
CONST TBN_BEGINADJUST		=		(TBN_FIRST-3)		/* Notifies a toolbar's parent window that the user has begun customizing a toolbar. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_BEGINDRAG		=		(TBN_FIRST-1)		/* Notifies a toolbar's parent window that the user has begun dragging a button in a toolbar. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_CUSTHELP		=		(TBN_FIRST-9)		/* Notifies a toolbar's parent window that the user has chosen the Help button in the Customize Toolbar dialog box. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_DELETINGBUTTON	=		(TBN_FIRST-15)		/* Sent by a toolbar control when a button is about to be deleted. */
CONST TBN_DRAGOUT		=		(TBN_FIRST-14)		/* Sent by a toolbar control when the user clicks a button and then moves the cursor off the button. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_DROPDOWN		=		(TBN_FIRST-10)		/* Sent by a toolbar control when the user clicks a dropdown button. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_ENDADJUST		=		(TBN_FIRST-4)		/* Notifies a toolbar's parent window that the user has stopped customizing a toolbar. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_ENDDRAG		=		(TBN_FIRST-2)		/* Notifies the toolbar's parent window that the user has stopped dragging a button in a toolbar. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_GETBUTTONINFO		=		(TBN_FIRST-0)		/* Retrieves toolbar customization information and notifies the toolbar's parent window of any changes being made to the toolbar. This is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_GETDISPINFO		=		(TBN_FIRST-16)		/* Retrieves display information for a toolbar item. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_GETINFOTIP		=		(TBN_FIRST-18)		/* Retrieves infotip information for a toolbar item. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_GETOBJECT		=		(TBN_FIRST-12)		/* Sent by a toolbar control that uses the TBSTYLE_REGISTERDROP style to request a drop target object when the pointer passes over one of its buttons. */
CONST TBN_HOTITEMCHANGE		=		(TBN_FIRST-13)		/* Sent by a toolbar control when the hot (highlighted) item changes. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_INITCUSTOMIZE		=		(TBN_FIRST-23)		/* Notifies a toolbar's parent window that customizing has started. */
CONST TBN_LAST			=		-720
CONST TBN_QUERYDELETE		=		(TBN_FIRST-7)		/* Notifies the toolbar's parent window whether a button may be deleted from a toolbar while the user is customizing the toolbar. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_QUERYINSERT		=		(TBN_FIRST-6)		/* Notifies the toolbar's parent window whether a button may be inserted to the left of the specified button while the user is customizing a toolbar. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_RESET			=		(TBN_FIRST-5)		/* Notifies the toolbar's parent window that the user has reset the content of the Customize Toolbar dialog box. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBN_RESTORE		=		(TBN_FIRST-21)		/* Notifies a toolbar's parent window that a toolbar is in the process of being restored. */
CONST TBN_SAVE			=		(TBN_FIRST-22)		/* Notifies a toolbar's parent window that a toolbar is in the process of being saved. */
CONST TBN_TOOLBARCHANGE		=		(TBN_FIRST-8)		/* Notifies the toolbar's parent window that the user has customized a toolbar. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TBS_AUTOTICKS		=		0x0001		/* The trackbar control has a tick mark for each increment in its range of values. */
CONST TBS_BOTH			=		0x0008		/* The trackbar control displays tick marks on both sides of the control. This will be both top and bottom when used with TBS_HORZ or both left and right if used with TBS_VERT. */
CONST TBS_BOTTOM		=		0x0000		/* The trackbar control displays tick marks below the control. This style is valid only with TBS_HORZ.  */
CONST TBS_DOWNISLEFT		=		0x0400		/* By default, the trackbar control uses down equal to right and up equal to left. Use the TBS_DOWNISLEFT style to reverse the default, making down equal left and up equal right.  */
CONST TBS_ENABLESELRANGE	=		0x0020		/* The trackbar control displays a selection range only. The tick marks at the starting and ending positions of a selection range are displayed as triangles (instead of vertical dashes), and the selection range is highlighted. */
CONST TBS_FIXEDLENGTH		=		0x0040		/* The trackbar control allows the size of the slider to be changed with the TBM_SETTHUMBLENGTH message. */
CONST TBS_HORZ			=		0x0000		/* The trackbar control is oriented horizontally. This is the default orientation. */
CONST TBS_LEFT			=		0x0004		/* The trackbar control displays tick marks to the left of the control. This style is valid only with TBS_VERT. */
CONST TBS_NOTHUMB		=		0x0080		/* The trackbar control does not display a slider. */
CONST TBS_NOTICKS		=		0x0010		/* The trackbar control does not display any tick marks. */
CONST TBS_REVERSED		=		0x0200		/* Version 5.80.This style bit is used for "reversed" trackbars, where a smaller number indicates "higher" and a larger number indicates "lower." It has no effect on the control */
CONST TBS_RIGHT			=		0x0000		/* The trackbar control displays tick marks to the right of the control. This style is valid only with TBS_VERT. */
CONST TBS_TOOLTIPS		=		0x0100		/* Version 4.70. The trackbar control supports ToolTips. When a trackbar control is created using this style, it automatically creates a default ToolTip control that displays the slider's current position. */
CONST TBS_TOP			=		0x0004		/* The trackbar control displays tick marks above the control. This style is valid only with TBS_HORZ. */
CONST TBS_VERT			=		0x0002		/* The trackbar control is oriented vertically. */
CONST TBSTATE_CHECKED		=		0x1		/* The button has the TBSTYLE_CHECK style and is being clicked. */
CONST TBSTATE_ELLIPSES		=		0x40		/* Version 4.70. The button's text is cut off and an ellipsis is displayed. */
CONST TBSTATE_ENABLED		=		0x4		/* The button accepts user input. A button that doesn't have this state is grayed. */
CONST TBSTATE_HIDDEN		=		0x8		/* The button is not visible and cannot receive user input. */
CONST TBSTATE_INDETERMINATE	=		0x10		/* The button is grayed. */
CONST TBSTATE_MARKED		=		0x80		/* Version 4.71. The button is marked. The interpretation of a marked item is dependent upon the application.  */
CONST TBSTATE_PRESSED		=		0x2		/* The button is being clicked. */
CONST TBSTATE_WRAP		=		0x20		/* The button is followed by a line break. The button must also have the TBSTATE_ENABLED state. */
CONST TBSTYLE_ALTDRAG		=		0x400		/* Allows users to change a toolbar button's position by dragging it while holding down the ALT key. If this style is not specified, the user must hold down the SHIFT key while dragging a button. */
CONST TBSTYLE_AUTOSIZE		=		0x10		/* Equivalent to BTNS_AUTOSIZE. Use TBSTYLE_AUTOSIZE for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST TBSTYLE_BUTTON		=		0x0		/* Equivalent to BTNS_BUTTON. Use TBSTYLE_BUTTON for version 4.72 and earlier.  */
CONST TBSTYLE_CHECK		=		0x2		/* Equivalent to BTNS_CHECK. Use TBSTYLE_CHECK for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST TBSTYLE_CUSTOMERASE	=		0x2000		/* Version 4.70. Generates NM_CUSTOMDRAW notification messages when the toolbar processes WM_ERASEBKGND messages. */
CONST TBSTYLE_DROPDOWN		=		0x8		/* Equivalent to BTNS_DROPDOWN. Use TBSTYLE_DROPDOWN for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST TBSTYLE_EX_DOUBLEBUFFER	=		0x80		/* Version 6. This style requires the toolbar to be double buffered. Double buffering is a mechanism that detects when the toolbar has changed. */
CONST TBSTYLE_EX_DRAWDDARROWS	=		0x1		/* Version 4.71. This style allows buttons to have a separate dropdown arrow. Buttons that have the BTNS_DROPDOWN style will be drawn with a drop-down arrow in a separate section, to the right of the button. */
CONST TBSTYLE_EX_HIDECLIPPEDBUTTONS	=	0x10		/* Version 5.81. This style hides partially clipped buttons. The most common use of this style is for toolbars that are part of a rebar control. If an adjacent band covers part of a button, the button will not be displayed. */
CONST TBSTYLE_EX_MIXEDBUTTONS	=		0x8		/* Version 5.81. This style allows you to set text for all buttons, but only display it for those buttons with the BTNS_SHOWTEXT button style. The TBSTYLE_LIST style must also be set. */
CONST TBSTYLE_FLAT		=		0x800		/* Version 4.70. Creates a flat toolbar. In a flat toolbar, both the toolbar and the buttons are transparent and hot-tracking is enabled. Button text appears under button bitmaps. */
CONST TBSTYLE_GROUP		=		0x4		/* Equivalent to BTNS_GROUP. Use TBSTYLE_GROUP for version 4.72 and earlier.  */
CONST TBSTYLE_LIST		=		0x1000		/* Version 4.70. Creates a flat toolbar with button text to the right of the bitmap. Otherwise, this style is identical to TBSTYLE_FLAT. To prevent repainting problems, this style should be set before the toolbar control becomes visible. */
CONST TBSTYLE_NOPREFIX		=		0x20		/* Equivalent to BTNS_NOPREFIX. Use TBSTYLE_NOPREFIX for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST TBSTYLE_REGISTERDROP	=		0x4000		/* Version 4.71. Generates TBN_GETOBJECT notification messages to request drop target objects when the cursor passes over toolbar buttons. */
CONST TBSTYLE_SEP		=		0x1		/* Equivalent to BTNS_SEP. Use TBSTYLE_SEP for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST TBSTYLE_TOOLTIPS		=		0x100		/* Creates a ToolTip control that an application can use to display descriptive text for the buttons in the toolbar. */
CONST TBSTYLE_TRANSPARENT	=		0x8000		/* Version 4.71. Creates a transparent toolbar. In a transparent toolbar, the toolbar is transparent but the buttons are not. Button text appears under button bitmaps.  */
CONST TBSTYLE_WRAPABLE		=		0x200		/* Creates a toolbar that can have multiple lines of buttons. Toolbar buttons can "wrap" to the next line when the toolbar becomes too narrow to include all buttons on the same line. */
CONST TBSTYLE_CHECKGROUP	=		(TBSTYLE_GROUP|TBSTYLE_CHECK)		/* Equivalent to BTNS_CHECKGROUP. Use TBSTYLE_CHECKGROUP for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST BTNS_AUTOSIZE		=		(TBSTYLE_AUTOSIZE)		/* Version 5.80. Specifies that the toolbar control should not assign the standard width to the button. Instead, the button's width will be calculated based on the width of the text plus the image of the button. */
CONST BTNS_BUTTON		=		(TBSTYLE_BUTTON)	/* Version 5.80. Creates a standard button. Use the equivalent style flag, TBSTYLE_BUTTON, for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST BTNS_CHECK		=		(TBSTYLE_CHECK)		/* Version 5.80. Creates a dual-state push button that toggles between the pressed and nonpressed states each time the user clicks it. The button has a different background color when it is in the pressed state. */
CONST BTNS_CHECKGROUP		=		(TBSTYLE_CHECKGROUP)		/* Version 5.80. Creates a button that stays pressed until another button in the group is pressed, similar to option buttons (also known as radio buttons). It is equivalent to combining BTNS_CHECK and BTNS_GROUP. */
CONST BTNS_DROPDOWN		=		(TBSTYLE_DROPDOWN)		/* Version 5.80. Creates a drop-down style button that can display a list when the button is clicked. Instead of the WM_COMMAND message used for normal buttons, drop-down buttons send a TBN_DROPDOWN notification. */
CONST BTNS_GROUP		=		(TBSTYLE_GROUP)		/* Version 5.80. When combined with BTNS_CHECK, creates a button that stays pressed until another button in the group is pressed. Use the equivalent style flag, TBSTYLE_GROUP, for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST BTNS_NOPREFIX		=		(TBSTYLE_NOPREFIX)		/* Version 5.80. Specifies that the button text will not have an accelerator prefix associated with it. Use the equivalent style flag, TBSTYLE_NOPREFIX, for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST BTNS_SEP			=		(TBSTYLE_SEP)		/* Version 5.80. Creates a separator, providing a small gap between button groups. A button that has this style does not receive user input. Use the equivalent style flag, TBSTYLE_SEP, for version 4.72 and earlier. */
CONST BTNS_SHOWTEXT		=		0x40		/* Version 5.81. Specifies that button text should be displayed. All buttons can have text, but only those buttons with the BTNS_SHOWTEXT button style will display it.  */
CONST BTNS_WHOLEDROPDOWN	=		0x80		/* Version 5.80. Specifies that the button will have a drop-down arrow, but not as a separate section. Buttons with this style behave the same, regardless of whether the TBSTYLE_EX_DRAWDDARROWS extended style is set. */
CONST TC_CP_STROKE		=		0x00000004		/* Device is capable of stroke clip precision */
CONST TC_CR_90			=		0x00000008		/* Device is capable of 90-degree character rotation */
CONST TC_CR_ANY			=		0x00000010		/* Device is capable of any character rotation */
CONST TC_EA_DOUBLE		=		0x00000200		/* Device can draw double-weight characters */
CONST TC_IA_ABLE		=		0x00000400		/* Device can italicize */
CONST TC_OP_CHARACTER		=		0x00000001		/* Device is capable of character output precision */
CONST TC_OP_STROKE		=		0x00000002		/* Device is capable of stroke output precision */
CONST TC_RA_ABLE		=		0x00002000		/* Device can draw raster fonts */
CONST TC_RESERVED		=		0x00008000		/* Reserved; must be zero */
CONST TC_SA_CONTIN		=		0x00000100		/* Device uses any multiples for exact character scaling */
CONST TC_SA_DOUBLE		=		0x00000040		/* Device is capable of doubled character for scaling */
CONST TC_SA_INTEGER		=		0x00000080		/* Device uses integer multiples only for character scaling */
CONST TC_SCROLLBLT		=		0x00010000		/* Device cannot scroll using a bit-block transfer. Note that this meaning may be the opposite of what you expect */
CONST TC_SF_X_YINDEP		=		0x00000020		/* Device can scale independently in the x- and y-directions */
CONST TC_SO_ABLE		=		0x00001000		/* Device can draw strikeouts */
CONST TC_UA_ABLE		=		0x00000800		/* Device can underline */
CONST TC_VA_ABLE		=		0x00004000		/* Device can draw vector fonts */
CONST TCIS_BUTTONPRESSED	=		0x1		/* Version 4.70. The tab control item is selected. This state is only meaningful if the TCS_BUTTONS style flag has been set. */
CONST TCIS_HIGHLIGHTED		=		0x2		/* Version 4.71. The tab control item is highlighted, and the tab and text are drawn using the current highlight color. When using high-color, this will be a true interpolation, not a dithered color. */
CONST TCM_FIRST			=		0x1300
CONST TCM_ADJUSTRECT		=		(TCM_FIRST+40)		/* Calculates a tab control's display area given a window rectangle, or calculates the window rectangle that would correspond to a specified display area. */
CONST TCM_DELETEALLITEMS	=		(TCM_FIRST+9)		/* Removes all items from a tab control. */
CONST TCM_DELETEITEM		=		(TCM_FIRST+8)		/* Removes an item from a tab control. */
CONST TCM_DESELECTALL		=		(TCM_FIRST+50)		/* Resets items in a tab control, clearing any that were set to the TCIS_BUTTONPRESSED state. */
CONST TCM_GETCURFOCUS		=		(TCM_FIRST+47)		/* Returns the index of the item that has the focus in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETCURSEL		=		(TCM_FIRST+11)		/* Determines the currently selected tab in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETEXTENDEDSTYLE	=		(TCM_FIRST+53)		/* Retrieves the extended styles that are currently in use for the tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETIMAGELIST		=		(TCM_FIRST+2)		/* Retrieves the image list associated with a tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETITEM		=		(TCM_FIRST+5)		/* Retrieves information about a tab in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETITEMCOUNT		=		(TCM_FIRST+4)		/* Retrieves the number of tabs in the tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETITEMRECT		=		(TCM_FIRST+10)		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle for a tab in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETROWCOUNT		=		(TCM_FIRST+44)		/* Retrieves the current number of rows of tabs in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETTOOLTIPS		=		(TCM_FIRST+45)		/* Retrieves the handle to the ToolTip control associated with a tab control. */
CONST TCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST TCM_HIGHLIGHTITEM		=		(TCM_FIRST+51)		/* Sets the highlight state of a tab item. */
CONST TCM_HITTEST		=		(TCM_FIRST+13)		/* Determines which tab, if any, is at a specified screen position. */
CONST TCM_INSERTITEM		=		(TCM_FIRST+7)		/* Inserts a new tab in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_REMOVEIMAGE		=		(TCM_FIRST+42)		/* Removes an image from a tab control's image list. */
CONST TCM_SETCURFOCUS		=		(TCM_FIRST+48)		/* Sets the focus to a specified tab in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_SETCURSEL		=		(TCM_FIRST+12)		/* Selects a tab in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_SETEXTENDEDSTYLE	=		(TCM_FIRST+52)		/* Sets the extended styles that the tab control will use. */
CONST TCM_SETIMAGELIST		=		(TCM_FIRST+3)		/* Assigns an image list to a tab control. */
CONST TCM_SETITEM		=		(TCM_FIRST+6)		/* Sets some or all of a tab's attributes. */
CONST TCM_SETITEMEXTRA		=		(TCM_FIRST+14)		/* Sets the number of bytes per tab reserved for application-defined data in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_SETITEMSIZE		=		(TCM_FIRST+41)		/* Sets the width and height of tabs in a fixed-width or owner-drawn tab control. */
CONST TCM_SETMINTABWIDTH	=		(TCM_FIRST+49)		/* Sets the minimum width of items in a tab control.  */
CONST TCM_SETPADDING		=		(TCM_FIRST+43)		/* Sets the amount of space (padding) around each tab's icon and label in a tab control. */
CONST TCM_SETTOOLTIPS		=		(TCM_FIRST+46)		/* Assigns a ToolTip control to a tab control.  */
CONST TCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST TCN_FIRST			=		-550
CONST TCN_FOCUSCHANGE		=		(TCN_FIRST-4)		/* Notifies a tab control's parent window that the button focus has changed. */
CONST TCN_GETOBJECT		=		(TCN_FIRST-3)		/* Sent by a tab control when it has the TCS_EX_REGISTERDROP extended style and an object is dragged over a tab item in the control. */
CONST TCN_KEYDOWN		=		(TCN_FIRST-0)		/* Notifies a tab control's parent window that a key has been pressed. */
CONST TCN_LAST			=		-580
CONST TCN_SELCHANGE		=		(TCN_FIRST-1)		/* Notifies a tab control's parent window that the currently selected tab has changed. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TCN_SELCHANGING		=		(TCN_FIRST-2)		/* Notifies a tab control's parent window that the currently selected tab is about to change. This message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TCS_BOTTOM		=		0x2		/* Version 4.70. Tabs appear at the bottom of the control. This value equals TCS_RIGHT. This style is not supported if you use ComCtl32.dll version 6. */
CONST TCS_BUTTONS		=		0x100		/* Tabs appear as buttons, and no border is drawn around the display area. */
CONST TCS_EX_FLATSEPARATORS	=		0x1		/* Version 4.71. The tab control will draw separators between the tab items. This extended style only affects tab controls that have the TCS_BUTTONS and TCS_FLATBUTTONS styles. */
CONST TCS_EX_REGISTERDROP	=		0x2		/* Version 4.71. The tab control generates TCN_GETOBJECT notification messages to request a drop target object when an object is dragged over the tab items in the control. The application must call CoInitialize or OleInitialize before setting this styl */
CONST TCS_FIXEDWIDTH		=		0x400		/* All tabs are the same width. This style cannot be combined with the TCS_RIGHTJUSTIFY style. */
CONST TCS_FLATBUTTONS		=		0x8		/* Version 4.71. Selected tabs appear as being indented into the background while other tabs appear as being on the same plane as the background. This style only affects tab controls with the TCS_BUTTONS style. */
CONST TCS_FOCUSNEVER		=		0x8000		/* The tab control does not receive the input focus when clicked. */
CONST TCS_FOCUSONBUTTONDOWN	=		0x1000		/* The tab control receives the input focus when clicked. */
CONST TCS_FORCEICONLEFT		=		0x10		/* Icons are aligned with the left edge of each fixed-width tab. This style can only be used with the TCS_FIXEDWIDTH style. */
CONST TCS_FORCELABELLEFT	=		0x20		/* Labels are aligned with the left edge of each fixed-width tab; that is, the label is displayed immediately to the right of the icon instead of being centered.  */
CONST TCS_HOTTRACK		=		0x40		/* Version 4.70. Items under the pointer are automatically highlighted. You can check whether or not hot tracking is enabled by calling SystemParametersInfo. */
CONST TCS_MULTILINE		=		0x200		/* Multiple rows of tabs are displayed, if necessary, so all tabs are visible at once. */
CONST TCS_MULTISELECT		=		0x4		/* Version 4.70. Multiple tabs can be selected by holding down when clicking. This style must be used with the TCS_BUTTONS style. */
CONST TCS_OWNERDRAWFIXED	=		0x2000		/* The parent window is responsible for drawing tabs. */
CONST TCS_RAGGEDRIGHT		=		0x800		/* Rows of tabs will not be stretched to fill the entire width of the control. This style is the default. */
CONST TCS_RIGHT			=		0x2		/* Version 4.70. Tabs appear vertically on the right side of controls that use the TCS_VERTICAL style. This value equals TCS_BOTTOM. This style is not supported if you use visual styles. */
CONST TCS_RIGHTJUSTIFY		=		0x0		/* The width of each tab is increased, if necessary, so that each row of tabs fills the entire width of the tab control. This window style is ignored unless the TCS_MULTILINE style is also specified. */
CONST TCS_SCROLLOPPOSITE	=		0x1		/* Version 4.70. Unneeded tabs scroll to the opposite side of the control when a tab is selected. */
CONST TCS_SINGLELINE		=		0x0		/* Only one row of tabs is displayed. The user can scroll to see more tabs, if necessary. This style is the default. */
CONST TCS_TABS			=		0x0		/* Tabs appear as tabs, and a border is drawn around the display area. This style is the default. */
CONST TCS_TOOLTIPS		=		0x4000		/* The tab control has a ToolTip control associated with it.  */
CONST TCS_VERTICAL		=		0x80		/* Version 4.70. Tabs appear at the left side of the control, with tab text displayed vertically. This style is valid only when used with the TCS_MULTILINE style. To make tabs appear on the right side of the control, also use the TCS_RIGHT style. */
CONST TECHNOLOGY		=		2		/* Returns the device technology (DT).  */
CONST TEXTCAPS			=		34		/* Value that indicates the text capabilities of the device */
CONST TH32CS_INHERIT		=		0x80000000		/* Indicates that the snapshot handle is to be inheritable. */
CONST TH32CS_SNAPHEAPLIST	=		0x00000001		/* Includes all heaps of the process specified in th32ProcessID in the snapshot. To enumerate the heaps, see Heap32ListFirst. */
CONST TH32CS_SNAPMODULE		=		0x00000008		/* Includes all modules of the process specified in th32ProcessID in the snapshot. To enumerate the modules, see Module32First. */
CONST TH32CS_SNAPMODULE32	=		0x00000010
CONST TH32CS_SNAPPROCESS	=		0x00000002		/* Includes all processes in the system in the snapshot. To enumerate the processes, see Process32First. */
CONST TH32CS_SNAPTHREAD		=		0x00000004		/* Includes all threads in the system in the snapshot. To enumerate the threads, see Thread32First.  */
CONST TH32CS_SNAPALL		=		(TH32CS_SNAPHEAPLIST|TH32CS_SNAPPROCESS|TH32CS_SNAPTHREAD|TH32CS_SNAPMODULE)		/* Includes all processes and threads in the system, plus the heaps and modules of the process specified in th32ProcessID. Equivalent to specifying the TH32CS_SNAPHEAPLIST, TH32CS_SNAPMODULE, TH32CS_SNAPPROCESS, and TH32CS_SNAPTHREAD values. */
CONST THAI_CHARSET		=		222
CONST TME_HOVER			=		0x1
CONST TME_LEAVE			=		0x2
CONST TPM_BOTTOMALIGN		=		0x20		/* If this flag is set, the function positions the shortcut menu so that its bottom side is aligned with the coordinate specified by the y parameter. */
CONST TPM_CENTERALIGN		=		4		/* If this flag is set, the function centers the shortcut menu horizontally relative to the coordinate specified by the x parameter. */
CONST TPM_HORIZONTAL		=		0		/* If the menu cannot be shown at the specified location without overlapping the excluded rectangle, the system tries to accommodate the requested horizontal alignment before the requested vertical alignment. */
CONST TPM_LEFTALIGN		=		0		/* If this flag is set, the function positions the shortcut menu so that its left side is aligned with the coordinate specified by the x parameter. */
CONST TPM_LEFTBUTTON		=		0		/* If this flag is set, the user can select menu items with only the left mouse button. */
CONST TPM_NONOTIFY		=		0x80		/* If this flag is set, the function does not send notification messages when the user clicks on a menu item. */
CONST TPM_RETURNCMD		=		0x100		/* If this flag is set, the function returns the menu item identifier of the user's selection in the return value. */
CONST TPM_RIGHTALIGN		=		8		/* Positions the shortcut menu so that its right side is aligned with the coordinate specified by the x parameter. */
CONST TPM_RIGHTBUTTON		=		2		/* If this flag is set, the user can select menu items with both the left and right mouse buttons. */
CONST TPM_TOPALIGN		=		0		/* If this flag is set, the function positions the shortcut menu so that its top side is aligned with the coordinate specified by the y parameter. */
CONST TPM_VCENTERALIGN		=		0x10		/* If this flag is set, the function centers the shortcut menu vertically relative to the coordinate specified by the y parameter. */
CONST TPM_VERTICAL		=		0x40		/* If the menu cannot be shown at the specified location without overlapping the excluded rectangle, the system tries to accommodate the requested vertical alignment before the requested horizontal alignment. */
CONST TRUETYPE_FONTTYPE		=		0x004
CONST TRUNCATE_EXISTING		=		5
CONST TTDT_AUTOMATIC		=		0
CONST TTDT_AUTOPOP		=		2
CONST TTDT_INITIAL		=		3
CONST TTDT_RESHOW		=		1
CONST TTM_ACTIVATE		=		(WM_USER+1)		/* Activates or deactivates a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_ADDTOOL		=		(WM_USER+4)		/* Registers a tool with a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_ADJUSTRECT		=		(WM_USER+31)		/* Calculates a ToolTip control's text display rectangle from its window rectangle, or the ToolTip window rectangle needed to display a specified text display rectangle.  */
CONST TTM_DELTOOL		=		(WM_USER+5)		/* Removes a tool from a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_ENUMTOOLS		=		(WM_USER+14)		/* Retrieves the information that a ToolTip control maintains about the current tool—that is, the tool for which the ToolTip is currently displaying text. */
CONST TTM_GETBUBBLESIZE		=		(WM_USER+30)		/* Returns the width and height of a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_GETCURRENTTOOL	=		(WM_USER+15)		/* Retrieves the information for the current tool in a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_GETDELAYTIME		=		(WM_USER+21)		/* Retrieves the initial, pop-up, and reshow durations currently set for a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_GETMARGIN		=		(WM_USER+27)		/* Retrieves the top, left, bottom, and right margins set for a ToolTip window. A margin is the distance, in pixels, between the ToolTip window border and the text contained within the ToolTip window. */
CONST TTM_GETMAXTIPWIDTH	=		(WM_USER+25)		/* Retrieves the maximum width for a ToolTip window. */
CONST TTM_GETTEXT		=		(WM_USER+11)		/* Retrieves the information a ToolTip control maintains about a tool. */
CONST TTM_GETTITLE		=		(WM_USER+35)		/* Retrieve information concerning the title of a tooltip control. */
CONST TTM_GETTIPBKCOLOR		=		(WM_USER+22)		/* Retrieves the background color in a ToolTip window. */
CONST TTM_GETTIPTEXTCOLOR	=		(WM_USER+23)		/* Retrieves the text color in a ToolTip window. */
CONST TTM_GETTOOLCOUNT		=		(WM_USER+13)		/* Retrieves a count of the tools maintained by a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_GETTOOLINFO		=		(WM_USER+8)		/* Retrieves the information that a ToolTip control maintains about a tool. */
CONST TTM_HITTEST		=		(WM_USER+10)		/* Tests a point to determine whether it is within the bounding rectangle of the specified tool and, if it is, retrieves information about the tool. */
CONST TTM_NEWTOOLRECT		=		(WM_USER+6)		/* Sets a new bounding rectangle for a tool. */
CONST TTM_POP			=		(WM_USER+28)		/* Removes a displayed ToolTip window from view. */
CONST TTM_POPUP			=		(WM_USER+34)		/* Causes the ToolTip to display at the coordinates of the last mouse message. */
CONST TTM_RELAYEVENT		=		(WM_USER+7)		/* Passes a mouse message to a ToolTip control for processing. */
CONST TTM_SETDELAYTIME		=		(WM_USER+3)		/* Sets the initial, pop-up, and reshow durations for a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_SETMARGIN		=		(WM_USER+26)		/* Sets the top, left, bottom, and right margins for a ToolTip window. A margin is the distance, in pixels, between the ToolTip window border and the text contained within the ToolTip window. */
CONST TTM_SETMAXTIPWIDTH	=		(WM_USER+24)		/* Sets the maximum width for a ToolTip window. */
CONST TTM_SETTIPBKCOLOR		=		(WM_USER+19)		/* Sets the background color in a ToolTip window. */
CONST TTM_SETTIPTEXTCOLOR	=		(WM_USER+20)		/* Sets the text color in a ToolTip window. */
CONST TTM_SETTITLE		=		(WM_USER+32)		/* Adds a standard icon and title string to a ToolTip. */
CONST TTM_SETTOOLINFO		=		(WM_USER+9)		/* Sets the information that a ToolTip control maintains for a tool. */
CONST TTM_SETWINDOWTHEME	=		(CCM_SETWINDOWTHEME)		/* Sets the visual style of a ToolTip control. */
CONST TTM_TRACKACTIVATE		=		(WM_USER+17)		/* Activates or deactivates a tracking ToolTip. */
CONST TTM_TRACKPOSITION		=		(WM_USER+18)		/* Sets the position of a tracking ToolTip. */
CONST TTM_UPDATE		=		(WM_USER+29)		/* Forces the current tool to be redrawn. */
CONST TTM_UPDATETIPTEXT		=		(WM_USER+12)		/* Sets the ToolTip text for a tool. */
CONST TTM_WINDOWFROMPOINT	=		(WM_USER+16)		/* Allows a subclass procedure to cause a ToolTip to display text for a window other than the one beneath the mouse cursor. */
CONST TTN_FIRST			=		-520
CONST TTN_GETDISPINFO		=		(TTN_FIRST-0)		/* Sent by a ToolTip control to retrieve information needed to display a ToolTip window. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TTN_LAST			=		-549
CONST TTN_LINKCLICK		=		(TTN_FIRST-3)		/* Sent when a text link inside a balloon ToolTip is clicked.  */
CONST TTN_NEEDTEXT		=		(TTN_GETDISPINFO)		/* Sent by a ToolTip control to retrieve information needed to display a ToolTip window. This notification is identical to TTN_GETDISPINFO. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TTN_POP			=		(TTN_FIRST-2)		/* Notifies the owner window that a ToolTip is about to be hidden. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TTN_SHOW			=		(TTN_FIRST-1)		/* Notifies the owner window that a ToolTip control is about to be displayed. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TTS_ALWAYSTIP		=		0x1		/* Indicates that the ToolTip control appears when the cursor is on a tool, even if the ToolTip control's owner window is inactive. Without this style, the ToolTip appears only when the tool's owner window is active. */
CONST TTS_BALLOON		=		0x40		/* Version 5.80. Indicates that the ToolTip control has the appearance of a cartoon "balloon," with rounded corners and a stem pointing to the item. */
CONST TTS_CLOSE			=		0x80		/* XP themes  Include the appropriate manifest */
CONST TTS_NOANIMATE		=		0x10		/* Version 5.80. Disables sliding ToolTip animation on Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows 2000 systems. This style is ignored on earlier systems. */
CONST TTS_NOFADE		=		0x20		/* Version 5.80. Disables fading ToolTip animation on Windows 2000 systems. This style is ignored on earlier Windows NT systems, and on Windows 95 and Windows 98.  */
CONST TTS_NOPREFIX		=		0x2		/* Prevents the system from stripping the ampersand character from a string. Without this style, the system automatically strips ampersand characters. This allows an application to use the same string as both a menu item and as text in a ToolTip contro */
CONST TURKISH_CHARSET		=		162
CONST TV_FIRST			=		0x1100
CONST TVC_BYKEYBOARD		=		0x2		/* By a keystroke. */
CONST TVC_BYMOUSE		=		0x1		/* By a mouse click. */
CONST TVC_UNKNOWN		=		0		/* Unknown. */
CONST TVE_COLLAPSE		=		0x0001		/* Collapses the list. */
CONST TVE_COLLAPSERESET		=		0x8000		/* Collapses the list and removes the child items. The TVIS_EXPANDEDONCE state flag is reset. This flag must be used with the TVE_COLLAPSE flag. */
CONST TVE_EXPAND		=		0x0002		/* Expands the list. */
CONST TVE_EXPANDPARTIAL		=		0x4000		/* Version 4.70. Partially expands the list. In this state the child items are visible and the parent item's plus sign (+), indicating that it can be expanded, is displayed. This flag must be used in combination with the TVE_EXPAND flag. */
CONST TVE_TOGGLE		=		0x0003		/* Collapses the list if it is expanded or expands it if it is collapsed. */
CONST TVGN_CARET		=		0x9		/* Retrieves the currently selected item. */
CONST TVGN_CHILD		=		0x4		/* Retrieves the first child item of the item specified by the hitem parameter. */
CONST TVGN_DROPHILITE		=		0x8		/* Retrieves the item that is the target of a drag-and-drop operation. */
CONST TVGN_FIRSTVISIBLE		=		0x5		/* Retrieves the first item that is visible in the tree-view window. */
CONST TVGN_LASTVISIBLE		=		0xA		/* Version 4.71. Retrieves the last expanded item in the tree. This does not retrieve the last item visible in the tree-view window. */
CONST TVGN_NEXT			=		0x1		/* Retrieves the next sibling item. */
CONST TVGN_NEXTVISIBLE		=		0x6		/* Retrieves the next visible item that follows the specified item. The specified item must be visible. Use the TVM_GETITEMRECT message to determine whether an item is visible. */
CONST TVGN_PARENT		=		0x3		/* Retrieves the parent of the specified item. */
CONST TVGN_PREVIOUS		=		0x2		/* Retrieves the previous sibling item. */
CONST TVGN_PREVIOUSVISIBLE	=		0x7		/* Retrieves the first visible item that precedes the specified item. The specified item must be visible. Use the TVM_GETITEMRECT message to determine whether an item is visible. */
CONST TVGN_ROOT			=		0		/* Retrieves the topmost or very first item of the tree-view control.  */
CONST TVHT_ABOVE		=		256		/* Above the client area.  */
CONST TVHT_BELOW		=		512		/* Below the client area.  */
CONST TVHT_NOWHERE		=		0x1		/* In the client area, but below the last item. */
CONST TVHT_ONITEMBUTTON		=		16		/* On the button associated with an item.  */
CONST TVHT_ONITEMICON		=		0x2		/* On the bitmap associated with an item.  */
CONST TVHT_ONITEMINDENT		=		0x8		/* In the indentation associated with an item. */
CONST TVHT_ONITEMLABEL		=		0x4		/* On the label (string) associated with an item.  */
CONST TVHT_ONITEMRIGHT		=		32		/* In the area to the right of an item.  */
CONST TVHT_ONITEMSTATEICON	=		64		/* On the state icon for a tree-view item that is in a user-defined state.  */
CONST TVHT_TOLEFT		=		2048		/* To the left of the client area.  */
CONST TVHT_TORIGHT		=		1024		/* To the right of the client area.  */
CONST TVHT_ONITEM		=		(TVHT_ONITEMICON|TVHT_ONITEMLABEL|TVHT_ONITEMSTATEICON)		/* On the bitmap or label associated with an item.  */
CONST TVI_FIRST			=		-65535		/* Inserts the item at the beginning of the list. */
CONST TVI_LAST			=		-65534		/* Inserts the item at the end of the list. */
CONST TVI_ROOT			=		-65536		/* Add the item as a root item. */
CONST TVI_SORT			=		-65533		/* Inserts the item into the list in alphabetical order. */
CONST TVIF_CHILDREN		=		64		/* The cChildren member is valid. */
CONST TVIF_HANDLE		=		16		/* The hItem member is valid. */
CONST TVIF_IMAGE		=		2		/* The iImage member is valid. */
CONST TVIF_INTEGRAL		=		128
CONST TVIF_PARAM		=		4		/* The lParam member is valid. */
CONST TVIF_SELECTEDIMAGE	=		32		/* The iSelectedImage member is valid. */
CONST TVIF_STATE		=		8		/* The state and stateMask members are valid. */
CONST TVIF_TEXT			=		1		/* The pszText and cchTextMax members are valid. */
CONST TVIS_BOLD			=		16		/* The item is bold. */
CONST TVIS_CUT			=		4		/* The item is selected as part of a cut-and-paste operation. */
CONST TVIS_DROPHILITED		=		8		/* The item is selected as a drag-and-drop target. */
CONST TVIS_EXPANDED		=		32		/* The item's list of child items is currently expanded; that is, the child items are visible. This value applies only to parent items. */
CONST TVIS_EXPANDEDONCE		=		64		/* The item's list of child items has been expanded at least once. The TVN_ITEMEXPANDING and TVN_ITEMEXPANDED notification messages are not generated for parent items that have this state set in response to a TVM_EXPAND message. */
CONST TVIS_FOCUSED		=		1
CONST TVIS_OVERLAYMASK		=		0xf00		/* Mask for the bits used to specify the item's overlay image index. */
CONST TVIS_SELECTED		=		2		/* The item is selected. Its appearance depends on whether it has the focus. The item will be drawn using the system colors for selection. */
CONST TVIS_STATEIMAGEMASK	=		0xf000		/* Mask for the bits used to specify the item's state image index. */
CONST TVIS_USERMASK		=		0xf000		/* Same as TVIS_STATEIMAGEMASK. */
CONST TVM_CREATEDRAGIMAGE	=		4370		/* Creates a dragging bitmap for the specified item in a tree-view control. The message also creates an image list for the bitmap and adds the bitmap to the image list. */
CONST TVM_DELETEITEM		=		4353		/* Removes an item and all its children from a tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_EDITLABEL		=		4366		/* Begins in-place editing of the specified item's text, replacing the text of the item with a single-line edit control containing the text. This message implicitly selects and focuses the specified item. */
CONST TVM_ENDEDITLABELNOW	=		4374		/* Ends the editing of a tree-view item's label. */
CONST TVM_ENSUREVISIBLE		=		4372		/* Ensures that a tree-view item is visible, expanding the parent item or scrolling the tree-view control, if necessary. */
CONST TVM_EXPAND		=		4354		/* The TVM_EXPAND message expands or collapses the list of child items associated with the specified parent item, if any. */
CONST TVM_FIRST			=		0x1100
CONST TVM_GETBKCOLOR		=		(TV_FIRST+31)		/* Retrieves the current background color of the control. */
CONST TVM_GETCOUNT		=		4357		/* Retrieves a count of the items in a tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_GETEDITCONTROL	=		4367		/* Retrieves the handle to the edit control being used to edit a tree-view item's text. */
CONST TVM_GETIMAGELIST		=		4360		/* Retrieves the handle to the normal or state image list associated with a tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_GETINDENT		=		4358		/* Retrieves the amount, in pixels, that child items are indented relative to their parent items. */
CONST TVM_GETINSERTMARKCOLOR	=		(TV_FIRST+38)		/* Retrieves the color used to draw the insertion mark for the tree view. */
CONST TVM_GETISEARCHSTRING	=		4375		/* Retrieves the incremental search string for a tree-view control. The tree-view control uses the incremental search string to select an item based on characters typed by the user. */
CONST TVM_GETITEM		=		4364		/* Retrieves some or all of a tree-view item's attributes. */
CONST TVM_GETITEMHEIGHT		=		(TV_FIRST+28)		/* Retrieves the current height of the each tree-view item. */
CONST TVM_GETITEMRECT		=		4356		/* Retrieves the bounding rectangle for a tree-view item and indicates whether the item is visible. */
CONST TVM_GETITEMSTATE		=		(TV_FIRST+39)		/* Retrieves some or all of a tree-view item's state attributes. */
CONST TVM_GETLINECOLOR		=		(TV_FIRST+41)		/* The TVM_GETLINECOLOR message gets the current line color. */
CONST TVM_GETNEXTITEM		=		4362		/* Retrieves the tree-view item that bears the specified relationship to a specified item. */
CONST TVM_GETSCROLLTIME		=		(TV_FIRST+34)		/* Retrieves the maximum scroll time for the tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_GETTEXTCOLOR		=		(TV_FIRST+32)		/* Retrieves the current text color of the control. */
CONST TVM_GETTOOLTIPS		=		(TV_FIRST+25)		/* Retrieves the handle to the child ToolTip control used by a tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_GETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST TVM_GETVISIBLECOUNT	=		4368		/* Obtains the number of items that can be fully visible in the client window of a tree-view control.  */
CONST TVM_HITTEST		=		4369		/* Determines the location of the specified point relative to the client area of a tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_INSERTITEM		=		(TV_FIRST)		/* Inserts a new item in a tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_MAPACCIDTOHTREEITEM	=		(TV_FIRST+42)		/* Maps an accessibility identifier (ID) to an HTREEITEM. */
CONST TVM_MAPHTREEITEMTOACCID	=		(TV_FIRST+43)		/* Maps an HTREEITEM to an accessibility identifier (ID). */
CONST TVM_SELECTITEM		=		4363		/* Selects the specified tree-view item, scrolls the item into view, or redraws the item in the style used to indicate the target of a drag-and-drop operation. */
CONST TVM_SETBKCOLOR		=		(TV_FIRST+29)		/* Sets the background color of the control. */
CONST TVM_SETIMAGELIST		=		4361		/* Sets the normal or state image list for a tree-view control and redraws the control using the new images. */
CONST TVM_SETINDENT		=		4359		/* Sets the width of indentation for a tree-view control and redraws the control to reflect the new width. */
CONST TVM_SETINSERTMARK		=		(TV_FIRST+26)		/* Sets the insertion mark in a tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_SETINSERTMARKCOLOR	=		(TV_FIRST+37)		/* Sets the color used to draw the insertion mark for the tree view. */
CONST TVM_SETITEM		=		4365		/* The TVM_SETITEM message sets some or all of a tree-view item's attributes. */
CONST TVM_SETITEMHEIGHT		=		(TV_FIRST+27)		/* Sets the height of the tree-view items. */
CONST TVM_SETLINECOLOR		=		(TV_FIRST+40)		/* The TVM_SETLINECOLOR message sets the current line color. */
CONST TVM_SETSCROLLTIME		=		(TV_FIRST+33)		/* Sets the maximum scroll time for the tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_SETTEXTCOLOR		=		(TV_FIRST+30)		/* Sets the maximum scroll time for the tree-view control. */
CONST TVM_SETTOOLTIPS		=		(TV_FIRST+24)		/* Sets a tree-view control's child ToolTip control. */
CONST TVM_SETUNICODEFORMAT	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST TVN_SINGLEEXPAND		=		(TVN_FIRST-15)		/* Sent by a tree-view control with the TVS_SINGLEEXPAND style when the user opens or closes a tree item using a single click of the mouse. This notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVM_SORTCHILDREN		=		4371		/* Sorts the child items of the specified parent item in a tree-view control.  */
CONST TVM_SORTCHILDRENCB	=		4373		/* Sorts tree-view items using an application-defined callback function that compares the items. */
CONST TVN_BEGINDRAG		=		-407		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window that a drag-and-drop operation involving the left mouse button is being initiated. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_BEGINLABELEDIT	=		-410		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window about the start of label editing for an item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_BEGINRDRAG		=		-408		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window about the initiation of a drag-and-drop operation involving the right mouse button. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_DELETEITEM		=		-409		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window that an item is being deleted. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_ENDLABELEDIT		=		-411		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window about the end of label editing for an item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_GETDISPINFO		=		-403		/* Requests that a tree-view control's parent window provide information needed to display or sort an item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_GETINFOTIP		=		-413		/* Sent by a tree-view control that has the TVS_INFOTIP style. This notification is sent when the control is requesting additional text information to be displayed in a ToolTip. The notification is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_ITEMEXPANDED		=		-406		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window that a parent item's list of child items has expanded or collapsed. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_ITEMEXPANDING		=		-405		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window that a parent item's list of child items is about to expand or collapse. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_KEYDOWN		=		-412		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window that the user pressed a key and the tree-view control has the input focus. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_SELCHANGED		=		-402		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window that the selection has changed from one item to another. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_SELCHANGING		=		-401		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window that the selection is about to change from one item to another. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVN_SETDISPINFO		=		-404		/* Notifies a tree-view control's parent window that it must update the information it maintains about an item. This notification message is sent in the form of a WM_NOTIFY message. */
CONST TVS_CHECKBOXES		=		0x100		/* Version 4.70. Enables check boxes for items in a tree-view control. A check box is displayed only if an image is associated with the item.  */
CONST TVS_DISABLEDRAGDROP	=		16		/* Prevents the tree-view control from sending TVN_BEGINDRAG notification messages. */
CONST TVS_EDITLABELS		=		8		/* Allows the user to edit the labels of tree-view items. */
CONST TVS_FULLROWSELECT		=		0x1000		/* Version 4.71. Enables full-row selection in the tree view. The entire row of the selected item is highlighted, and clicking anywhere on an item's row causes it to be selected. This style cannot be used in conjunction with the TVS_HASLINES style. */
CONST TVS_HASBUTTONS		=		1		/* Displays plus (+) and minus (-) buttons next to parent items. The user clicks the buttons to expand or collapse a parent item's list of child items. To include buttons with items at the root of the tree view, TVS_LINESATROOT must also be specified.  */
CONST TVS_HASLINES		=		2		/* Uses lines to show the hierarchy of items.  */
CONST TVS_INFOTIP		=		0x800		/* Version 4.71. Obtains ToolTip information by sending the TVN_GETINFOTIP notification. */
CONST TVS_LINESATROOT		=		4		/* Uses lines to link items at the root of the tree-view control. This value is ignored if TVS_HASLINES is not also specified. */
CONST TVS_NOHSCROLL		=		0x8000		/* Version 5.80. Disables horizontal scrolling in the control. The control will not display any horizontal scroll bars.  */
CONST TVS_NONEVENHEIGHT		=		0x4000		/* Version 4.71 Sets the height of the items to an odd height with the TVM_SETITEMHEIGHT message. By default, the height of items must be an even value. */
CONST TVS_NOSCROLL		=		0x2000		/* Version 4.71. Disables both horizontal and vertical scrolling in the control. The control will not display any scroll bars. */
CONST TVS_NOTOOLTIPS		=		0x80		/* Version 4.70. Disables ToolTips. */
CONST TVS_RTLREADING		=		64		/* Version 4.70. Causes text to be displayed from right-to-left (RTL). Usually, windows display text left-to-right (LTR). Windows can be mirrored to display languages such as Hebrew or Arabic that read RTL. */
CONST TVS_SHOWSELALWAYS		=		32		/* Causes a selected item to remain selected when the tree-view control loses focus. */
CONST TVS_SINGLEEXPAND		=		0x400		/* Version 4.71. Causes the item being selected to expand and the item being unselected to collapse upon selection in the tree view. If the mouse is used to single-click the selected item and that item is closed, it will be expanded. */
CONST TVS_TRACKSELECT		=		0x200		/* Version 4.70. Enables hot tracking in a tree-view control. */
CONST UDM_GETACCEL 		=		(WM_USER+108)		/* Retrieves acceleration information for an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_GETBASE 		=		(WM_USER+110)		/* Retrieves the current radix base (that is, either base 10 or 16) for an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_GETBUDDY 		=		(WM_USER+106)		/* Retrieves the handle to the current buddy window. */
CONST UDM_GETPOS 		=		(WM_USER+104)		/* Retrieves the current position of an up-down control with 16-bit precision. */
CONST UDM_GETPOS32 		=		(WM_USER+114)		/* Returns the 32-bit position of an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_GETRANGE 		=		(WM_USER+102)		/* Retrieves the minimum and maximum positions (range) for an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_GETRANGE32 		=		(WM_USER+112)		/* Retrieves the 32-bit range of an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_GETUNICODEFORMAT 	=		(CCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. */
CONST UDM_SETACCEL 		=		(WM_USER+107)		/* Sets the acceleration for an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_SETBASE 		=		(WM_USER+109)		/* Sets the radix base for an up-down control. The base value determines whether the buddy window displays numbers in decimal or hexadecimal digits. Hexadecimal numbers are always unsigned, and decimal numbers are signed. */
CONST UDM_SETBUDDY 		=		(WM_USER+105)		/* Sets the buddy window for an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_SETPOS 		=		(WM_USER+103)		/* Sets the current position for an up-down control with 16-bit precision. */
CONST UDM_SETPOS32 		=		(WM_USER+113)		/* Sets the position of an up-down control with 32-bit precision. */
CONST UDM_SETRANGE 		=		(WM_USER+101)		/* Sets the minimum and maximum positions (range) for an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_SETRANGE32 		=		(WM_USER+111)		/* Sets the 32-bit range of an up-down control. */
CONST UDM_SETUNICODEFORMAT 	=		(CCM_SETUNICODEFORMAT)		/* Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. This message allows you to change the character set used by the control at run time rather than having to re-create the control. */
CONST UDN_FIRST 		=		-721
CONST UDN_DELTAPOS 		=		(UDN_FIRST-1)		/* Sent by the operating system to the parent window of an up-down control when the position of the control is about to change. This happens when the user requests a change in the value by pressing the control's up or down arrow. */
CONST UDN_LAST 			=		-740
CONST UDS_ALIGNLEFT 		=		0x8		/* Positions the up-down control next to the left edge of the buddy window. The buddy window is moved to the right, and its width is decreased to accommodate the width of the up-down control. */
CONST UDS_ALIGNRIGHT 		=		0x4		/* Positions the up-down control next to the right edge of the buddy window. The width of the buddy window is decreased to accommodate the width of the up-down control. */
CONST UDS_ARROWKEYS 		=		0x20		/* Causes the up-down control to increment and decrement the position when the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys are pressed. */
CONST UDS_AUTOBUDDY 		=		0x10		/* Automatically selects the previous window in the z-order as the up-down control's buddy window. */
CONST UDS_HORZ 			=		0x40		/* Causes the up-down control's arrows to point left and right instead of up and down. */
CONST UDS_HOTTRACK 		=		0x100		/* Causes the control to exhibit "hot tracking" behavior. That is, it highlights the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW on the control as the pointer passes over them. This style requires Microsoft Windows 98 or Windows 2000. */
CONST UDS_NOTHOUSANDS 		=		0x80		/* Does not insert a thousands separator between every three decimal digits. */
CONST UDS_SETBUDDYINT 		=		0x2		/* Causes the up-down control to set the text of the buddy window (using the WM_SETTEXT message) when the position changes. The text consists of the position formatted as a decimal or hexadecimal string. */
CONST UDS_WRAP 			=		0x1		/* Causes the position to "wrap" if it is incremented or decremented beyond the ending or beginning of the range. */
CONST ULW_ALPHA			=		0x00000002
CONST ULW_COLORKEY		=		0x00000001
CONST ULW_OPAQUE		=		0x00000004
CONST VERTRES			=		10		/* Return the height, in raster lines, of the screen. */
CONST VERTSIZE			=		6		/* Returns the height, in millimeters, of the physical screen. */
CONST VIETNAMESE_CHARSET	=		163
CONST VIEW_LARGEICONS		=		0		/* Large icons view. */
CONST VIEW_LIST			=		2		/* List view. */
CONST VIEW_NETCONNECT		=		9		/* Connect to network drive. */
CONST VIEW_NETDISCONNECT	=		10		/* Disconnect from network drive. */
CONST VIEW_NEWFOLDER		=		11		/* New folder. */
CONST VIEW_PARENTFOLDER		=		8		/* Go to parent folder. */
CONST VIEW_SMALLICONS		=		1		/* Small icon view. */
CONST VIEW_SORTDATE		=		6		/* Sort by date. */
CONST VIEW_SORTNAME		=		4		/* Sort by name. */
CONST VIEW_SORTSIZE		=		5		/* Sort by size. */
CONST VIEW_SORTTYPE		=		7		/* Sort by type. */
CONST VIEW_VIEWMENU		=		12
CONST VK_0			=		0x30
CONST VK_1			=		0x31
CONST VK_2			=		0x32
CONST VK_3			=		0x33
CONST VK_4			=		0x34
CONST VK_5			=		0x35
CONST VK_6			=		0x36
CONST VK_7			=		0x37
CONST VK_8			=		0x38
CONST VK_9			=		0x39
CONST VK_A			=		0x41
CONST VK_ACCEPT			=		0x1E
CONST VK_ADD			=		0x6B
CONST VK_APPS			=		0x5D
CONST VK_ATTN			=		0xF6
CONST VK_B			=		0x42
CONST VK_BACK			=		0x08
CONST VK_BROWSER_BACK		=		0xA6
CONST VK_BROWSER_FAVORITES	=		0xAB
CONST VK_BROWSER_FORWARD	=		0xA7
CONST VK_BROWSER_HOME		=		0xAC
CONST VK_BROWSER_REFRESH	=		0xA8
CONST VK_BROWSER_SEARCH		=		0xAA
CONST VK_BROWSER_STOP		=		0xA9
CONST VK_C			=		0x43
CONST VK_CANCEL			=		0x03
CONST VK_CAPITAL		=		0x14
CONST VK_CLEAR			=		0x0C
CONST VK_CONTROL		=		0x11
CONST VK_CONVERT		=		0x1C
CONST VK_CRSEL			=		0xF7
CONST VK_D			=		0x44
CONST VK_DECIMAL		=		0x6E
CONST VK_DELETE			=		0x2E
CONST VK_DIVIDE			=		0x6F
CONST VK_DOWN			=		0x28
CONST VK_E			=		0x45
CONST VK_END			=		0x23
CONST VK_EREOF			=		0xF9
CONST VK_ESCAPE			=		0x1B
CONST VK_EXECUTE		=		0x2B
CONST VK_EXSEL			=		0xF8
CONST VK_F			=		0x46
CONST VK_F1			=		0x70
CONST VK_F10			=		0x79
CONST VK_F11			=		0x7A
CONST VK_F12			=		0x7B
CONST VK_F13			=		0x7C
CONST VK_F14			=		0x7D
CONST VK_F15			=		0x7E
CONST VK_F16			=		0x7F
CONST VK_F17			=		0x80
CONST VK_F18			=		0x81
CONST VK_F19			=		0x82
CONST VK_F2			=		0x71
CONST VK_F20			=		0x83
CONST VK_F21			=		0x84
CONST VK_F22			=		0x85
CONST VK_F23			=		0x86
CONST VK_F24			=		0x87
CONST VK_F3			=		0x72
CONST VK_F4			=		0x73
CONST VK_F5			=		0x74
CONST VK_F6			=		0x75
CONST VK_F7			=		0x76
CONST VK_F8			=		0x77
CONST VK_F9			=		0x78
CONST VK_FINAL			=		0x18
CONST VK_G			=		0x47
CONST VK_H			=		0x48
CONST VK_HANGEUL		=		0x15
CONST VK_HANGUL			=		0x15
CONST VK_HANJA			=		0x19
CONST VK_HELP			=		0x2F
CONST VK_HOME			=		0x24
CONST VK_I			=		0x49
CONST VK_ICO_00			=		0xE4
CONST VK_ICO_CLEAR		=		0xE6
CONST VK_ICO_HELP		=		0xE3
CONST VK_INSERT			=		0x2D
CONST VK_J			=		0x4A
CONST VK_JUNJA			=		0x17
CONST VK_K			=		0x4B
CONST VK_KANA			=		0x15
CONST VK_KANJI			=		0x19
CONST VK_L			=		0x4C
CONST VK_LAUNCH_APP1		=		0xB6
CONST VK_LAUNCH_APP2		=		0xB7
CONST VK_LAUNCH_MAIL		=		0xB4
CONST VK_LAUNCH_MEDIA_SELECT	=		0xB5
CONST VK_LBUTTON		=		0x01
CONST VK_LCONTROL		=		0xA2
CONST VK_LEFT			=		0x25
CONST VK_LMENU			=		0xA4
CONST VK_LSHIFT			=		0xA0
CONST VK_LWIN			=		0x5B
CONST VK_M			=		0x4D
CONST VK_MBUTTON		=		0x04
CONST VK_MEDIA_NEXT_TRACK	=		0xB0
CONST VK_MEDIA_PLAY_PAUSE	=		0xB3
CONST VK_MEDIA_PREV_TRACK	=		0xB1
CONST VK_MEDIA_STOP		=		0xB2
CONST VK_MENU			=		0x12
CONST VK_MODECHANGE		=		0x1F
CONST VK_MULTIPLY		=		0x6A
CONST VK_N			=		0x4E
CONST VK_NEXT			=		0x22
CONST VK_NONAME			=		0xFC
CONST VK_NONCONVERT		=		0x1D
CONST VK_NUMLOCK		=		0x90
CONST VK_NUMPAD0		=		0x60
CONST VK_NUMPAD1		=		0x61
CONST VK_NUMPAD2		=		0x62
CONST VK_NUMPAD3		=		0x63
CONST VK_NUMPAD4		=		0x64
CONST VK_NUMPAD5		=		0x65
CONST VK_NUMPAD6		=		0x66
CONST VK_NUMPAD7		=		0x67
CONST VK_NUMPAD8		=		0x68
CONST VK_NUMPAD9		=		0x69
CONST VK_O			=		0x4F
CONST VK_OEM_1			=		0xBA
CONST VK_OEM_102		=		0xE2
CONST VK_OEM_2			=		0xBF
CONST VK_OEM_3			=		0xC0
CONST VK_OEM_4			=		0xDB
CONST VK_OEM_5			=		0xDC
CONST VK_OEM_6			=		0xDD
CONST VK_OEM_7			=		0xDE
CONST VK_OEM_8			=		0xDF
CONST VK_OEM_ATTN		=		0xF0
CONST VK_OEM_AUTO		=		0xF3
CONST VK_OEM_AX			=		0xE1
CONST VK_OEM_BACKTAB		=		0xF5
CONST VK_OEM_CLEAR		=		0xFE
CONST VK_OEM_COMMA		=		0xBC
CONST VK_OEM_COPY		=		0xF2
CONST VK_OEM_CUSEL		=		0xEF
CONST VK_OEM_ENLW		=		0xF4
CONST VK_OEM_FINISH		=		0xF1
CONST VK_OEM_FJ_JISHO		=		0x92
CONST VK_OEM_FJ_LOYA		=		0x95
CONST VK_OEM_FJ_MASSHOU		=		0x93
CONST VK_OEM_FJ_ROYA		=		0x96
CONST VK_OEM_FJ_TOUROKU		=		0x94
CONST VK_OEM_JUMP		=		0xEA
CONST VK_OEM_MINUS		=		0xBD
CONST VK_OEM_NEC_EQUAL		=		0x92
CONST VK_OEM_PA1		=		0xEB
CONST VK_OEM_PA2		=		0xEC
CONST VK_OEM_PA3		=		0xED
CONST VK_OEM_PERIOD		=		0xBE
CONST VK_OEM_PLUS		=		0xBB
CONST VK_OEM_RESET		=		0xE9
CONST VK_OEM_WSCTRL		=		0xEE
CONST VK_P			=		0x50
CONST VK_PA1			=		0xFD
CONST VK_PACKET			=		0xE7
CONST VK_PAUSE			=		0x13
CONST VK_PLAY			=		0xFA
CONST VK_PRINT			=		0x2A
CONST VK_PRIOR			=		0x21
CONST VK_PROCESSKEY		=		0xE5
CONST VK_Q			=		0x51
CONST VK_R			=		0x52
CONST VK_RBUTTON		=		0x02
CONST VK_RCONTROL		=		0xA3
CONST VK_RETURN			=		0x0D
CONST VK_RIGHT			=		0x27
CONST VK_RMENU			=		0xA5
CONST VK_RSHIFT			=		0xA1
CONST VK_RWIN			=		0x5C
CONST VK_S			=		0x53
CONST VK_SCROLL			=		0x91
CONST VK_SELECT			=		0x29
CONST VK_SEPARATOR		=		0x6C
CONST VK_SHIFT			=		0x10
CONST VK_SLEEP			=		0x5F
CONST VK_SNAPSHOT		=		0x2C
CONST VK_SPACE			=		0x20
CONST VK_SUBTRACT		=		0x6D
CONST VK_T			=		0x54
CONST VK_TAB			=		0x09
CONST VK_U			=		0x55
CONST VK_UP			=		0x26
CONST VK_V			=		0x56
CONST VK_VOLUME_DOWN		=		0xAE
CONST VK_VOLUME_MUTE		=		0xAD
CONST VK_VOLUME_UP		=		0xAF
CONST VK_W			=		0x57
CONST VK_X			=		0x58
CONST VK_XBUTTON1		=		0x05
CONST VK_XBUTTON2		=		0x06
CONST VK_Y			=		0x59
CONST VK_Z			=		0x5A
CONST VK_ZOOM			=		0xFB
CONST VREFRESH			=		116
CONST VTA_BASELINE		=		(TA_BASELINE)		/* The reference point will be on the base line of the text. */
CONST VTA_BOTTOM		=		(TA_RIGHT)
CONST VTA_CENTER		=		(TA_CENTER)		/* The reference point will be aligned vertically with the center of the bounding rectangle. */
CONST VTA_LEFT			=		(TA_BOTTOM)
CONST VTA_RIGHT			=		(TA_TOP)
CONST VTA_TOP			=		(TA_LEFT)
CONST WAVE_FORMAT_DIRECT	=		0x0008
CONST WAVE_MAPPED		=		0x0004
CONST WAVE_MAPPER		=		-1
CONST WB_CLASSIFY		=		3		/* Returns the character class and word-break flags of the character at the specified position. */
CONST WB_ISDELIMITER		=		2		/* Returns TRUE if the character at the specified position is a delimiter, or FALSE otherwise. */
CONST WB_LEFT			=		0		/* Finds the nearest character before the specified position that begins a word. */
CONST WB_LEFTBREAK		=		6		/* Finds the next word end before the specified position. This value is the same as WB_PREVBREAK. */
CONST WB_MOVEWORDLEFT		=		4		/* Finds the next character that begins a word before the specified position. This value is used during CTRL+LEFT ARROW key processing. This value is the similar to WB_MOVEWORDPREV. */
CONST WB_MOVEWORDNEXT		=		5		/*  */
CONST WB_MOVEWORDPREV		=		4
CONST WB_MOVEWORDRIGHT		=		5		/* Finds the next character that begins a word after the specified position. This value is used during CTRL+right key processing. This value is similar to WB_MOVEWORDNEXT. */
CONST WB_NEXTBREAK		=		7
CONST WB_PREVBREAK		=		6
CONST WB_RIGHT			=		1		/* Finds the next character that begins a word after the specified position. */
CONST WB_RIGHTBREAK		=		7		/* Finds the next end-of-word delimiter after the specified position. This value is the same as WB_NEXTBREAK. */
CONST WHITE_BRUSH		=		0		/* White brush. */
CONST WHITE_PEN			=		6		/* White pen. */
CONST WHITENESS			=		0x00FF0062
CONST WM_ACTIVATE		=		0x0006		/* The WM_ACTIVATE message is sent to both the window being activated and the window being deactivated. */
CONST WM_ACTIVATEAPP		=		0x001C		/* The WM_ACTIVATEAPP message is sent when a window belonging to a different application than the active window is about to be activated. */
CONST WM_ACTIVATETOPLEVEL	=		0x036E		/* This message is sent to a top-level window when a window in its "top-level group" is either activated or deactivated. A window is part of a top-level group if it is a top-level window (no parent or owner), or it is owned by such a window. */
CONST WM_AFXFIRST		=		0x0360
CONST WM_AFXLAST		=		0x037F
CONST WM_APP			=		0x8000		/* The WM_APP constant is used by applications to help define private messages, usually of the form WM_APP+X, where X is an integer value. */
CONST WM_APPCOMMAND		=		0x0319		/* The WM_APPCOMMAND message notifies a window that the user generated an application command event, for example, by clicking an application command button using the mouse or typing an application command key on the keyboard. */
CONST WM_ASKCBFORMATNAME	=		0x030C		/* The WM_ASKCBFORMATNAME message is sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window to request the name of a CF_OWNERDISPLAY clipboard format. */
CONST WM_CAPTURECHANGED		=		0x215		/* The WM_CAPTURECHANGED message is sent to the window that is losing the mouse capture. */
CONST WM_CHANGECBCHAIN		=		0x30D		/* The WM_CHANGECBCHAIN message is sent to the first window in the clipboard viewer chain when a window is being removed from the chain. */
CONST WM_CHANGEUISTATE		=		0x127		/* An application sends the WM_CHANGEUISTATE message to indicate that the user interface (UI) state should be changed. */
CONST WM_CHAR			=		0x102		/* The WM_CHAR message is posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_KEYDOWN message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. The WM_CHAR message contains the character code of the key that was pressed. */
CONST WM_CHARTOITEM		=		0x2F		/* The WM_CHARTOITEM message is sent by a list box with the style to its owner in response to a WM_CHAR message. */
CONST WM_CHILDACTIVATE		=		0x22		/* The WM_CHILDACTIVATE message is sent to a child window when the user clicks the windowapos;s title bar or when the window is activated, moved, or sized. */
CONST WM_CHOOSEFONT_GETLOGFONT	=		(WM_USER+1)		/* An application sends the WM_CHOOSEFONT_GETLOGFONT message to a Font dialog box to retrieve information about the user's current font selections. */
CONST WM_CHOOSEFONT_SETFLAGS	=		(WM_USER+102)		/* An application sends the WM_CHOOSEFONT_SETFLAGS message to a Font dialog box to set the display options for the dialog box. */
CONST WM_CHOOSEFONT_SETLOGFONT	=		(WM_USER+101)		/* An application sends the WM_CHOOSEFONT_SETLOGFONT message to a Font dialog box to set the current logical font information. */
CONST WM_CLEAR			=		0x303		/* An application sends a WM_CLEAR message to an edit control or combo box to delete (clear) the current selection, if any, from the edit control. */
CONST WM_CLOSE			=		0x10		/* The WM_CLOSE message is sent as a signal that a window or an application should terminate. */
CONST WM_COMMAND		=		0x111		/* The WM_COMMAND message is sent when the user selects a command item from a menu, when a control sends a notification message to its parent window, or when an accelerator keystroke is translated. */
CONST WM_COMMNOTIFY		=		0x44		/* NO LONGER SUPORTED */
CONST WM_COMPACTING		=		0x41		/* The WM_COMPACTING message is sent to all top-level windows when the system detects more than 12.5 percent of system time over a 30- to 60-second interval is being spent compacting memory. This indicates that system memory is low. */
CONST WM_COMPAREITEM		=		0x39		/* The system sends the WM_COMPAREITEM message to determine the relative position of a new item in the sorted list of an owner-drawn combo box or list box. Whenever the application adds a new item, */
CONST WM_CONTEXTMENU		=		0x7B		/* The WM_CONTEXTMENU message notifies a window that the user clicked the right mouse button in the window. */
CONST WM_CONVERTREQUEST		=		0x10A
CONST WM_CONVERTREQUESTEX	=		0x108
CONST WM_CONVERTRESULT		=		0x10B
CONST WM_COPY			=		0x301		/* An application sends the WM_COPY message to an edit control or combo box to copy the current selection to the clipboard in CF_TEXT format. */
CONST WM_COPYDATA		=		0x4A		/* An application sends the WM_COPYDATA message to pass data to another application. */
CONST WM_CPL_LAUNCH		=		(WM_USER+1000)		/* Not currently supported. */
CONST WM_CPL_LAUNCHED		=		(WM_USER+1001)		/* Not currently supported. */
CONST WM_CREATE			=		0x1		/* The WM_CREATE message is sent when an application requests that a window be created by calling the CreateWindowEx or CreateWindow function. */
CONST WM_CTLCOLOR		=		0x19		/* Replaced by the following messages WM_CTLCOLORBTN, WM_CTLCOLORDLG, WM_CTLCOLOREDIT, WM_CTLCOLORLISTBOX, WM_CTLCOLORSCROLLBAR, WM_CTLCOLORSTATIC */
CONST WM_CTLCOLORBTN		=		0x135		/* The WM_CTLCOLORBTN message is sent to the parent window of a button before drawing the button. */
CONST WM_CTLCOLORDLG		=		0x136		/* The WM_CTLCOLORDLG message is sent to a dialog box before the system draws the dialog box. By responding to this message, the dialog box can set its text and background colors using the specified display device context handle. */
CONST WM_CTLCOLOREDIT		=		0x133		/* An edit control that is not read-only or disabled sends the WM_CTLCOLOREDIT message to its parent window when the control is about to be drawn. */
CONST WM_CTLCOLORLISTBOX	=		0x134		/* The WM_CTLCOLORLISTBOX message is sent to the parent window of a list box before the system draws the list box. */
CONST WM_CTLCOLORMSGBOX		=		0x132		/* NO LONGER SUPORTED */
CONST WM_CTLCOLORSCROLLBAR	=		0x137		/* The WM_CTLCOLORSCROLLBAR message is sent to the parent window of a scroll bar control when the control is about to be drawn. */
CONST WM_CTLCOLORSTATIC		=		0x138		/* A static control, or an edit control that is read-only or disabled, sends the WM_CTLCOLORSTATIC message to its parent window when the control is about to be drawn. */
CONST WM_CUT			=		0x300		/* An application sends a WM_CUT message to an edit control or combo box to delete (cut) the current selection, if any, in the edit control and copy the deleted text to the clipboard in CF_TEXT format. */
CONST WM_DDE_FIRST		=		0x3E0
CONST WM_DDE_ACK		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+4)
CONST WM_DDE_ADVISE		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+2)
CONST WM_DDE_DATA		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+5)
CONST WM_DDE_EXECUTE		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+8)
CONST WM_DDE_INITIATE		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST)
CONST WM_DDE_LAST		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+8)
CONST WM_DDE_POKE		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+7)
CONST WM_DDE_REQUEST		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+6)
CONST WM_DDE_TERMINATE		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+1)
CONST WM_DDE_UNADVISE		=		(WM_DDE_FIRST+3)
CONST WM_DEADCHAR		=		0x103		/* The WM_DEADCHAR message is posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_KEYUP message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. WM_DEADCHAR specifies a character code generated by a dead key. */
CONST WM_DELETEITEM		=		0x2D		/* The WM_DELETEITEM message is sent to the owner of a list box or combo box when the list box or combo box is destroyed or when items are removed by the LB_DELETESTRING, LB_RESETCONTENT, CB_DELETESTRING, or CB_RESETCONTENT message. */
CONST WM_DESTROY		=		0x2		/* The WM_DESTROY message is sent when a window is being destroyed. It is sent to the window procedure of the window being destroyed after the window is removed from the screen. */
CONST WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD	=		0x307		/* The WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD message is sent to the clipboard owner when a call to the EmptyClipboard function empties the clipboard. */
CONST WM_DEVICECHANGE		=		0x219		/* The WM_DEVICECHANGE device message notifies an application of a change to the hardware configuration of a device or the computer. */
CONST WM_DEVMODECHANGE		=		0x1B		/* The WM_DEVMODECHANGE message is sent to all top-level windows whenever the user changes device-mode settings. */
CONST WM_DISPLAYCHANGE		=		0x7E		/* The WM_DISPLAYCHANGE message is sent to all windows when the display resolution has changed. */
CONST WM_DRAWCLIPBOARD		=		0x308		/* The WM_DRAWCLIPBOARD message is sent to the first window in the clipboard viewer chain when the content of the clipboard changes. This enables a clipboard viewer window to display the new content of the clipboard. */
CONST WM_DRAWITEM		=		0x2B		/* The WM_DRAWITEM message is sent to the parent window of an owner-drawn button, combo box, list box, or menu when a visual aspect of the button, combo box, list box, or menu has changed. */
CONST WM_DROPFILES		=		0x233		/* Sent when the user drops a file on the window of an application that has registered itself as a recipient of dropped files. */
CONST WM_ENABLE			=		0xA		/* The WM_ENABLE message is sent when an application changes the enabled state of a window. It is sent to the window whose enabled state is changing. */
CONST WM_ENDSESSION		=		0x16		/* The WM_ENDSESSION message is sent to an application after the system processes the results of the WM_QUERYENDSESSION message. The WM_ENDSESSION message informs the application whether the session is ending. */
CONST WM_ENTERIDLE		=		0x121		/* The WM_ENTERIDLE message is sent to the owner window of a modal dialog box or menu that is entering an idle state. A modal dialog box or menu enters an idle state when no messages are waiting in its queue after it has processed  previous messages. */
CONST WM_ENTERMENULOOP		=		0x211		/* The WM_ENTERMENULOOP message informs an applicationapos;s main window procedure that a menu modal loop has been entered. */
CONST WM_ENTERSIZEMOVE		=		0x231		/* The WM_ENTERSIZEMOVE message is sent one time to a window after it enters the moving or sizing modal loop. */
CONST WM_ERASEBKGND		=		0x14		/* The WM_ERASEBKGND message is sent when the window background must be erased (for example, when a window is resized). The message is sent to prepare an invalidated portion of a window for painting. */
CONST WM_EXITMENULOOP		=		0x212		/* The WM_EXITMENULOOP message informs an application's main window procedure that a menu modal loop has been exited. */
CONST WM_EXITSIZEMOVE		=		0x232		/* The WM_EXITSIZEMOVE message is sent one time to a window, after it has exited the moving or sizing modal loop. */
CONST WM_FONTCHANGE		=		0x1D		/* An application sends the WM_FONTCHANGE message to all top-level windows in the system after changing the pool of font resources. */
CONST WM_FORWARDMSG		=		0x37F
CONST WM_GETDLGCODE		=		0x87		/* The WM_GETDLGCODE message is sent to the window procedure associated with a control. By default, the system handles all keyboard input to the control; the system interprets certain types of keyboard input as dialog box navigation keys. */
CONST WM_GETFONT		=		0x31		/* An application sends a WM_GETFONT message to a control to retrieve the font with which the control is currently drawing its text. */
CONST WM_GETHOTKEY		=		0x33		/* An application sends a WM_GETHOTKEY message to determine the hot key associated with a window. */
CONST WM_GETICON		=		0x7F		/* The WM_GETICON message is sent to a window to retrieve a handle to the large or small icon associated with a window. The system displays the large icon in the ALT+TAB dialog, and the small icon in the window caption. */
CONST WM_GETMINMAXINFO		=		0x24		/* The WM_GETMINMAXINFO message is sent to a window when the size or position of the window is about to change. */
CONST WM_GETOBJECT		=		0x3D		/* Active Accessibility sends the WM_GETOBJECT message to obtain information about an accessible object contained in a server application. */
CONST WM_GETTEXT		=		0xD		/* An application sends a WM_GETTEXT message to copy the text that corresponds to a window into a buffer provided by the caller. */
CONST WM_GETTEXTLENGTH		=		0xE		/* An application sends a WM_GETTEXTLENGTH message to determine the length, in characters, of the text associated with a window. */
CONST WM_HANDHELDFIRST		=		0x358
CONST WM_HANDHELDLAST		=		0x35F
CONST WM_HELP			=		0x53		/* Indicates that the user pressed the F1 key. If a menu is active when F1 is pressed, WM_HELP is sent to the window associated with the menu; otherwise, WM_HELP is sent to the window that has the keyboard focus. */
CONST WM_HOTKEY			=		0x312		/* The WM_HOTKEY message is posted when the user presses a hot key registered by the RegisterHotKey function. The message is placed at the top of the message queue associated with the thread that registered the hot key. */
CONST WM_HSCROLL		=		0x114		/* The WM_HSCROLL message is sent to a window when a scroll event occurs in the windowapos;s standard horizontal scroll bar. This message is also sent to the owner of a horizontal scroll bar control when a scroll event occurs in the control. */
CONST WM_HSCROLLCLIPBOARD	=		0x30E		/* The WM_HSCROLLCLIPBOARD message is sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window. */
CONST WM_ICONERASEBKGND		=		0x27		/* The WM_ICONERASEBKGND message is sent to a minimized window when the background of the icon must be filled before painting the icon. This message is not sent by newer versions of Windows. */
CONST WM_IME_CHAR		=		0x286		/* The WM_IME_CHAR message is sent to an application when the IME gets a character of the conversion result. */
CONST WM_IME_COMPOSITION	=		0x10F		/* The WM_IME_COMPOSITION message is sent to an application when the IME changes composition status as a result of a keystroke. An application should process this message if it displays composition characters itself. */
CONST WM_IME_COMPOSITIONFULL	=		0x284		/* The WM_IME_COMPOSITIONFULL message is sent to an application when the IME window finds no space to extend the area for the composition window. */
CONST WM_IME_CONTROL		=		0x283		/* The WM_IME_CONTROL message directs the IME window to carry out the requested command. An application uses this message to control the IME window created by the application. */
CONST WM_IME_ENDCOMPOSITION	=		0x10E		/* The WM_IME_ENDCOMPOSITION message is sent to an application when the IME ends composition. An application should process this message if it displays composition characters itself. */
CONST WM_IME_KEYDOWN		=		0x290		/* The WM_IME_KEYDOWN message is sent to an application by the IME to notify the application of a key press. An application can process this message or pass it to the DefWindowProc function to generate a matching WM_KEYDOWN message. */
CONST WM_IME_KEYLAST		=		0x10F
CONST WM_IME_KEYUP		=		0x291		/* The WM_IME_KEYUP message is sent to an application by the IME to notify the application of a key release. An application can process this message or pass it to the DefWindowProc function to generate a matching WM_KEYUP message. */
CONST WM_IME_NOTIFY		=		0x282		/* The WM_IME_NOTIFY message is sent to an application to notify it of changes to the IME window. An application processes this message if it is responsible for managing the IME window. */
CONST WM_IME_REPORT		=		0x280
CONST WM_IME_REQUEST		=		0x288		/* The WM_IME_REQUEST message provides a group of commands to request information from an application. */
CONST WM_IME_SELECT		=		0x285		/* The WM_IME_SELECT message is sent to an application when the system is about to change the current IME. */
CONST WM_IME_SETCONTEXT		=		0x281		/* The WM_IME_SETCONTEXT message is sent to an application when a window of the application is activated. If the application has created an IME window, it should call the ImmIsUIMessage function. */
CONST WM_IME_STARTCOMPOSITION	=		0x10D		/* The WM_IME_STARTCOMPOSITION message is sent immediately before the IME generates the composition string as a result of a keystroke. The message is a notification to an IME window to open its composition window. */
CONST WM_IMEKEYDOWN		=		0x290
CONST WM_IMEKEYUP		=		0x291
CONST WM_INITDIALOG		=		0x110		/* The WM_INITDIALOG message is sent to the dialog box procedure immediately before a dialog box is displayed. Dialog box procedures typically use this message to initialize controls and carry out any other initialization tasks that affect the appearan */
CONST WM_INITMENU		=		0x116		/* The WM_INITMENU message is sent when a menu is about to become active. It occurs when the user clicks an item on the menu bar or presses a menu key. This allows the application to modify the menu before it is displayed. */
CONST WM_INITMENUPOPUP		=		0x117		/* The WM_INITMENUPOPUP message is sent when a drop-down menu or submenu is about to become active. This allows an application to modify the menu before it is displayed, without changing the entire menu. */
CONST WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE	=		0x51		/* The WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE message is sent to the topmost affected window after an application's input language has been changed. */
CONST WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST	=		0x50		/* The WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST message is posted to the window with the focus when the user chooses a new input language, either with the hotkey (specified in the Keyboard control panel application) or from the indicator on the system taskbar. */
CONST WM_INTERIM		=		0x10C
CONST WM_KEYDOWN		=		0x100		/* The WM_KEYDOWN message is posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a nonsystem key is pressed. A nonsystem key is a key that is pressed when the ALT key is pressed. */
CONST WM_KEYFIRST		=		0x100
CONST WM_KEYLAST		=		0x108
CONST WM_KEYUP			=		0x101		/* The WM_KEYUP message is posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a nonsystem key is released. A nonsystem key is a key that is pressed when the ALT key is pressed, or a keyboard key that is pressed when a window has the keyboard focus. */
CONST WM_KILLFOCUS		=		0x8		/* The WM_KILLFOCUS message is sent to a window immediately before it loses the keyboard focus */
CONST WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK		=		0x203		/* The WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the left mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_LBUTTONDOWN		=		0x201		/* The WM_LBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the left mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_LBUTTONUP		=		0x202		/* The WM_LBUTTONUP message is posted when the user releases the left mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK		=		0x209		/* The WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_MBUTTONDOWN		=		0x207		/* The WM_MBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_MBUTTONUP		=		0x208		/* The WM_MBUTTONUP message is posted when the user releases the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_MDIACTIVATE		=		0x222		/* An application sends the WM_MDIACTIVATE message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to instruct the client window to activate a different MDI child window. */
CONST WM_MDICASCADE		=		0x227		/* An application sends the WM_MDICASCADE message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to arrange all its child windows in a cascade format. */
CONST WM_MDICREATE		=		0x220		/* An application sends the WM_MDICREATE message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to create an MDI child window. */
CONST WM_MDIDESTROY		=		0x221		/* An application sends the WM_MDIDESTROY message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to close an MDI child window. */
CONST WM_MDIGETACTIVE		=		0x229		/* An application sends the WM_MDIGETACTIVE message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to retrieve the handle to the active MDI child window. */
CONST WM_MDIICONARRANGE		=		0x228		/* An application sends the WM_MDIICONARRANGE message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to arrange all minimized MDI child windows. It does not affect child windows that are not minimized. */
CONST WM_MDIMAXIMIZE		=		0x225		/* An application sends the WM_MDIMAXIMIZE message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to maximize an MDI child window. The system resizes the child window to make its client area fill the client window. */
CONST WM_MDINEXT		=		0x224		/* An application sends the WM_MDINEXT message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to activate the next or previous child window. */
CONST WM_MDIREFRESHMENU		=		0x234		/* An application sends the WM_MDIREFRESHMENU message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to refresh the window menu of the MDI frame window. */
CONST WM_MDIRESTORE		=		0x223		/* An application sends the WM_MDIRESTORE message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to restore an MDI child window from maximized or minimized size. */
CONST WM_MDISETMENU		=		0x230		/* An application sends the WM_MDISETMENU message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to replace the entire menu of an MDI frame window, to replace the window menu of the frame window, or both. */
CONST WM_MDITILE		=		0x226		/* An application sends the WM_MDITILE message to a multiple-document interface (MDI) client window to arrange all of its MDI child windows in a tile format. */
CONST WM_MEASUREITEM		=		0x2C		/* The WM_MEASUREITEM message is sent to the owner window of a combo box, list box, list view control, or menu item when the control or menu is created. */
CONST WM_MENUCHAR		=		0x120		/* The WM_MENUCHAR message is sent when a menu is active and the user presses a key that does not correspond to any mnemonic or accelerator key. This message is sent to the window that owns the menu. */
CONST WM_MENUCOMMAND		=		0x126		/* The WM_MENUCOMMAND message is sent when the user makes a selection from a menu. */
CONST WM_MENUDRAG		=		0x123		/* The WM_MENUDRAG message is sent to the owner of a drag-and-drop menu when the user drags a menu item. */
CONST WM_MENUGETOBJECT		=		0x124		/* The WM_MENUGETOBJECT message is sent to the owner of a drag-and-drop menu when the mouse cursor enters a menu item or moves from the center of the item to the top or bottom of the item. */
CONST WM_MENURBUTTONUP		=		0x122		/* The WM_MENURBUTTONUP message is sent when the user releases the right mouse button while the cursor is on a menu item. */
CONST WM_MENUSELECT		=		0x11F		/* The WM_MENUSELECT message is sent to a menu's owner window when the user selects a menu item. */
CONST WM_MOUSEACTIVATE		=		0x21		/* The WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message is sent when the cursor is in an inactive window and the user presses a mouse button. The parent window receives this message only if the child window passes it to the DefWindowProc function. */
CONST WM_MOUSEFIRST		=		0x200
CONST WM_MOUSEHOVER		=		0x2A1		/* The WM_MOUSEHOVER message is posted to a window when the cursor hovers over the client area of the window for the period of time specified in a prior call to TrackMouseEvent. */
CONST WM_MOUSELAST		=		0x209
CONST WM_MOUSELEAVE		=		0x2A3		/* The WM_MOUSELEAVE message is posted to a window when the cursor leaves the client area of the window specified in a prior call to TrackMouseEvent. */
CONST WM_MOUSEMOVE		=		0x200		/* The WM_MOUSEMOVE message is posted to a window when the cursor moves. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse. */
CONST WM_MOUSEWHEEL		=		0x20A		/* The WM_MOUSEWHEEL message is sent to the focus window when the mouse wheel is rotated. The DefWindowProc function propagates the message to the window's parent. */
CONST WM_MOVE			=		0x3		/* The WM_MOVE message is sent after a window has been moved. */
CONST WM_MOVING			=		0x216		/* The WM_MOVING message is sent to a window that the user is moving. By processing this message, an application can monitor the position of the drag rectangle and, if needed, change its position. */
CONST WM_NCACTIVATE		=		0x86		/* The WM_NCACTIVATE message is sent to a window when its nonclient area needs to be changed to indicate an active or inactive state. */
CONST WM_NCCALCSIZE		=		0x83		/* The WM_NCCALCSIZE message is sent when the size and position of a window's client area must be calculated. By processing this message, an application can control the content of the window's client area when the size or position of the window changes */
CONST WM_NCCREATE		=		0x81		/* The WM_NCCREATE message is sent prior to the WM_CREATE message when a window is first created. */
CONST WM_NCDESTROY		=		0x82		/* The WM_NCDESTROY message informs a window that its nonclient area is being destroyed. The DestroyWindow function sends the WM_NCDESTROY message to the window following the WM_DESTROY message. */
CONST WM_NCHITTEST		=		0x84		/* The WM_NCHITTEST message is sent to a window when the cursor moves, or when a mouse button is pressed or released. If the mouse is not captured, the message is sent to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCLBUTTONDBLCLK	=		0xA3		/* The WM_NCLBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the left mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN		=		0xA1		/* The WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the left mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCLBUTTONUP		=		0xA2		/* The WM_NCLBUTTONUP message is posted when the user releases the left mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCMBUTTONDBLCLK	=		0xA9		/* The WM_NCMBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCMBUTTONDOWN		=		0xA7		/* The WM_NCMBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCMBUTTONUP		=		0xA8		/* The WM_NCMBUTTONUP message is posted when the user releases the middle mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCMOUSEHOVER		=		0x2A0		/* The WM_NCMOUSEHOVER message is posted to a window when the cursor hovers over the nonclient area of the window for the period of time specified in a prior call to TrackMouseEvent. */
CONST WM_NCMOUSELEAVE		=		0x2A2		/* The WM_NCMOUSELEAVE message is posted to a window when the cursor leaves the nonclient area of the window specified in a prior call to TrackMouseEvent. */
CONST WM_NCMOUSEMOVE		=		0xA0		/* The WM_NCMOUSEMOVE message is posted to a window when the cursor is moved within the nonclient area of the window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. If a window has captured the mouse, this message is not posted. */
CONST WM_NCPAINT		=		0x85		/* The WM_NCPAINT message is sent to a window when its frame must be painted. */
CONST WM_NCRBUTTONDBLCLK	=		0xA6		/* The WM_NCRBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the right mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN		=		0xA4		/* The WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the right mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCRBUTTONUP		=		0xA5		/* The WM_NCRBUTTONUP message is posted when the user releases the right mouse button while the cursor is within the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCXBUTTONDBLCLK	=		0xAD		/* The WM_NCXBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the first or second X button while the cursor is in the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCXBUTTONDOWN		=		0xAB		/* The WM_NCXBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the first or second X button while the cursor is in the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NCXBUTTONUP		=		0xAC		/* The WM_NCXBUTTONUP message is posted when the user releases the first or second X button while the cursor is in the nonclient area of a window. This message is posted to the window that contains the cursor. */
CONST WM_NEXTDLGCTL		=		0x28		/* The WM_NEXTDLGCTL message is sent to a dialog box procedure to set the keyboard focus to a different control in the dialog box. */
CONST WM_NEXTMENU		=		0x213		/* The WM_NEXTMENU message is sent to an application when the right or left arrow key is used to switch between the menu bar and the system menu. */
CONST WM_NOTIFY			=		0x4E		/* The WM_NOTIFY message is sent by a common control to its parent window when an event has occurred or the control requires some information. */
CONST WM_NOTIFYFORMAT		=		0x55		/* Used to determine if a window accepts ANSI or Unicode structures in the WM_NOTIFY notification message. WM_NOTIFYFORMAT messages are sent from a common control to its parent window and from the parent window to the common control. */
CONST WM_NULL			=		0x0		/* The WM_NULL message performs no operation. An application sends the WM_NULL message if it wants to post a message that the recipient window will ignore. */
CONST WM_OTHERWINDOWCREATED	=		0x42
CONST WM_OTHERWINDOWDESTROYED	=		0x43
CONST WM_PAINT			=		0xF		/* The WM_PAINT message is sent when the system or another application makes a request to paint a portion of an application's window. */
CONST WM_PAINTCLIPBOARD		=		0x309		/* The WM_PAINTCLIPBOARD message is sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window when the clipboard contains data in the CF_OWNERDISPLAY format and the clipboard viewer's client area needs repainting. */
CONST WM_PAINTICON		=		0x26		/* The WM_PAINTICON message is sent to a minimized window when the icon is to be painted. This message is not sent by newer versions of Microsoft Windows, except in unusual circumstances explained in the Remarks. */
CONST WM_PALETTECHANGED		=		0x311		/* The WM_PALETTECHANGED message is sent to all top-level and overlapped windows after the window with the keyboard focus has realized its logical palette, thereby changing the system palette. */
CONST WM_PALETTEISCHANGING	=		0x310		/* The WM_PALETTEISCHANGING message informs applications that an application is going to realize its logical palette. */
CONST WM_PARENTNOTIFY		=		0x210		/* The WM_PARENTNOTIFY message is sent to the parent of a child window when the child window is created or destroyed, or when the user clicks a mouse button while the cursor is over the child window. */
CONST WM_PASTE			=		0x302		/* An application sends a WM_PASTE message to an edit control or combo box to copy the current content of the clipboard to the edit control at the current caret position. Data is inserted only if the clipboard contains data in CF_TEXT format. */
CONST WM_PENWINFIRST		=		0x380
CONST WM_PENWINLAST		=		0x38F
CONST WM_POWER			=		0x48		/* The WM_POWER message is broadcast when the system, typically a battery-powered personal computer, is about to enter suspended mode. */
CONST WM_POWERBROADCAST		=		0x218		/* The WM_POWERBROADCAST message is broadcast to an application to notify it of power-management events. */
CONST WM_PRINT			=		0x317		/* The WM_PRINT message is sent to a window to request that it draw itself in the specified device context, most commonly in a printer device context. */
CONST WM_PRINTCLIENT		=		0x318		/* The WM_PRINTCLIENT message is sent to a window to request that it draw its client area in the specified device context, most commonly in a printer device context. */
CONST WM_PSD_ENVSTAMPRECT	=		(WM_USER+5)
CONST WM_PSD_FULLPAGERECT	=		(WM_USER+1)
CONST WM_PSD_GREEKTEXTRECT	=		(WM_USER+4)
CONST WM_PSD_MARGINRECT		=		(WM_USER+3)
CONST WM_PSD_MINMARGINRECT	=		(WM_USER+2)
CONST WM_PSD_PAGESETUPDLG	=		(WM_USER)
CONST WM_PSD_YAFULLPAGERECT	=		(WM_USER+6)
CONST WM_QUERYDRAGICON		=		0x37		/* The WM_QUERYDRAGICON message is sent to a minimized (iconic) window. The window is about to be dragged by the user but does not have an icon defined for its class. An application can return a handle to an icon or cursor. */
CONST WM_QUERYENDSESSION	=		0x11		/* The WM_QUERYENDSESSION message is sent when the user chooses to end the session or when an application calls the ExitWindows function. */
CONST WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE	=		0x30F		/* The WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE message informs a window that it is about to receive the keyboard focus, giving the window the opportunity to realize its logical palette when it receives the focus. */
CONST WM_QUERYOPEN		=		0x13		/* The WM_QUERYOPEN message is sent to an icon when the user requests that the window be restored to its previous size and position. */
CONST WM_QUERYUISTATE		=		0x129		/* An application sends the WM_QUERYUISTATE message to retrieve the user interface (UI) state for a window. */
CONST WM_QUEUESYNC		=		0x23		/* The WM_QUEUESYNC message is sent by a computer-based training (CBT) application to separate user-input messages from other messages sent through the WH_JOURNALPLAYBACK Hook procedure. */
CONST WM_QUIT			=		0x12		/* The WM_QUIT message indicates a request to terminate an application and is generated when the application calls the PostQuitMessage function. It causes the GetMessage function to return zero. */
CONST WM_RASDIALEVENT		=		0xCCCD		/* The operating system sends a WM_RASDIALEVENT message to a window procedure when a change of state event occurs during a RAS connection process. */
CONST WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK		=		0x206		/* The WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the right mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_RBUTTONDOWN		=		0x204		/* The WM_RBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the right mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_RBUTTONUP		=		0x205		/* The WM_RBUTTONUP message is posted when the user releases the right mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_RENDERALLFORMATS	=		0x306		/* The WM_RENDERALLFORMATS message is sent to the clipboard owner before it is destroyed, if the clipboard owner has delayed rendering one or more clipboard formats. */
CONST WM_RENDERFORMAT		=		0x305		/* The WM_RENDERFORMAT message is sent to the clipboard owner if it has delayed rendering a specific clipboard format and if an application has requested data in that format. */
CONST WM_SETCURSOR		=		0x20		/* The WM_SETCURSOR message is sent to a window if the mouse causes the cursor to move within a window and mouse input is not captured. */
CONST WM_SETFOCUS		=		0x7		/* The WM_SETFOCUS message is sent to a window after it has gained the keyboard focus. */
CONST WM_SETFONT		=		0x30		/* An application sends a WM_SETFONT message to specify the font that a control is to use when drawing text. */
CONST WM_SETHOTKEY		=		0x32		/* An application sends a WM_SETHOTKEY message to a window to associate a hot key with the window. When the user presses the hot key, the system activates the window. */
CONST WM_SETICON		=		0x80		/* An application sends the WM_SETICON message to associate a new large or small icon with a window. The system displays the large icon in the ALT+TAB dialog box, and the small icon in the window caption. */
CONST WM_SETREDRAW		=		0xB		/* An application sends the WM_SETREDRAW message to a window to allow changes in that window to be redrawn or to prevent changes in that window from being redrawn. */
CONST WM_SETTEXT		=		0xC		/* An application sends a WM_SETTEXT message to set the text of a window. */
CONST WM_SETTINGCHANGE		=		0x1A		/* The system sends the WM_SETTINGCHANGE message to all top-level windows when the SystemParametersInfo function changes a system-wide setting or when policy settings have changed. */
CONST WM_SHOWWINDOW		=		0x18		/* The WM_SHOWWINDOW message is sent to a window when the window is about to be hidden or shown. */
CONST WM_SIZE			=		0x5		/* The WM_SIZE message is sent to a window after its size has changed. */
CONST WM_SIZECLIPBOARD		=		0x30B		/* The WM_SIZECLIPBOARD message is sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window when the clipboard contains data in the CF_OWNERDISPLAY format and the clipboard viewer's client area has changed size */
CONST WM_SIZING			=		0x214		/* The WM_SIZING message is sent to a window that the user is resizing. By processing this message, an application can monitor the size and position of the drag rectangle and, if needed, change its size or position. */
CONST WM_SPOOLERSTATUS		=		0x2A		/* The WM_SPOOLERSTATUS message is sent from Print Manager whenever a job is added to or removed from the Print Manager queue. */
CONST WM_STYLECHANGED		=		0x7D		/* The WM_STYLECHANGED message is sent to a window after the SetWindowLong function has changed one or more of the window's styles. */
CONST WM_STYLECHANGING		=		0x7C		/* The WM_STYLECHANGING message is sent to a window when the SetWindowLong function is about to change one or more of the window's styles. */
CONST WM_SYNCPAINT		=		0x88		/* The WM_SYNCPAINT message is used to synchronize painting while avoiding linking independent GUI threads. */
CONST WM_SYSCHAR		=		0x106		/* The WM_SYSCHAR message is posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_SYSKEYDOWN message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. */
CONST WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE		=		0x15		/* The WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE message is sent to all top-level windows when a change is made to a system color setting. */
CONST WM_SYSCOMMAND		=		0x112		/* A window receives this message when the user chooses a command from the Window menu (formerly known as the system or control menu) or when the user chooses the maximize button, minimize button, restore button, or close button. */
CONST WM_SYSDEADCHAR		=		0x107		/* The WM_SYSDEADCHAR message is sent to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_SYSKEYDOWN message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. */
CONST WM_SYSKEYDOWN		=		0x104		/* The WM_SYSKEYDOWN message is posted to the window with the keyboard focus when the user presses the F10 key (which activates the menu bar) or holds down the ALT key and then presses another key. */
CONST WM_SYSKEYUP		=		0x105		/* The WM_SYSKEYUP message is posted to the window with the keyboard focus when the user releases a key that was pressed while the ALT key was held down. */
CONST WM_TCARD			=		0x52		/* Sent to an application that has initiated a training card with Microsoft Windows Help. The message informs the application when the user clicks an authorable button. */
CONST WM_TIMECHANGE		=		0x1E		/* An application sends the WM_TIMECHANGE message whenever it updates the system time. */
CONST WM_TIMER			=		0x113		/* The WM_TIMER message is posted to the installing threadapos;s message queue when a timer expires. The message is posted by the GetMessage or PeekMessage function. */
CONST WM_UNDO			=		0x304		/* An application sends a WM_UNDO message to an edit control to undo the last operation. When this message is sent to an edit control, the previously deleted text is restored or the previously added text is deleted. */
CONST WM_UNINITMENUPOPUP	=		0x125		/* The WM_UNINITMENUPOPUP message is sent when a drop-down menu or submenu has been destroyed. */
CONST WM_UPDATEUISTATE		=		0x128		/* An application sends the WM_UPDATEUISTATE message to change the user interface (UI) state for the specified window and all its child windows. */
CONST WM_USERCHANGED		=		0x54		/* The WM_USERCHANGED message is sent to all windows after the user has logged on or off. When the user logs on or off, the system updates the user-specific settings. The system sends this message immediately after updating the settings. */
CONST WM_VKEYTOITEM		=		0x2E		/* The WM_VKEYTOITEM message is sent by a list box with the LBS_WANTKEYBOARDINPUT style to its owner in response to a WM_KEYDOWN message. */
CONST WM_VSCROLL		=		0x115		/* The WM_VSCROLL message is sent to a window when a scroll event occurs in the windowapos;s standard vertical scroll bar. This message is also sent to the owner of a vertical scroll bar control when a scroll event occurs in the control. */
CONST WM_VSCROLLCLIPBOARD	=		0x30A		/* The WM_VSCROLLCLIPBOARD message is sent to the clipboard owner by a clipboard viewer window when the clipboard contains data in the CF_OWNERDISPLAY format and an event occurs in the clipboard viewerapos;s vertical scroll bar. */
CONST WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED	=		0x47		/* The WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message is sent to a window whose size, position, or place in the Z order has changed as a result of a call to the SetWindowPos function or another window-management function. */
CONST WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING	=		0x46		/* The WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING message is sent to a window whose size, position, or place in the Z order is about to change as a result of a call to the SetWindowPos function or another window-management function. */
CONST WM_WININICHANGE		=		0x1A		/* An application sends the WM_WININICHANGE message to all top-level windows after making a change to the WIN.INI file. The SystemParametersInfo function sends this message after an application uses the function to change a setting in WIN.INI. */
CONST WM_WNT_CONVERTREQUESTEX	=		0x109
CONST WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK		=		0x20D		/* The WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the first or second X button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_XBUTTONDOWN		=		0x20B		/* The WM_XBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the first or second X button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WM_XBUTTONUP		=		0x20C		/* The WM_XBUTTONUP message is posted when the user releases the first or second X button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. */
CONST WS_ACTIVECAPTION		=		0x1
CONST WS_BORDER			=		0x800000		/* Creates a window that has a thin-line border. */
CONST WS_CAPTION		=		0xc00000		/* Creates a window that has a title bar (includes the WS_BORDER style). */
CONST WS_CHILD			=		0x40000000		/* Creates a child window. A window with this style cannot have a menu bar. This style cannot be used with the WS_POPUP style. */
CONST WS_CHILDWINDOW		=		(WS_CHILD)		/* Same as the WS_CHILD style. */
CONST WS_CLIPCHILDREN		=		0x2000000		/* Excludes the area occupied by child windows when drawing occurs within the parent window. This style is used when creating the parent window. */
CONST WS_CLIPSIBLINGS		=		0x4000000		/* Clips child windows relative to each other; that is, when a particular child window receives a WM_PAINT message, the WS_CLIPSIBLINGS style clips all other overlapping child windows out of the region of the child window to be updated. */
CONST WS_DISABLED		=		0x8000000		/* Creates a window that is initially disabled. A disabled window cannot receive input from the user. To change this after a window has been created, use EnableWindow. */
CONST WS_DLGFRAME		=		0x400000		/* Creates a window that has a border of a style typically used with dialog boxes. A window with this style cannot have a title bar. */
CONST WS_GROUP			=		0x20000		/* Specifies the first control of a group of controls. The group consists of this first control and all controls defined after it, up to the next control with the WS_GROUP style. */
CONST WS_HSCROLL		=		0x100000		/* Creates a window that has a horizontal scroll bar. */
CONST WS_MAXIMIZE		=		0x1000000		/* Creates a window that is initially maximized. */
CONST WS_MAXIMIZEBOX		=		0x10000		/* Creates a window that has a maximize button. Cannot be combined with the WS_EX_CONTEXTHELP style. The WS_SYSMENU style must also be specified. */
CONST WS_MINIMIZE		=		0x20000000		/* Creates a window that is initially minimized. Same as the WS_ICONIC style. */
CONST WS_MINIMIZEBOX		=		0x20000		/* Creates a window that has a minimize button. Cannot be combined with the WS_EX_CONTEXTHELP style. The WS_SYSMENU style must also be specified. */
CONST WS_ICONIC			=		(WS_MINIMIZE)		/* Creates a window that is initially minimized. Same as the WS_MINIMIZE style. */
CONST WS_OVERLAPPED		=		0x0		/* Creates an overlapped window. An overlapped window has a title bar and a border. Same as the WS_TILED style. */
CONST WS_POPUP			=		0x80000000		/* Creates a pop-up window. This style cannot be used with the WS_CHILD style. */
CONST WS_SYSMENU		=		0x80000		/* Creates a window that has a window menu on its title bar. The WS_CAPTION style must also be specified. */
CONST WS_TABSTOP		=		0x10000		/* Specifies a control that can receive the keyboard focus when the user presses the TAB key. Pressing the TAB key changes the keyboard focus to the next control with the WS_TABSTOP style. */
CONST WS_THICKFRAME		=		0x40000		/* Creates a window that has a sizing border. Same as the WS_SIZEBOX style. */
CONST WS_TILED			=		(WS_OVERLAPPED)		/* Creates an overlapped window. An overlapped window has a title bar and a border. Same as the WS_OVERLAPPED style. */
CONST WS_VISIBLE		=		0x10000000		/* Creates a window that is initially visible. */
CONST WS_VSCROLL		=		0x200000		/* Creates a window that has a vertical scroll bar. */
CONST WS_SIZEBOX		=		(WS_THICKFRAME)		/* Creates a window that has a sizing border. Same as the WS_THICKFRAME style. */
CONST WS_GT			=		(WS_GROUP|WS_TABSTOP)
CONST WS_POPUPWINDOW		=		(WS_POPUP|WS_BORDER|WS_SYSMENU)		/* Creates a pop-up window with WS_BORDER, WS_POPUP, and WS_SYSMENU styles. The WS_CAPTION and WS_POPUPWINDOW styles must be combined to make the window menu visible. */
CONST WS_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW	=		(WS_OVERLAPPED|WS_CAPTION|WS_SYSMENU|WS_THICKFRAME|WS_MINIMIZEBOX|WS_MAXIMIZEBOX)		/* Creates an overlapped window with the WS_OVERLAPPED, WS_CAPTION, WS_SYSMENU, WS_THICKFRAME, WS_MINIMIZEBOX, and WS_MAXIMIZEBOX styles. Same as the WS_TILEDWINDOW style. */
CONST WS_TILEDWINDOW		=		(WS_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW)		/* Creates an overlapped window with the WS_OVERLAPPED, WS_CAPTION, WS_SYSMENU, WS_THICKFRAME, WS_MINIMIZEBOX, and WS_MAXIMIZEBOX styles. Same as the WS_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW style. */
CONST WS_EX_ACCEPTFILES		=		0x10		/* Specifies that a window created with this style accepts drag-drop files. */
CONST WS_EX_APPWINDOW		=		0x40000		/* Forces a top-level window onto the taskbar when the window is visible. */
CONST WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE		=		0x200		/* Specifies that a window has a border with a sunken edge. */
CONST WS_EX_COMPOSITED		=		0x02000000		/* Windows XP Paints all descendants of a window in bottom-to-top painting order using double-buffering. */
CONST WS_EX_CONTEXTHELP		=		0x400		/* Includes a question mark in the title bar of the window. When the user clicks the question mark, the cursor changes to a question mark with a pointer. */
CONST WS_EX_CONTROLPARENT	=		0x10000		/* The window itself contains child windows that should take part in dialog box navigation. */
CONST WS_EX_DLGMODALFRAME	=		0x1		/* Creates a window that has a double border; the window can, optionally, be created with a title bar by specifying the WS_CAPTION style in the dwStyle parameter. */
CONST WS_EX_LAYERED		=		0x80000		/* Windows 2000/XP Creates a layered window. Note that this cannot be used for child windows. Also, this cannot be used if the window has a class style of either CS_OWNDC or CS_CLASSDC */
CONST WS_EX_LAYOUTRTL		=		0x400000	/* Arabic and Hebrew versions of Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP Creates a window whose horizontal origin is on the right edge. Increasing horizontal values advance to the left. */
CONST WS_EX_LEFT		=		0x0		/* Creates a window that has generic left-aligned properties. This is the default. */
CONST WS_EX_LEFTSCROLLBAR	=		0x4000		/* If the shell language is Hebrew, Arabic, or another language that supports reading order alignment, the vertical scroll bar (if present) is to the left of the client area. For other languages, the style is ignored. */
CONST WS_EX_LTRREADING		=		0x0		/* The window text is displayed using left-to-right reading-order properties. This is the default. */
CONST WS_EX_MDICHILD		=		0x40		/* Creates a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window. */
CONST WS_EX_NOACTIVATE		=		0x8000000	/* Windows 2000/XP A top-level window created with this style does not become the foreground window when the user clicks it. The system does not bring this window to the foreground when the user minimizes or closes the foreground window. */
CONST WS_EX_NOINHERITLAYOUT	=		0x100000	/* Windows 2000/XP A window created with this style does not pass its window layout to its child windows. */
CONST WS_EX_NOPARENTNOTIFY	=		0x4		/* Specifies that a child window created with this style does not send the WM_PARENTNOTIFY message to its parent window when it is created or destroyed. */
CONST WS_EX_RIGHT		=		0x1000		/* The window has generic "right-aligned" properties. This depends on the window class. This style has an effect only if the shell language is Hebrew, Arabic, or another language that supports reading-order alignment; otherwise, the style is ignored. */
CONST WS_EX_RIGHTSCROLLBAR	=		0x0		/* Vertical scroll bar (if present) is to the right of the client area. This is the default. */
CONST WS_EX_RTLREADING		=		0x2000		/* If the shell language is Hebrew, Arabic, or another language that supports reading-order alignment, the window text is displayed using right-to-left reading-order properties. For other languages, the style is ignored. */
CONST WS_EX_STATICEDGE		=		0x20000		/* Creates a window with a three-dimensional border style intended to be used for items that do not accept user input. */
CONST WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW		=		0x80		/* Creates a tool window; that is, a window intended to be used as a floating toolbar. A tool window has a title bar that is shorter than a normal title bar, and the window title is drawn using a smaller font.  */
CONST WS_EX_TOPMOST		=		0x8		/* Specifies that a window created with this style should be placed above all non-topmost windows and should stay above them, even when the window is deactivated. To add or remove this style, use the SetWindowPos function. */
CONST WS_EX_TRANSPARENT		=		0x20		/* Specifies that a window created with this style should not be painted until siblings beneath the window (that were created by the same thread) have been painted. */
CONST WS_EX_WINDOWEDGE		=		0x100		/* Specifies that a window has a border with a raised edge. */
CONST WS_EX_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW	=		(WS_EX_WINDOWEDGE|WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE)		/* Combines the WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE and WS_EX_WINDOWEDGE styles. */
CONST WS_EX_PALETTEWINDOW	=		(WS_EX_WINDOWEDGE|WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW|WS_EX_TOPMOST)		/* Combines the WS_EX_WINDOWEDGE, WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW, and WS_EX_TOPMOST styles. */